Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
PURE AND APPLIED MATHEMATICS A Program of Monographs, Textbooks, and Lecture Notes
EXECUTIVE EDITORS Earl J. Taft Rutgers University Piscataway, New Jersey
Zuhair Nashed University of Central Florida Orlando, Florida
EDITORIAL BOARD M. S. Baouendi Anil Nerode University of California, Cornell University San Diego Freddy van Oystaeyen Jane Cronin University of Antwerp, Rutgers University Belgium Jack K. Hale Georgia Institute of Technology
Donald Passman University of Wisconsin, Madison
S. Kobayashi University of California, Fred S. Roberts Berkeley Rutgers University
Marvin Marcus David L. Russell University of California, Virginia Polytechnic Institute Santa Barbara and State University W. S. Massey Yale University
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Walter Schempp Universität Siegen
MONOGRAPHS AND TEXTBOOKS IN PURE AND APPLIED MATHEMATICS
Recent Titles Walter Ferrer and Alvaro Rittatore, Actions and Invariants of Algebraic Groups (2005) Christof Eck, Jiri Jarusek, and Miroslav Krbec, Unilateral Contact Problems: Variational Methods and Existence Theorems (2005) M. M. Rao, Conditional Measures and Applications, Second Edition (2005) A. B. Kharazishvili, Strange Functions in Real Analysis, Second Edition (2006) Vincenzo Ancona and Bernard Gaveau, Differential Forms on Singular Varieties: De Rham and Hodge Theory Simplified (2005) Santiago Alves Tavares, Generation of Multivariate Hermite Interpolating Polynomials (2005) Sergio Macías, Topics on Continua (2005) Mircea Sofonea, Weimin Han, and Meir Shillor, Analysis and Approximation of Contact Problems with Adhesion or Damage (2006) Marwan Moubachir and Jean-Paul Zolésio, Moving Shape Analysis and Control: Applications to Fluid Structure Interactions (2006) Alfred Geroldinger and Franz Halter-Koch, Non-Unique Factorizations: Algebraic, Combinatorial and Analytic Theory (2006) Kevin J. Hastings, Introduction to the Mathematics of Operations Research with Mathematica®, Second Edition (2006) Robert Carlson, A Concrete Introduction to Real Analysis (2006) John Dauns and Yiqiang Zhou, Classes of Modules (2006) N. K. Govil, H. N. Mhaskar, Ram N. Mohapatra, Zuhair Nashed, and J. Szabados, Frontiers in Interpolation and Approximation (2006) Luca Lorenzi and Marcello Bertoldi, Analytical Methods for Markov Semigroups (2006) M. A. Al-Gwaiz and S. A. Elsanousi, Elements of Real Analysis (2006) Theodore G. Faticoni, Direct Sum Decompositions of Torsion-Free Finite Rank Groups (2007) R. Sivaramakrishnan, Certain Number-Theoretic Episodes in Algebra (2006) Aderemi Kuku, Representation Theory and Higher Algebraic K-Theory (2006) Robert Piziak and P. L. Odell, Matrix Theory: From Generalized Inverses to Jordan Form (2007) Norman L. Johnson, Vikram Jha, and Mauro Biliotti, Handbook of Finite Translation Planes (2007) Lieven Le Bruyn, Noncommutative Geometry and Cayley-smooth Orders (2008) Fritz Schwarz, Algorithmic Lie Theory for Solving Ordinary Differential Equations (2008) Jane Cronin, Ordinary Differential Equations: Introduction and Qualitative Theory, Third Edition (2008) Su Gao, Invariant Descriptive Set Theory (2009)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Su Gao
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapman & Hall/CRC Taylor & Francis Group 6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300 Boca Raton, FL 33487-2742 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC Chapman & Hall/CRC is an imprint of Taylor & Francis Group, an Informa business No claim to original U.S. Government works Printed in the United States of America on acid-free paper 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 International Standard Book Number-13: 978-1-58488-793-5 (Hardcover) This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the author and publisher cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or the consequences of their use. The authors and publishers have attempted to trace the copyright holders of all material reproduced in this publication and apologize to copyright holders if permission to publish in this form has not been obtained. If any copyright material has not been acknowledged please write and let us know so we may rectify in any future reprint. Except as permitted under U.S. Copyright Law, no part of this book may be reprinted, reproduced, transmitted, or utilized in any form by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying, microfilming, and recording, or in any information storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publishers. For permission to photocopy or use material electronically from this work, please access www.copyright.com (http://www.copyright.com/) or contact the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc. (CCC), 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400. CCC is a not-for-profit organization that provides licenses and registration for a variety of users. For organizations that have been granted a photocopy license by the CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged. Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation without intent to infringe. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Gao, Su, 1968Invariant descriptive set theory / Su Gao. p. cm. -- (Pure and applied mathematics) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978-1-58488-793-5 (alk. paper) 1. Descriptive set theory. 2. Invariant sets. I. Title. QA248.G36 2009 511.3’22--dc22 Visit the Taylor & Francis Web site at http://www.taylorandfrancis.com and the CRC Press Web site at http://www.crcpress.com
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
2008031545
To Shuang, Alvin, and Tony, with love
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Contents
Preface
I
xiii
Polish Group Actions
1
1 Preliminaries 1.1 Polish spaces . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 The universal Urysohn space . . 1.3 Borel sets and Borel functions . 1.4 Standard Borel spaces . . . . . . 1.5 The effective hierarchy . . . . . 1.6 Analytic sets and Σ11 sets . . . . 1.7 Coanalytic sets and Π11 sets . . . 1.8 The Gandy–Harrington topology
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
3 4 8 13 18 23 29 33 36
2 Polish Groups 2.1 Metrics on topological groups . 2.2 Polish groups . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Continuity of homomorphisms 2.4 The permutation group S∞ . . 2.5 Universal Polish groups . . . . 2.6 The Graev metric groups . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
39 40 44 51 54 59 62
3 Polish Group Actions 3.1 Polish G-spaces . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 The Vaught transforms . . . . . . 3.3 Borel G-spaces . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Orbit equivalence relations . . . . 3.5 Extensions of Polish group actions 3.6 The logic actions . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
71 71 75 81 85 89 92
4 Finer Polish Topologies 4.1 Strong Choquet spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Change of topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Finer topologies on Polish G-spaces . . . . . . 4.4 Topological realization of Borel G-spaces . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
97 97 102 105 109
. . . . . .
ix © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
x
II
Theory of Equivalence Relations
115
5 Borel Reducibility 5.1 Borel reductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Faithful Borel reductions . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Perfect set theorems for equivalence relations 5.4 Smooth equivalence relations . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
117 117 121 124 128
6 The 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
133 133 137 141 147 151
7 Countable Borel Equivalence Relations 7.1 Generalities of countable Borel equivalence relations 7.2 Hyperfinite equivalence relations . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Universal countable Borel equivalence relations . . . 7.4 Amenable groups and amenable equivalence relations 7.5 Actions of locally compact Polish groups . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
157 157 160 165 168 174
8 Borel Equivalence Relations 8.1 Hypersmooth equivalence relations . . . . . . . 8.2 Borel orbit equivalence relations . . . . . . . . 8.3 A jump operator for Borel equivalence relations 8.4 Examples of Fσ equivalence relations . . . . . 8.5 Examples of Π03 equivalence relations . . . . .
. . . . .
Glimm–Effros Dichotomy The equivalence relation E0 . . . . . . . . . . Orbit equivalence relations embedding E0 . . The Harrington–Kechris–Louveau theorem . Consequences of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy Actions of cli Polish groups . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
179 179 184 187 193 196
9 Analytic Equivalence Relations 9.1 The Burgess trichotomy theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Definable reductions among analytic equivalence relations 9.3 Actions of standard Borel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Wild Polish groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 The topological Vaught conjecture . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
201 201 206 210 213 219
10 Turbulent Actions of Polish Groups 10.1 Homomorphisms and generic ergodicity . . 10.2 Local orbits of Polish group actions . . . . 10.3 Turbulent and generically turbulent actions 10.4 The Hjorth turbulence theorem . . . . . . 10.5 Examples of turbulence . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Orbit equivalence relations and E1 . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
223 223 227 230 235 239 241
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
xi
III
Countable Model Theory
245
11 Polish Topologies of Infinitary Logic 11.1 A review of first-order logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Model theory of infinitary logic . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Invariant Borel classes of countable models . . . . 11.4 Polish topologies generated by countable fragments 11.5 Atomic models and Gδ orbits . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
247 247 252 256 262 266
12 The 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5
Scott Analysis Elements of the Scott analysis . . . . . . . . . Borel approximations of isomorphism relations The Scott rank and computable ordinals . . . A topological variation of the Scott analysis . Sharp analysis of S∞ -orbits . . . . . . . . . . .
13 Natural Classes of Countable 13.1 Countable graphs . . . . . 13.2 Countable trees . . . . . . 13.3 Countable linear orderings 13.4 Countable groups . . . . .
IV
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
273 273 279 283 286 292
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
299 299 304 310 314
Applications to Classification Problems
321
14 Classification by Example: Polish Metric Spaces 14.1 Standard Borel structures on hyperspaces . . . . . 14.2 Classification versus nonclassification . . . . . . . 14.3 Measurement of complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Classification notions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
323 323 329 334 339
15 Summary of Benchmark Equivalence Relations 15.1 Classification problems up to essential countability 15.2 A roadmap of Borel equivalence relations . . . . . 15.3 Orbit equivalence relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 General Σ11 equivalence relations . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Beyond analyticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
345 345 348 350 352 353
A Proofs about the Gandy–Harrington Topology A.1 The Gandy basis theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 The Gandy–Harrington topology on Xlow . . . . . . . . . . .
355 355 358
References
361
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preface
My intention in writing this book is to bring into one place the basics of invariant descriptive set theory, also known as the descriptive set theory of definable equivalence relations. Invariant descriptive set theory has been an active field of research for about 20 years. Many researchers and students are impressed by its fast development and its relevance to other fields of mathematics, and would like to be better acquainted with the theory. I have tried to make this book as self-contained as possible, and at the same time covered what I believe to be the essential concepts, methods, and results. The book is designed as a graduate text suitable for a year-long course. I have kept the sections short so that they can be used as lecture notes, and most of the sections are followed by a number of exercise problems. Many exercises are propositions and even theorems needed later in the book. So the student is urged to make a serious effort to work them out. Ideally, the student should have some experience with classical and effective descriptive set theory before reading this book. But since this is most likely not the case, I have only assumed that the student knows some general topology. In the first chapter a review of classical and effective descriptive set theory is given, and throughout the book results are recalled as they become necessary. I can imagine that it is hard, but possible, for a student who has never seen any descriptive set theory to get started on the subject, but I believe that, with patience and diligence, the obstacles will be overcome eventually. I have to remark, primarily for the experts in the field, that the book is not intended to be a comprehensive account of all aspects of invariant descriptive set theory. A reader who is familiar with the materials of the book and who is interested in further developments should have no problem following the current literature on many topics and applications. The selection of topics contained in this book was greatly influenced by the book of Becker and Kechris [8] and some unpublished notes of Kechris. I would like to thank Julia Knight for inviting me to give a short course on invariant descriptive set theory at the University of Notre Dame in 2005. The first ideas for this book came from the notes for that short course. I would also like to thank the participants of the short course for typing the notes and for conversations on the topic. I am grateful to Dave Marker and Peter Cholak for the encouragement to write a graduate textbook on the subject. Special thanks are due to Longyun Ding and Vincent Kieftenbeld for comments and suggestions on the manuscript.
xiii © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
xiv
Preface
I would like to acknowledge the financial support of the National Science Foundation and the University of North Texas for the composition of this book and for related research. It would be impossible for me to write this book without the faculty developmental leave granted by the University of North Texas. Many thanks to all at CRC/Taylor & Francis for their untiring work to make this book a reality. I am indebted to Greg Hjorth for leading me into the field and to Alekos Kechris for many years of advice and support. It is a privilege for me to be acquainted with many colleagues and experts in the field, too numerous to list (see the References and Index), whose research results shaped this book. I benefited a great deal from communications with them and from their contributions to the literature. I present this book to them with gratitude and pride. Su Gao Denton, Texas
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Part I
Polish Group Actions
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 1 Preliminaries
This chapter reviews the concepts and results of classical and effective descriptive set theory that will be used in this book. Classical descriptive set theory was founded by Baire, Borel, Lebesgue, Luzin, Suslin, Sierpinski, and others in the first two decades of the twentieth century. The theory studies the descriptive complexity of sets of real numbers arising in ordinary mathematics, mostly in topology and analysis. The most striking achievements of this theory are the proofs of regularity properties of low-level definable sets of reals. Effective descriptive set theory was created later in the century by introducing into the classical theory the new and powerful tools developed from recursion theory (now called computability theory). Computability theory came about from completely different motivations and was invented by another group of great minds such as G¨ odel, Church, Turing, Kleene, and others. It provided a framework to understand the structural and computational complexity of sets and functions (mostly pertaining to natural numbers). The classical theory is much better understood from the perspective of the effective theory. In this chapter we review the basic concepts and results of both classical and effective theory that are relevant to the remainder of the book. Readers unfamiliar with these topics should be able to get a working idea about the content and the flavor of the theory by reading this chapter alone, and especially if they are diligent enough to work out the exercise problems in this chapter. Later in the book there will be more specific concepts and results being reviewed as they become necessary tools. In addition, some proofs are given in the appendix. The reader can probably get by with these reviews without ever systematically studying the classical and effective descriptive set theory, but an understanding of the comprehensive theory will be hugely advantageous. For a complete treatment of these topics the reader can consult the standard references. For classical descriptive set theory the standard textbook is [97] A. S. Kechris, Classical Descriptive Set Theory. Graduate Texts in Mathematics 156. Springer-Verlag, New York, 1995. And for effective descriptive set theory our standard source is [126] Y. N. Moschovakis, Descriptive Set Theory. Studies in Logic and
3 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
4
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory Foundations of Mathematics 100. North-Holland, Amsterdam, New York, 1980.
In addition, there are more concise treatments of the subject which provide efficient inroads to the theory and can be used as alternatives for or in conjunction with the standard texts: [148] by Srivastava, [125] by Martin and Kechris, [116] by Mansfield and Weitkamp, and [133] by Sacks. Thus in this chapter our review will be pragmatic and sketchy. Many facts, even theorems, are given without proof. Also we have left out important aspects of the theory just to get the reader quickly prepared to deal with the main topics of the book starting in Chapter 2. Let the story begin.
1.1
Polish spaces
Definition 1.1.1 A topological space is Polish if it is separable and completely metrizable. Some basic properties of Polish spaces are gathered in the following proposition. Proposition 1.1.2 (a) Any Polish space is second countable and normal. (b) Any Polish space is Baire. (Recall that a topological space is Baire if the intersection of countable many dense open sets is dense.) (c) A finite or countable product of Polish spaces is Polish. (d) A subspace Y of a Polish space X is Polish iff Y is Gδ in X, that is, Y is the intersection of countably many open sets in X. (e) A quotient space of a Polish space is not necessarily Polish. Clause (b) in the proposition is a direct consequence of the Baire category theorem, which says that a complete metric space is Baire. Examples of Polish spaces are abundant in mathematics. Some of the most familiar examples are listed below. Example 1.1.3 (1) All countable spaces with the discrete topology are Polish. These include
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
5
the following spaces: N = ω = {0, 1, 2, . . . }, N+ = N − {0} = {1, 2, . . . }, Z = {. . . , −2, −1, 0, 1, 2, . . . }. Throughout this book we use N and ω interchangeably. (2) Rn with the usual topology for 1 ≤ n ≤ ω are Polish. (3) The Baire space N = ω ω is Polish. A complete metric on N is defined by 0, if x = y, d(x, y) = 2−n−1 , if n ∈ ω is the least such that x(n) = y(n). (4) The Cantor space 2ω is a closed subspace of N , hence is Polish. (5) All separable Banach spaces, such as c0 and p (1 ≤ p < ∞), are Polish. Note that ∞ is not separable and therefore not a Polish space. (6) All compact metrizable spaces are Polish (see Exercise 1.1.1). Some nontrivial examples of Polish spaces involve hyperspaces of sets or functions. We examine two such examples below. Let d be a compatible metric on a Polish space X. Then we can define a compatible metric d on X with the property that d ≤ 1 as follows: d (x, y) =
d(x, y) . 1 + d(x, y)
Moreover, if d is complete then so is d . If x ∈ X and A ⊆ X, then we denote d(x, A) = d(A, x) = inf{d(x, y) : y ∈ A}. Let X be a Polish space. Let K(X) denote the space of all compact subsets of X equipped with the Vietoris topology generated by subbasic open sets of the following form: {K ∈ K(X) : K ⊆ U }, or {K ∈ K(X) : K ∩ U = ∅}, for U open in X. Then K(X) is Polish. An explicit compatible metric on K(X) is known as the Hausdorff metric. To define it, let d be a compatible
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
6
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
metric on X with d ≤ 1. Then the Hausdorff metric dH on K(X) is defined by ⎧ 0, if K = L = ∅, ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ 1, if exactly one of K, L is ∅, dH (K, L) = max{max{d(x, L) : x ∈ K}, max{d(K, y) : y ∈ L}}, ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ if K, L = ∅. It is routine to check the following facts, which are left as exercises (Exercises 1.1.4 and 1.1.5). dH is compatible with the Vietoris topology on K(X). Moreover, if d is complete then so is dH . Let D ⊆ X be a countable dense subset of X. Then the set {K ∈ K(X) : K ⊆ D is finite} is countable and dense in K(X). These imply that K(X) is a Polish space. Moreover, if X is a compact Polish space then so is K(X). Another kind of hyperspace comes from Lipschitz functions between Polish metric spaces. Definition 1.1.4 A Polish metric space is a separable complete metric space. Let (X, dX ), (Y, dY ) be Polish metric spaces. A map ϕ : X → Y is Lipschitz if for all x1 , x2 ∈ X, dY (ϕ(x1 ), ϕ(x2 )) ≤ dX (x1 , x2 ). Let L(X, Y ) denote the space of all Lipschitz maps from X into Y . Equip L(X, Y ) with the pointwise convergence topology. Alternatively, let D ⊆ X be a countable dense set and enumerate its elements by q1 , q2 . . . . Define a metric on L(X, Y ) by dL (ϕ, ψ) =
∞
2−i dY (ϕ(qi ), ψ(qi )),
i=1
dY
where ≤ 1 is the complete metric on Y compatible with dY defined above. Then dL is a metric on L(X, Y ) compatible with the pointwise convergence topology. Moreover, if dY is complete so is dL . Hence L(X, Y ) is Polish. However note that the definition of the particular metric dL depends on the choice of the countable dense set D, thus the metric dL is not canonical. An important special kind of Lipschitz maps is the class of distance-preserving functions. A map ϕ : X → Y is distance-preserving (or an isometric embedding) if for all x1 , x2 ∈ X, dY (ϕ(x1 ), ϕ(x2 )) = dX (x1 , x2 ). Let DP (X, Y ) denote the space of all distance-preserving maps from X into Y . Equip DP (X, Y ) with the pointwise convergence topology. Then DP (X, Y ) is a closed subspace of L(X, Y ) and hence is Polish.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
7
Exercise 1.1.1 Show that a compact metrizable space is second countable and that any compatible metric is complete. Thus a compact metrizable space is Polish. Exercise 1.1.2 Show that a locally compact metrizable space is Polish iff its one-point compactification is metrizable. Exercise 1.1.3 Let d0 be a compatible metric on a Polish space X. Define a metric d1 by d1 (x, y) = 1 − e−d0 (x,y) . Show that d1 ≤ 1 is a compatible metric on X. Moreover, if d0 is complete then so is d1 . Exercise 1.1.4 Let X be a Polish space and d ≤ 1 a compatible metric on X. Show that the Hausdorff metric dH is compatible with the Vietoris topology on K(X). Moreover, if d is complete, then so is dH . Exercise 1.1.5 Show that if X is compact Polish then so is K(X). Exercise 1.1.6 Let X be a compact Polish space with a compatible metric dX . Let Y be a Polish space with a compatible complete metric dY . Denote by C(X, Y ) the space of all continuous functions from X into Y . Show that the following topologies are equivalent and Polish: (i) the compact-open topology, that is, the topology given by subbasic open sets of the form {f ∈ C(X, Y ) : f (K) ⊆ U } for K ⊆ X compact and U ⊆ Y open; (ii) the metric topology given by the supnorm metric dC (f, g) = sup{dY (f (x), g(x)) : x ∈ X}. Exercise 1.1.7 Let (X, dX ), (Y, dY ) be Polish metric spaces. A map ϕ : (X, dX ) → (Y, dY ) is an isometry if it is distance-preserving and onto. Denote by Iso(X, Y ) the space of all isometries from X onto Y equipped with the pointwise convergence topology. Show that Iso(X, Y ) is a Gδ subspace of DP (X, Y ), and hence is Polish. Exercise 1.1.8 Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space. For x ∈ X, let ϕx (y) = d(x, y). Show that (1) ϕx ∈ L(X, R) for all x ∈ X. (2) The map x → ϕx is a Lipschitz map from X into L(X, R), regardless of the choice of the countable set D in the definition of the metric dL .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
8
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 1.1.9 Let X be a separable metrizable space with a compatible metric d ≤ 1. Let L(X, d) denote the space L((X, d), [0, 1]), that is, the space of all Lipschitz functions from (X, d) into [0, 1] (with the usual metric) with the pointwise convergence topology. Show that L(X, d) is compact metrizable, hence is Polish.
1.2
The universal Urysohn space
In 1927, Urysohn [157] defined a Polish metric space which turned out to contain all other Polish spaces as closed subspaces. Besides the universality, this space also possesses other nice properties. It has attracted a lot of attention in recent years. In this section we give a construction of the universal Urysohn space due to Katˇetov [88]. Definition 1.2.1 Let (X, d) be a separable metric space. A function f : X → R is admissible if for all x, y ∈ X, |f (x) − f (y)| ≤ d(x, y) ≤ f (x) + f (y). Every admissible function on X corresponds to a way to extend X by one point. Let E(X) denote the space of all admissible functions on (X, d). Define a metric on E(X) by dE (f, g) = sup{|f (x) − g(x)| : x ∈ X}. We can view E(X) as an extension of X with the following embedding of X into E(X). For x ∈ X let fx (y) = d(x, y). Then it is easy to check that x → fx is an isometric embedding of X into E(X). For notational simplicity we will identify X with its image in E(X) under this canonical isometric embedding and regard X as a subset of E(X). Note, however, that E(X) is not necessarily separable (see Exercise 1.2.4). To get separability we need to consider the concept of support for admissible functions. Definition 1.2.2 Let f be an admissible function on (X, d) and S ⊆ X. We say that S is a support for f if for all x ∈ X, f (x) = inf{f (y) + d(x, y) : y ∈ S}. f is called finitely supported if there is a finite support for f .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
9
Let now E(X, ω) = {f ∈ E(X) : f is finitely supported}. Then E(X, ω) is a subspace of E(X). Note that the function fx defined above has a support {x}, thus in particular it is finitely supported. This shows that E(X, ω) is also an extension of X. Moreover, E(X, ω) is separable if X is (see Exercise 1.2.5). Given any separable metric space (X, d), define by induction a sequence of spaces Xi , i ∈ ω, as follows: X0 = X, Xi+1 = E(Xi , ω). Since each Xi+1 is a natural extension of Xi as a metric space, it makes sense to take the union of all of Xi . Thus we let Xω = Xi , i≥0
and let dω be the canonical extension of d on Xω . Now the main results of Urysohn imply that, for any separable metric spaces X and Y , the completions of Xω and of Yω are isometric. This unique completion is called the universal Urysohn space. It is obvious that it contains every Polish (metric) space as a closed subspace. Officially, we make the following definition. Notation 1.2.3 The universal Urysohn space U is the completion of (Rω , dω ). In the remainder of this section we prove the results of Urysohn. First we need the following important concept. Definition 1.2.4 A metric space (X, d) has the Urysohn property if for any finite subset F of X and any admissible function f on F , there is x ∈ X such that f (p) = d(x, p) for any p ∈ F . Theorem 1.2.5 (Urysohn) Let (X, dX ) and (Y, dY ) be Polish metric spaces with the Urysohn property. Then there is an isometry from X onto Y . Proof. Let DX be a countable dense subset of X and enumerate its elements as x0 , x1 , . . . , xn , . . . . Similarly, let DY be a countable dense subset of Y and enumerate it as y0 , y1 , . . . , yn , . . . . Using the Urysohn property for both X and Y , we define a partial isometry ϕ from a subset of X into Y , so that DX ⊆ dom(ϕ) and DY ⊆ range(ϕ). This ϕ is constructed by induction on
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
10
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
n. At stage n we construct a partial isometry ϕn extending ϕn−1 so that dom(ϕn ) is finite, {x0 , . . . , xn } ⊆ dom(ϕn ) and {y0 , . . . , yn } ⊆ range(ϕn ). To begin with we let ϕ0 (x0 ) = y0 and ϕ0 is otherwise undefined. At stage n > 0, suppose that ϕn−1 has been defined so that {x0 , . . . , xn−1 } ⊆ dom(ϕn−1 ) and {y0 , . . . , yn−1 } ⊆ range(ϕn−1 ). If xn ∈ dom(ϕn−1 ) then we let ϕ = ϕn−1 . Otherwise, let F = range(ϕn−1 ) and consider the admissible function on F defined by f (p) = dX (ϕ−1 n−1 (p), xn ). By the Urysohn property of Y there is y ∈ Y so that dY (p, y) = f (p) = dX (ϕ−1 n−1 (p), xn ). We extend ϕn−1 to ϕ by defining ϕ (xn ) = y. Now if yn ∈ range(ϕ ) then we let ϕn = ϕ and go on to the next stage. Otherwise apply the above argument to ϕ−1 and use the Urysohn property of X to obtain an extension of ϕ . Define ϕn to be this extension. We have thus finished the definition of ϕn . Let ϕ be the union of all ϕn we have defined. Then it has the required properties. Finally extend ϕ further to the whole space X by the following definition. For x ∈ X − DX let (zn ) be a sequence in DX with zn → x as n → ∞. Then define ϕ(x) = lim ϕ(zn ). n
Since (zn ) is a dX -Cauchy sequence, (ϕ(zn )) is a dY -Cauchy sequence and therefore the right-hand-side limit exists. By a similar argument we see that ϕ(x) does not depend on the choice of (zn ) and therefore is well defined. It is also easy to see that the extended ϕ is onto Y and that it is an isometry. The above proof illustrates a typical use of the Urysohn property in a backand-forth argument. It is easy to see that, for any separable metric space X the extension space Xω has the Urysohn property. In the following we show that the completion of a metric space with the Urysohn property retains the Urysohn property. This implies that the universal Urysohn space U has the Urysohn property as well, and therefore its uniqueness follows from the above theorem. The rest of the section is devoted to a proof of Theorem 1.2.7, which is elementary but a bit technical. Since the technique is not essential for the rest of this book it is safe for the reader to skip it. We need the following lemma in the proof. Lemma 1.2.6 Let (Y, d) be a separable complete metric space and X ⊆ Y be dense. Suppose (X, d X) has the Urysohn property. Then for any finite set F ⊆ Y and admissible function f on F , and for any > 0, there is y ∈ X such that |d(p, y ) − f (p)| < , for all p ∈ F .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
11
Proof. Let F = {y0 , . . . , yn }. For definiteness we assume that f (y0 ) ≥ f (y1 ) ≥ · · · ≥ f (yn ) > 0 and let δ = min{d(yi , yj ) : i = j ≤ n}. Choose δ , 0 < min . 3n + 2 3n + 2 By the density of X we can find x0 , . . . , xn such that d(xi , yi ) < 0 for all i ≤ n. Define g(xi ) = f (yi ) + (3i + 1)0 , for all i ≤ n. We claim that g is admissible on the set {x0 , . . . , xn }. In fact, for i < j, g(xj ) − g(xi ) = f (yj ) − f (yi ) + 3(j − i)0 ≤ 3n0 = (3n + 2)0 − 20 ≤ δ − (d(xi , yi ) + d(xj , yj )) ≤ d(yi , yj ) − d(xi , yi ) − d(xj , yj ) ≤ d(xi , xj ) and on the other hand, g(xi ) − g(xj ) = f (yi ) − f (yj ) − 3(j − i)0 ≤ f (yi ) − f (yj ) − 20 ≤ d(yi , yj ) − d(xi , yi ) − d(xj , yj ) ≤ d(xi , xj ). For the other inequality we have d(xi , xj ) ≤ d(xi , yi ) + d(xj , yj ) + f (yi ) + f (yj ) ≤ 20 + f (yi ) + f (yj ) ≤ g(xi ) + g(xj ). Thus g is indeed admissible on {x0 , . . . , xn } ⊆ X. By the Urysohn property of X we get y ∈ X such that d(xi , y ) = g(xi ) for all i ≤ n. Thus |d(yi , y )−f (yi )| ≤ |d(xi , y )−f (yi )|+|d(xi , y )−d(yi , y )| ≤ (3i+1)0 +0 < .
Theorem 1.2.7 (Urysohn) Let (X, d) be a separable metric space with the Urysohn property. Then the completion of (X, d) also has the Urysohn property. Proof. Let Y denote the completion of (X, d) and for simplicity let d denote also the complete metric on Y . Let F = {y0 , . . . , yn } ⊆ Y and f be an admissible function on F . We need to find y ∈ Y such that f (yi ) = d(yi , y) for all i ≤ n. Assume again f (y0 ) ≥ f (y1 ) ≥ · · · ≥ f (yn ) > 0. We define a sequence (zk ) in X by induction on k. Let z0 ∈ X be such that |d(yi , z0 )− f (yi )| < f (yn ) for
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
12
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
all i ≤ n. Such a z0 exists by Lemma 1.2.6. In general suppose zk is already defined with |d(yi , zk ) − f (yi )| ≤ 2−k f (yn ) for all i ≤ n. We define zk+1 to satisfy |d(yi , zk+1 ) − f (yi )| ≤ 2−k−1 f (yn ) for all i ≤ n, and that |d(zk , zk+1 )| ≤ 2−k+1 f (yn ). To define such a zk+1 consider the set F = {y0 , . . . , yn , zk } and the function f : F → R defined by f (yi ), if p = yi for i ≤ n, f (p) = 2−k f (yn ), if p = zk . The inductive hypothesis implies that f is admissible. Thus by Lemma 1.2.6 again we can find zk+1 so that |d(yi , zk+1 )−f (yi )| ≤ 2−k−1 f (yn ) and |d(zk , zk+1 )−2−k f (yn )| ≤ 2−k−1 f (yn ). This gives the desired zk+1 . Finally note that (zk ) is a Cauchy sequence, and thus by letting y = limk zk , we get d(yi , y) = f (yi ) as desired. Exercise 1.2.1 Show that the map x → fx = d(x, ·) defined from (X, d) into (E(X), dE ) is an isometric embedding. Exercise 1.2.2 Let (X, d) be a metric space, S ⊆ X, and f an admissible function on S. For all x ∈ X define g(x) = inf{ f (y) + d(x, y) : y ∈ S}. Show that g is an admissible function on X, g extends f , and S is a support for g. Exercise 1.2.3 Show that if |X| = n < ∞ then E(X) is homeomorphic to a closed subspace of Rn . Exercise 1.2.4 Let X = ω with the trivial metric: d(x, y) = 1 iff x = y. Show that E(X) is not separable. Exercise 1.2.5 Show that E(D, ω) is dense in E(X, ω) if D is dense in X. Exercise 1.2.6 Show that Xω has the Urysohn property for any separable metric space X. A Polish metric space X is universal if for any Polish metric space Y there is an isometric embedding from Y into X. A metric space (X, d) is ultrahomogeneous if for any finite subsets F1 , F2 and an isometry ϕ from F1 onto F2 there is an isometry Φ of X onto itself extending ϕ.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
13
Exercise 1.2.7 Show that U is a universal Polish metric space. Exercise 1.2.8 Show that U is ultrahomogeneous. Exercise 1.2.9 Show that an ultrahomogeneous, universal Polish metric space has the Urysohn property, hence must be isometric to U.
1.3
Borel sets and Borel functions
The Borel hierarchy is the most important definability notion used to probe the complexity of sets of reals. Let X be a Polish space. Recall that a subset A ⊆ X is Borel if it is an element of the smallest σ-algebra on X containing all open sets in X. We define by transfinite induction the collections of Π0α (X), Σ0α (X), and Δ0α (X) sets for countable ordinals α ≥ 1. To begin with, we have Σ01 (X) = the collection of all open sets in X. Then for α ≥ 1 and A ⊆ X, let A ∈ Π0α (X) ⇐⇒ X − A ∈ Σ0α (X) and A ∈ Δ0α (X) ⇐⇒ A ∈ Σ0α (X) and A ∈ Π0α (X). For α > 1 and A ⊆ X, let A ∈ Σ0α (X) ⇐⇒ A =
Bn , where Bn ∈ Π0βn for βn < α.
n∈ω
Then A ⊆ X is Borel iff A ∈ Σ0α (X) for some 1 ≤ α < ω1 . A basic fact about the Borel hierarchy on an uncountable Polish space is that for any 1 ≤ α < ω1 , there are Σ0α sets which are not Π0α . This guarantees that the Borel hierarchy does not collapse. For low-level Borel sets we will continue to use the well-established terminology: Fσ for Σ02 and Gδ for Π02 . Let X and Y be Polish spaces. A function f : X → Y is continuous if for any open set U in Y , f −1 (U ) is open in X. f is Borel if for any open set U in Y , f −1 (U ) is Borel in X. There is a hierarchy for the Borel functions corresponding to the Borel hierarchy of sets. For α < ω1 a function f : X → Y is of Baire class α if for any open set U in Y , f −1 (U ) ∈ Σ0α+1 (X). Thus functions of Baire class 0 are precisely the continuous functions, and Baire class 1 functions pull back open sets to Σ02 sets, and so on. Even a continuous image of a closed set is not necessarily Borel. In contrast we have the following useful fact.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
14
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 1.3.1 (Luzin–Suslin) Let X, Y be Polish spaces and f : X → Y be one-to-one and Borel. Then for any Borel set A in X, f (A) is Borel in Y . The proof is nontrivial and can be found in a standard textbook, for example, Reference [97] Theorem 15.1. Definition 1.3.2 Let X, Y be Polish spaces. We say that X and Y are Borel isomorphic if there is a Borel bijection f between X and Y . A Borel bijection is also called a Borel isomorphism. In view of Theorem 1.3.1 if f : X → Y is a Borel bijection, then f −1 is (welldefined and) Borel; thus being Borel isomorphic is an equivalence notion for Polish spaces. Combining Theorem 1.3.1 with the standard Cantor–Bernstein theorem in set theory, we get a version of the Cantor–Bernstein theorem for Polish spaces as follows. Theorem 1.3.3 (Cantor–Bernstein) Let X, Y be Polish spaces. If there exist one-to-one Borel functions f : X → Y and g : Y → X, then X and Y are Borel isomorphic. In the rest of this section we give a proof that all uncountable Polish spaces are Borel isomorphic. Our strategy is to show that every uncountable Polish space is Borel isomorphic to the Baire space ω ω . Let us recall some standard notation related to this space. Let ω <ω denote the set of all finite sequences of natural numbers. This in particular contains the empty sequence, which we denote by ∅. For s ∈ ω <ω , let lh(s) denote the length of s. For instance, for s = (s(0), . . . , s(n − 1)), we have that lh(s) = n. If m < lh(s) we let s m = (s(0), . . . , s(m − 1)). For s, t ∈ ω <ω , we say that s is an initial segment of t, or that t extends s, and denote s ⊆ t, if s = t lh(s). When t ⊇ s and lh(t) = lh(s) + 1, we write t as s n if t(lh(s)) = n. We think of the structure of ω <ω with the partial order ⊆ as a tree with root ∅. Then each element of the Baire space ω ω corresponds to an infinite branch of this tree. Similarly we can define the notation x m and s ⊆ x for x ∈ ω ω . Now for s ∈ ω <ω we let Ns = {x ∈ ω ω : s ⊆ x}. Then the collection of all Ns for s ∈ ω <ω is a countable base for the topology of ω ω , and each Ns is a basic clopen set. We also note that the same notation and terminology apply to the Cantor space 2ω .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
15
The Borel hierarchy on ω ω or 2ω will be simply denoted as Σ0α , Π0α , and
Δ0α .
This finishes the review of notation related to ω ω . Next we review some basic properties of an uncountable Polish space. Definition 1.3.4 Let X be a Polish space. A point x in X is isolated if {x} is open in X. X is perfect if there is no isolated point in X. A subset A of X is perfect if A is closed in X and perfect as a subspace of X. Theorem 1.3.5 (Cantor–Bendixson) Any Polish space X can be uniquely written as X = P ∪ C, where P is a perfect subset of X and C is countable and open in X. A proof of this theorem, together with the notion of Cantor–Bendixson rank and derivatives, can be found in any standard reference, for example, Reference [97] Section 6. Theorem 1.3.6 For every uncountable Polish space X there is a one-to-one continuous function f from the Baire space ω ω into X. Proof. Note that there is a one-to-one continuous function from ω ω into 2ω (see Exercise 1.3.2). Thus it is enough to show the theorem with ω ω replaced by 2ω . By the Cantor–Bendixson theorem X has a nonempty perfect subset. Without loss of generality we assume that X is perfect. Let d be a compatible complete metric on X. We define a sequence (Us )s∈2<ω of nonempty open sets in X by induction on lh(s) such that, for any s ∈ 2<ω , (i) diam(Us ) ≤ 2−lh(s) ; (ii) Us 0 , Us 1 ⊆ Us , where U denotes the closure of U in 2ω ; (iii) Us 0 ∩ Us 1 = ∅. To define U∅ we let x∅ be any element of X and let 1 U∅ = x ∈ X : d(x, x∅ ) < . 2 Then obviously U∅ is open and diam(U∅ ) ≤ 1. In general suppose Us has been defined with diam(Us ) ≤ 2−lh(s) . Since X is perfect and Us is nonempty there exist two distinct elements xs 0 , xs 1 ∈ Us . Let a > 0 be sufficiently small so that a<
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
1 1 d(xs 0 , xs 1 ) ≤ lh(s)+1 2 2
16
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
and for i = 0, 1, { x ∈ X : d(x, xs i ) < a } ⊆ Us . Then for i = 0, 1, let
a . Us i = x ∈ X : d(x, xs i ) < 2 Then it is straightforward to see that (i) through (iii) are satisfied. Now let x ∈ 2ω and sn = x n for all n ∈ ω. Then by (ii) Us0 = U∅ ⊇ Us1 ⊇ Us1 ⊇ · · · ⊇ Usn ⊇ Usn+1 ⊇ Usn+1 ⊇ . . . with diam(Usn ) = 2−n → 0 as n → ∞. It follows from (i) that n∈ω Usn = n∈ω Usn is a singleton. Let f (x) = the unique element of n∈ω Usn . This defines a function from 2ω into X. f is one-to-one because of (iii). That f is continuous is easy to check directly. Theorem 1.3.7 For every uncountable Polish space X there is a continuous open surjection f : ω ω → X and a Baire class 1 injection g : X → ω ω such that for all x ∈ X, f (g(x)) = x. Proof. Let d < 1 be a compatible complete metric on X. We define a sequence (Us )s∈ω<ω of nonempty open sets in X by induction on lh(s) such that, for any s ∈ ω <ω , (i) diam(Us ) ≤ 2−lh(s) ; (ii) for any n ∈ ω, Us n ⊆ Us ;
(iii) Us = n∈ω Us n . To begin with, let U∅ = X. In general suppose Us has been defined. For each x ∈ Us let 1 Vx = z ∈ Us : d(x, z) < diam(Us ) and d(z, x) < d(z, X − Us ) . 4 Then for every x ∈ Us , Vx is an open subset of Us with diam(Vx ) ≤ 2−lh(s)−1 and Vx ⊆ Us . The collection {Vx : x ∈ Us } is an open cover for Us . In the subspace topology Us is Polish, and therefore second countable. This implies that {Vx : x ∈ Us } has a countable subcover. We let the sequence (Us n )n∈ω enumerate this countable subcover (possibly with repetitions). Then (i) through (iii) are satisfied.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
17
Similar to the preceding proof, we define a function f : ω ω → X by letting, for each x ∈ ω ω , f (x) = the unique element of k∈ω Uxk . It is then straightforward to check that f is continuous. To see that f is open, note that for any s ∈ ω <ω , f (Ns ) = Us . Now for any z ∈ X we obtain g(z) ∈ ω ω by defining g(z)(k) by induction on k ∈ ω. Let g(z)(0) be the least n ∈ ω such that z ∈ Un . In general suppose g(z)(j) have been defined for j ≤ k. Let s = (g(z)(0), . . . , g(z)(k)). Then define g(z)(k + 1) to be the least n ∈ ω such that z ∈ Us n . This defines a function g as well as confirms that f is onto. The only nontrivial claim left to check is that g is Baire class 1. For this let s ∈ ω <ω . It is enough to see that g −1 (Ns ) = {x ∈ X : g(x) ∈ Ns } ∈ Σ02 (X). Note x ∈ g −1 (Ns ) ⇐⇒ ∀j < k ( x ∈ Usj and ∀i < s(j − 1) x ∈ Us(j−1) i ). This shows that g −1 (Ns ) is a finite Boolean combination of open sets and therefore g −1 (Ns ) ∈ Σ02 (X). We refer to the following corollary as the Borel isomorphism theorem. Corollary 1.3.8 If X and Y are both uncountable Polish spaces, then there is a Borel isomorphism from X onto Y . Proof. Let X be uncountable Polish. Theorem 1.3.6 gives a one-to-one continuous function from ω ω into X. The Baire class 1 function from X into ω ω given by Theorem 1.3.7 is also one-to-one. Thus by the Cantor–Bernstein theorem X is Borel isomorphic to ω ω . Exercise 1.3.1 Show that for every Polish space X and 1 ≤ α < ω1 , Σ0α (X) is closed under countable unions, Π0α (X) is closed under countable intersections, and Δ0α (X) is closed under complementations. Fix a bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω and for each n ∈ ω, let (n)0 , (n)1 be the unique numbers such that (n)0 , (n)1 = n. Exercise 1.3.2 Define a function from ω ω into 2ω as follows: for each x ∈ ω ω , let f (x) ∈ 2ω be given by f (x)(n) = the (n)1 -th least significant digit in the binary expansion of x((n)0 ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
18
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Show that f is one-to-one and continuous. Exercise 1.3.3 Show that the range of the above function f is Π03 . Exercise 1.3.4 Let X be a Polish space and A ⊆ X. Show that A contains a perfect subset iff there is a continuous injection from 2ω into A. Exercise 1.3.5 Prove Theorem 1.3.3. Exercise 1.3.6 Show that the Baire space ω ω is homeomorphic to the subspace R − Q of irrationals in R. Exercise 1.3.7 Show that for any Polish space X there is a continuous surjection ϕ from the Baire space ω ω onto X. Moreover, if d < 1 is a compatible complete metric on X, then there is a Lipschitz map ϕ from ω ω onto X. Exercise 1.3.8 Show that (a) there is a Borel isomorphism h : [0, 1] → (0, 1) such that both h and h−1 are of Baire class 1; (b) there is a Borel isomorphism h : ω ω → R such that both h and h−1 are of Baire class 2. Exercise 1.3.9 Show that p (1 ≤ p ≤ ∞) is a Σ02 subset of Rω and c0 is a Π03 subset of Rω .
1.4
Standard Borel spaces
The Borel isomorphism theorem (Corollary 1.3.8) shows that the Borel structures on all uncountable Polish spaces are essentially the same. In this section we study this Borel structure. First we note that the Borel sets can be coded by single elements of some Polish spaces. Since we do not lose any generality by focusing on one Polish space, we will choose to focus on the Baire space ω ω , where this coding is easy to describe. First recall that elements of ω ω can be viewed as the branches of the tree ω <ω . In general a tree T on ω is a subset of ω <ω which is closed under taking initial segments, that is, if s ⊆ t and t ∈ T , then s ∈ T . A node s in T is terminal if s has no proper extension in T ; otherwise it is nonterminal or intermediate. If T is a tree on ω, the set of branches of T is defined as [T ] = { x ∈ ω ω : ∀n ∈ ω x n ∈ T }
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
19
and is a closed subset of ω ω (see Exercise 1.4.1). T is well-founded if [T ] = ∅, and ill-founded otherwise. Recall also that (Ns )s∈ω<ω is a countable base for the topology of ω ω consisting of basic clopen sets. We fix once and for all a bijection between the countable set ω <ω and ω and denote it by · : ω <ω → ω. We can now give the formal definition of a Borel code. Definition 1.4.1 A Borel code c is a labeled well-founded tree on ω, formally a pair (T, λ), where T is a nonempty well-founded tree on ω and λ : T → ω, such that (1) if s ∈ T is nonterminal, then λ(s) ∈ {0, 1}; (2) if s ∈ T is nonterminal and λ(s) = 0, then there is a unique t ∈ T with s ⊆ t and lh(t) = lh(s) + 1. It is easy to see that a Borel code is essentially an element of the Baire space. In fact, to each Borel code c = (T, λ) we may associate an element xc ∈ ω ω by letting, for each s ∈ ω <ω , 0, if s ∈ T , xc (s) = λ(s) + 1, if s ∈ T . Next we interpret each Borel code by a Borel subset of ω ω . To do this we need some more notation. For s, t ∈ ω <ω we define s t ∈ ω <ω by induction on lh(t): s ∅ = s; s (t n) = (s t) n. Recall that for a well-founded tree T on ω we can define the rank of T as follows. For s ∈ T , define by induction 0, if s is terminal, rk(s) = sup{ rk(s n) + 1 : s n ∈ T }, otherwise; and let rk(T ) = rk(∅). If T is a tree on ω and s ∈ T , we define the subtree Ts by t ∈ Ts ⇐⇒ s t ∈ T. Similarly, for a labeled tree (T, λ) and s ∈ T , the labeled subtree (Ts , λs ) can be defined, where λs (t) = λ(s t). Given a Borel code c = (T, λ) we now define the Borel set Bc coded by c. The definition is by induction on the rank of the well-founded tree T . (a) If ∅ is the only node of T then Bc = Ns , where s is the unique element of ω <ω such that s = λ(∅). (b) If ∅ is a nonterminal node of T and λ(∅) = 0, then by Definition 1.4.1 (ii) T contains a unique element s of length 1, and we let Bc = ω ω − Bd , where d = (Ts , λs ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
20
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(c) If ∅ is a nonterminal node of T and λ(∅) = 1, then enumerating all
nodes of T with length 1 as s0 , s1 , . . . , we let Bc = n Bdn , where dn = (Tsn , λsn ). Note that we do not have intersection in the codes. Intersections are treated as combinations of complements and unions following de Morgan’s laws. It is obvious that every Borel subset of ω ω is coded by some Borel code c. Now back to the Borel structure of general Polish spaces. A Borel space is a pair (X, B) where X is a set and B is a σ-algebra over X. In a Borel space (X, B) a set B ⊆ X is Borel if B ∈ B. We will often omit the σ-algebra when we denote the Borel space, if there is no danger of confusion. If X and Y are Borel spaces, a function f : X → Y is Borel if for any Borel set B in Y , f −1 (B) is Borel in X. f is a Borel isomorphism if f is a bijection between X and Y and both f and f −1 are Borel. The standard example of a Borel space is when X is a Polish space and B the σ-algebra of Borel sets in X. Thus we have the following concept. Definition 1.4.2 A Borel space (X, B) is standard if there is a Polish topology on X so that B is the σ-algebra of Borel sets in this topology. It follows from the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1 that any Borel bijection between two standard Borel spaces is a Borel isomorphism, and from the Borel isomorphism theorem (Corollary 1.3.8) that there is only one uncountable standard Borel space up to Borel isomorphism. This immediate corollary is also referred to as the Borel isomorphism theorem for standard Borel spaces. Corollary 1.4.3 Any two uncountable standard Borel spaces are Borel isomorphic. It also follows quickly from the properties of Polish spaces that a countable product of standard Borel spaces (with the product Borel structure) is still standard Borel. The following nontrivial fact is another nice closure property for the class of standard Borel spaces. Theorem 1.4.4 If X be a standard Borel space and B ⊆ X is Borel, then the subspace B with the inherited Borel structure is standard Borel. The proof is nontrivial and can be found in a standard reference. In fact we will give the proof later in the book (see Theorem 4.2.3 and Corollary 4.2.4) because it is related to an important technique known as change of topology. One of the most important examples of standard Borel spaces comes from Effros Borel spaces.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
21
Definition 1.4.5 Let X be a Polish space and F (X) denote the space of all closed subsets of X. The Effros Borel structure on F (X) is the σ-algebra generated by sets of the form {F ∈ F (X) : F ∩ U = ∅} for U open in X. The space F (X) with the Effros Borel structure is a standard Borel space (see Exercise 1.4.5 or Reference [97] Theorem 12.6). Note that if X is compact Polish, then F (X) coincides with the space K(X), and in fact the Effros Borel structure coincides with the Borel structure given by the Vietoris topology (see Exercise 1.4.4). Let F ∗ (X) be the space F (X)− {∅} with the Borel structure inherited from F (X). Then F ∗ (X) is also a standard Borel space. By the Borel isomorphism theorem F ∗ (X) is Borel isomorphic to F (X). The following theorem is known as the Borel selection theorem. The function in the theorem is called a Borel selector for F ∗ (X). Theorem 1.4.6 (Kuratowski–Ryll-Nardzewski) There is a Borel function s : F ∗ (X) → X such that for any F ∈ F ∗ (X), s(F ) ∈ F .
Proof. A proof of the theorem when X = ω ω is outlined in Exercise 1.4.6. We deduce the general case here. Let f : ω ω → X be a continuous open surjection given by Theorem 1.3.7. For each F ∈ F (X), f −1 (F ) is a closed subset of ω ω . Let s0 be the Borel selector for F ∗ (ω ω ) given by Exercise 1.4.6. Then define s(F ) = f (s0 (f −1 (F ))) for any F ∈ F ∗ (X). It is clear that s(F ) ∈ F . To see that s is Borel, it suffices to verify that F → f −1 (F ) is a Borel map from F ∗ (X) to F ∗ (ω ω ). For this let U ⊆ ω ω be open. Then f −1 (F ) ∩ U = ∅ iff F ∩ f (U ) = ∅. Since f is an open map f (U ) is open in X, and the condition is Borel by the definition of the Effros Borel structure. A useful application of the Effros Borel space is that it allows us to talk about the space of all Polish metric spaces. Recall that the universal Urysohn space contains an isometric copy of every Polish metric space. Thus F (U) naturally represents the space of all Polish metric spaces. We will return to this topic in Chapter 14. The Borelness of the operations in F (X) is not always intuitive. For instance, the intersection operator (F1 , F2 ) → F1 ∩ F2 is not necessarily Borel (see Reference [97] Exercise 27.7). Exercise 1.4.1 Show that C ⊆ ω ω is closed iff there is a tree T on ω such that C = [T ].
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
22
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
A Borel code c = (T, λ) is a Σ01 -code if λ(∅) = 1 and all nodes of length 1 in T are terminal. For 1 ≤ α < ω1 a Borel code c = (T, λ) is a Π0α -code if λ(∅) = 0 and, letting s be the unique node of length 1 in T , (Ts , λs ) is a Σ0α -code. For 1 < α < ω1 a Borel code c = (T, λ) is a Σ0α -code if λ(∅) = 1 and for each node s of length 1 in T , (Ts , λs ) is a Π0β -code for some β < α. Exercise 1.4.2 Show that for any α < ω1 and A ⊆ ω ω , A ∈ Σ0α iff A = Bc for a Σ0α -code c, and A ∈ Π0α iff A = Bc for a Π0α -code c. Exercise 1.4.3 Show that if Y is a Polish space and X a Polish subspace of Y then there is a one-to-one Borel map from F (X) into F (Y ). Exercise 1.4.4 Let X be compact Polish, S a countable base for the topology of X, and U open in X. Let D be the collection of finite covers of X − U by elements of S, that is, finite sets {O1 , . . . , On } ⊆ S such that X − U ⊆ O1 ∪ · · · ∪ On . Show that for any compact set K in X, K ⊆ U ⇐⇒ ∃{O1 , . . . , On } ∈ D ∀1 ≤ i ≤ n K ∩ Oi = ∅. Exercise 1.4.5 Let X be a Polish space and X a compactification of X. For each F ∈ F (X) let F denote its closure in X. Note that F ∈ K(X) = F (X). (a) Show that the set Y = {F : F ∈ F (X)} is Gδ in K(X), and hence is Polish. (b) Show that the Polish topology on F (X) obtained by pulling back the Polish topology on Y via the map F → F generates the Effros Borel structure on F (X). Recall that the lexicographic order ≤lex on ω ≤ω = ω ω ∪ ω <ω is defined by s ≤lex t ⇐⇒ s ⊆ t or ∃i < lh(s) ( s(i) < t(i) and ∀j < i s(j) = t(j) ). Exercise 1.4.6 For any tree T on ω with [T ] = ∅ we can define the leftmost branch bT of T to be the ≤lex -least element of [T ], that is, for any b ∈ [T ], bT ≤lex b. (a) Show that if [T ] = ∅ then there exists a leftmost branch of T . (b) Show that the map [T ] → bT is a Borel selector for F ∗ (ω ω ). Exercise 1.4.7 Let X be a Polish space. Show that the union operator ∪ : F (X) × F (X) → F (X)
→ F1 ∪ F2 (F1 , F2 ) is Borel.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
1.5
23
The effective hierarchy
The introduction of the notion of computability into descriptive set theory profoundly changed the subject. The resulting theory is often referred to as effective descriptive set theory, and concepts and results obtained in the precomputability theory era is now called classical descriptive set theory. The effective theory is more fundamental since it can be developed independently and it covers the classical theory completely. All of the classical results have effective proofs; and for some the effective proofs are the only ones known. Classical proofs are still desirable and sometimes preferred since they are easier to communicate to nonlogicians, but more and more new results are proved using effective methods and it becomes harder to find classical proofs. In the remaining sections of this chapter we give a review of the basic results of the effective theory. A complete account of the theory can be found in [126]. We need to assume that the reader is familiar with the notion of a computable function from ω n to ω. A discussion of the equivalent definitions of computability and the Church–Turing Thesis can be found in most textbooks on computability theory (or recursion theory, as it was called before the 1990s) or mathematical logic, for example, see References [24], [12], [137], [11]. Here, for the sake of completeness we recall one of several equivalent formal definitions below. By convention, we use f : ω n ω to indicate that dom(f ) ⊆ ω n . Definition 1.5.1 The class of all partial computable functions is the smallest class of functions containing the zero function Z : ω → ω, the successor function S : ω → ω, and the projection functions Pin : ω n → ω (1 ≤ i ≤ n), where Z(x) = 0, S(x) = x + 1, Pin (x1 , . . . , xn ) = xi , and is closed under the following operations on partial functions: (1) Substitution: if f : ω n ω and g1 , . . . , gn : ω m ω are partial computable, then so is h : ω m ω, where h(x1 , . . . , xm ) = f (g1 (x1 , . . . , xm ), . . . , gn (x1 , . . . , xm )); (2) Recursion: if f : ω n ω and g : ω n+2 ω are partial computable, then so is h : ω n+1 ω, where h(x1 , . . . , xn , 0) = f (x1 , . . . , xn ), h(x1 , . . . , xn , m + 1) = g(h(x1 , . . . , xn , m), x1 , . . . , xn , m);
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
24
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(3) Minimization: if f : ω n+1 ω is partial computable, then so is g : ω n ω, where g(x1 , . . . , xn ) = μm[f (x1 , . . . , xn , m) = 0] = the least m such that (i) f (x1 , . . . , xn , k) is defined for all k ≤ m, (ii) f (x1 , . . . , xn , k) = 0 for all k < m, and (iii) f (x1 , . . . , xn , m) = 0.
All formal definitions of computability have been shown to be equivalent to the above one. In fact, when working with computable functions we will not deal with the details of the above definition, but will rather adopt the Church–Turing Thesis, which states that any of the formal definitions of computable functions captures the intuitive notion of computability. Thus if a function is intuitively computable by an informal algorithm then by the Church–Turing Thesis we may conclude that it is formally computable without checking the details of the formal definitions. A function f : ω n → ω is computable if it is partial computable and total. Recall that a subset of ω n is computable if its characteristic function is computable. We also fix various coding functions, namely computable bijections between various sets and ω, and denote all of them by · (see Exercise 1.5.1). With these codings every partial computable function has an index. We will use the standard notation {e} to denote the partial computable function with index e (if there is no confusion about the arity of the function), and call it the e-th partial computable function. Another standard notation is We , which denotes the domain of the e-th partial computable unary function. Moreover, we will often use relative computations in some given oracle, usually an element of the Baire space. The oracle is used to provide extra information not otherwise available from an algorithm. Given x ∈ ω ω , the class of all partial functions computable in the oracle x is the smallest class of functions containing x and all partial computable functions and is closed under substitutions, recursions, and minimizations. Most results in computability theory can be relativized in any oracle, and the proofs of relativized results are always repetitions of those of unrelativized results. Throughout this book relativization of notions will be used freely without elaboration. For x ∈ ω ω the e-th partial computable function with oracle x will be denoted by {e}x and its domain by Wex . For the rest of this section we define the effective Borel hierarchy, also known as the hyperarithmetical hierarchy. First we need to recall the notion of computable ordinals. Let LO = { < ⊆ ω × ω : < is a linear ordering of ω},
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
25
that is, < ∈ LO ⇐⇒ ∀n, m ∈ ω (n < m or m < n or m = n) and ∀n, m, k ∈ ω (n < m and m < k → n < k) and ∀n, m ∈ ω (n < m → m < n). Then let WO = {< ∈ LO : < is a well-ordering of ω}, that is, < ∈ WO ⇐⇒ <∈ LO and any subset of ω has a <-least element. For < ∈ WO let ot(<) be the order type of <. Note that ot(<) is a countable ordinal, and sup{ ot(<) : < ∈ WO } = ω1 . Let ω1CK = sup{ot(<) : < ∈ WO and < is computable}. Since there are only countably many computable well-orderings of ω, ω1CK is a countable ordinal. The CK in the superscript stands for Church–Kleene. Ordinals α < ω1CK are called computable ordinals since each of them is the order type of a computable well-ordering of ω (Exercise 1.5.3). It is useful to note that ω1CK is also the supremum of the ranks of all wellfounded trees which are computable subsets of ω <ω (see Exercise 1.5.9). Just as the Borel hierarchy is indexed by all countable ordinals α < ω1 , the effective Borel hierarchy is indexed by ordinals α < ω1CK . Furthermore, all notions can be relativized in a straightforward way. Thus given any element CK(x) x ∈ ω ω , we also speak of the relativized notions ω1 and the effective Borel CK(x) . Note that hierarchy relativized to x, which is indexed by ordinals α < ω1 CK(x)
ω1 = sup{ ω1
: x ∈ ω ω }.
Our objective is to define the effective Borel hierarchy for subsets of ω ω . Nevertheless we will need to consider more general product spaces of the form X = ω k × (ω ω )l , where k, l ∈ ω. We fix some notation related to this space. Given a tuple t = (n1 , . . . , nk , s1 , . . . , sl ) where n1 , . . . , nk ∈ ω and s1 , . . . , sl ∈ ω <ω , define Nt = {n1 } × · · · × {nk } × Ns1 × · · · × Nsl . The set of Nt for t ∈ ω k × (ω <ω )l is a base for the topology on the product space X. We can fix a computable bijection between ω and the index set T = ω k × (ω <ω )l ,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
26
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
and this makes the notion of computable functions and sets pertaining to T clearly fixed. Now we are ready to define the first level of the effective Borel hierarchy, the effectively open sets: for A ⊆ X, let A ∈ Σ01 ⇐⇒ A = Nf (n) , for some computable f : ω → T . n∈ω
Note that an index e for the function f codes all the information needed to recover the set A. For this reason we regard e as an effective Borel index for the set A. To define the other levels of the effective hierarchy we first fix this notion of effective Borel index for sets in the effective Borel hierarchy. Since the sets in this hierarchy are usually called hyperarithmetical sets, we will call the indices hyperarithmetical indices. Hyperarithmetical indices are similar to Borel codes as they contain information about labeled well-founded trees, with rank < ω1CK ; however, literally they will be natural numbers. Definition 1.5.2 The set of all hyperarithmetical indices is defined by induction: (1) If e ∈ ω, then 0, e is a hyperarithmetical index; (2) If e is a hyperarithmetical index, then 1, e is a hyperarithmetical index; (3) If every element of We is a hyperarithmetical index, then 2, e is a hyperarithmetical index. The sets coded by the hyperarithmetical indices are given by the following definition. Definition 1.5.3 For each hyperarithmetical index c ∈ ω we define the hyperarithmetical set coded by c, denoted Hc , by induction: Nn where · : ω → T is a fixed coding (1) If c = 0, e, then Hc = n∈We
function; (2) If c = 1, e, where e is a hyperarithmetical index, then Hc = X − He ; (3) If c = 2, e, where We is a set of hyperarithmetical indices, then Hc = Hd . d∈We
By clause (1) of this definition, an official hyperarithmetical index for an effectively open set is of the form 0, e. Clause (2) describes the coding
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
27
of complementation and clause (3) describes the coding of the operation of effective countable union. In general for α < ω1CK we let A ∈ Π0α ⇐⇒ X − A ∈ Σ0α and A ∈ Δ0α ⇐⇒ A ∈ Σ0α and A ∈ Π0α . For 1 < α < ω1CK , define A ∈ Σ0α iff A = Hc , where c = 2, e is a hyperarithmetical index and for all d ∈ We , Hd ∈ Π0β for some β < α. An equivalent but less formal definition is as follows. For any α < ω1CK , A ∈ Σ0α+1 ⇔ A = {x ∈ X : ∃n ∈ ω(n, x) ∈ B} for some B ∈ Π0α in ω × X. If 1 < α < ω1CK is a limit ordinal, then A ∈ Σ0α ⇐⇒ A is an effective union of sets in the collection
β<α
Π0β .
Note that there is still ambiguity
in this last characterization, since we need to fix an effective enumeration of β<α Π0β in order to deal with effective unions of sets in the collection. We leave it to the reader to fill up the details. Given any oracle x ∈ ω ω we can define in the same fashion the relativized CK(x) effective hierarchy Σ0α (x), Π0α (x), Δ0α (x) for α < ω1 . Sets in this hierarchy are called hyperarithmetical in x. The following fact is simple yet unravels a beautiful connection between the classical and effective notions. Theorem 1.5.4 Let α < ω1 and A ⊆ ω ω . Then the following are equivalent: (i) A ∈ Σ0α . CK(x)
(ii) There is x ∈ ω ω with α < ω1
such that A ∈ Σ0α (x).
The key idea for the nontrivial direction of the theorem is the observation that a Borel set can be effectively recovered from a Borel code. The theorem is also true for the Π-side and Δ-side of the hierarchies. The proof is left to the reader (Exercise 1.5.5). A basic fact for the effective Borel hierarchy is that for each 1 ≤ α < ω1CK there are Σ0α sets which are not Π0α . This also relativizes. Exercise 1.5.1 (a) Show that m1 , m2 2 =
(m1 + m2 )(m1 + m2 + 1) + m2 2
is a computable bijection from ω 2 onto ω.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
28
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(b) Define · · · n for n > 2 by induction: m1 , . . . , mn n = m1 , . . . , mn−1 n−1 , mn 2 . Show that · · · n is a computable bijection from ω n onto ω. (c) Define ·<ω from ω <ω by s =
0, if s = ∅, n, m1 , . . . , mn n 2 , if s = (m1 , . . . , mn ) for n ≥ 1.
Show that ·<ω is a bijection from ω <ω onto ω. Exercise 1.5.2 Show that C ⊆ ω ω is Π01 iff there is a computable tree T ⊆ ω <ω such that C = [T ]. Exercise 1.5.3 Show that any ordinal < ω1CK is the order type of a computable well-ordering of ω. CK(x)
Exercise 1.5.4 Show that ω1
is a countable limit ordinal for any x ∈ ω ω .
Exercise 1.5.5 Give the definition of the relativized effective hierarchy and prove Theorem 1.5.4. Exercise 1.5.6 Let 1 ≤ α < ω1 . Show that there is a Σ0α subset U of ω ω ×ω ω such that for every x ∈ ω ω , Ux = {y : (x, y) ∈ U } is Σ0α , and for every Σ0α subset A of ω ω there is x ∈ ω ω such that Ux = A. (Such a set is said to be universal for Σ0α subsets of ω ω .) For any tree T on ω define the Kleene–Brouwer ordering of T by s
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
1.6
29
Analytic sets and Σ11 sets
In this section we continue to consider subsets of product spaces X = ω k × (ω ω )l . Recall that a subset A ⊆ X is analytic (or Σ11 ) if there is a closed subset C of X × ω ω such that, for all x ∈ X, x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ C. Similarly, we define that A ⊆ X is Σ11 if there is a Π01 set C of X × ω ω such that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ C. In addition, A ⊆ X is coanalytic (or Π11 ) if X − A is analytic. A is Δ11 if it is both analytic and coanalytic. Similarly, A is Π11 if X − A is Σ11 , and is Δ11 if it is both Σ11 and Π11 . In addition, the lightface classes can all be relativized, thus it makes sense to talk about pointclasses Σ11 (x), Π11 (x), and Δ11 (x). The following fundamental theorems connect together the classes of sets we will focus on in the rest of this book. Theorem 1.6.1 (Luzin) Let A and B be disjoint analytic sets in X. Then there is a Borel set C separating A from B, that is, A ⊆ C and B ∩ C = ∅. Theorem 1.6.2 (Luzin–Addison) Let A and B be disjoint Σ11 sets in X. Then there is a hyperarithmetical set C separating A from B. Theorem 1.6.3 (Suslin) Let A ⊆ X. Then A is Δ11 iff it is Borel. Theorem 1.6.4 (Suslin–Kleene) Let A ⊆ X. Then A is Δ11 iff it is hyperarithmetical. The first of these theorems is called the Luzin separation theorem. The third, Suslin’s theorem, is a direct corollary of it. The Suslin–Kleene theorem was proved by Kleene and can be similarly derived from the Luzin– Addison separation theorem. Each of the lightface theorems can be relativized. Besides the analogy between the boldface classes and lightface classes, the two types of classes are also directly connected (see Exercise 1.6.4). Using these connections one can easily derive the boldface theorems from their lightface counterparts. In the classical study of analytic sets the Suslin operation A plays an important role. We briefly recall its definition and basic properties.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
30
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 1.6.5 Let Y be a set and {As }s∈ω<ω be a family of subsets of Y . Then the set A=
Axn
x∈ω ω n∈ω
is said to be obtained from {As } by the Suslin operation or operation A. If in addition Y is a topological space and every As is closed, then A is called a Suslin set. Note that the concept of Suslin sets is defined for general Polish spaces other than the product spaces. In the product space X the Suslin sets coincide with the analytic sets (Exercise 1.6.6). In general, every Borel set is Suslin (see Exercise 1.6.7) and the result of a Suslin operation on a sequence of Borel sets is Suslin (see Exercise 1.6.8). Thus the concept of Suslin sets can also be used as the definition of analytic sets on a standard Borel space. We will use the following basic theorem known as the perfect set theorem for analytic sets. Theorem 1.6.6 (Suslin) Any uncountable analytic set in a Polish space contains a perfect subset. In the rest of this section we review the boundedness principles for various sets of well-orders. These fundamental results will be very useful in later chapters. Recall that LO is the set of all linear orderings of ω. When x ∈ LO we denote it as <x to emphasize that it is a linear order and speak of its order type ot(<x ). It is straightforward to check that LO is a Borel subset of 2ω×ω . In contrast, the set WO of all well-orderings of ω is Π11 , and in particular Π11 . We note below that it is not Σ11 . Lemma 1.6.7 For any Π11 set A ⊆ ω ω there is a continuous function f : ω ω → LO such that A = f −1 (WO). Proof.
Let C ⊆ ω ω × ω ω be a closed subset such that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ C.
By Exercise 1.4.1 there is a tree T on ω × ω such that C = [T ]. For each x ∈ ω ω , define a tree Tx on ω by s ∈ Tx ⇐⇒ (x lh(s), s) ∈ T. It follows that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∀y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ [T ] ⇐⇒ [Tx ] = ∅ ⇐⇒ Tx is well-founded.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
31
x be the Kleene–Brouwer ordering of Tx (defined for Exercise 1.5.7). Let
It follows immediately from Lemma 1.6.7 and Suslin’s theorem that WO is not Σ11 , since otherwise it would be Borel and in fact Σ0α for some α < ω1 , which implies by Lemma 1.6.7 that any Borel set would be Σ0α , and the Borel hierarchy collapses, a contradiction. For each α < ω1 , let WOα = {x ∈ WO : ot(<x ) ≤ α}. It is easy to show by transfinite induction that each WOα is a Borel set. We also consider the effective classes of well-orders. For each x ∈ ω ω , we let WOx = {y ∈ WO : y is computable in x }, and WO0 = {y ∈ WO : y is computable}. Then similar to Lemma 1.6.7 we have that WO0 is Π11 but not Σ11 . Likewise each WOx is Π11 (x) but not Σ11 (x). However, each of these sets is countable, thus trivially Borel.
We have that WO = x∈ωω WOx , and for any computable x ∈ ω ω , WOx = WO0 . Recall that ω1CK = sup{ot(
ω1 CK(x)
Every ω1
= sup{ot(
is a limit ordinal (Exercise 1.5.4). For α < ω1 we also let WO0α = WO0 ∩ WOα
and WOxα = WOx ∩ WOα . When α < ω1CK , WO0α is Δ11 . This also relativizes. The following theorem is known as the boundedness principle for Σ11 sets of computable well-orders. Theorem 1.6.8 If A ⊆ WO0 is Σ11 then there is α < ω1CK such that A ⊆ WO0α .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
32
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof.
Otherwise we have that for all y ∈ LO, y ∈ WO0 iff
y is computable ∧ ∃z ∈ A ∃f ( f : ω → ω is an order-preserving injection from (ω,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
33
Exercise 1.6.3 Suppose B ⊆ X × ω ω is Borel and A ⊆ X is defined by x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ B. Show that A is analytic. Exercise 1.6.4 Show that
(i) Σ11 = x∈ωω Σ11 (x),
(ii) Π11 = x∈ωω Π11 (x), and
(iii) Δ11 = x∈ωω Δ11 (x). Exercise 1.6.5 Prove Theorem 1.6.11. Exercise 1.6.6 Show that in the product space X the class of all Suslin sets is exactly the class of all analytic sets. Exercise 1.6.7 Show that every Borel set in a Polish space is Suslin. Exercise 1.6.8 Let Y be a Polish space and {As }s∈ω<ω be a sequence of Borel subsets of Y . Let A be obtained from {As } by the Suslin operation. Show that A is Suslin. Exercise 1.6.9 Let Y be a set, {As }s∈ω<ω subsets of Y, and A obtained from {As } by the Suslin operation. Define by transfinite induction on α < ω1 the following sequences: λ = Aα Aα Aα A0s = As , Aα+1 s s ∩ s ( λ limit ); s n , and As = n∈ω
α<λ
Bα = Aα ∅ and Dα =
α+1 (Aα ). s − As
s
Show that A=
α<ω1
1.7
Bα =
(Bα − Dα ).
α<ω1
Coanalytic sets and Π11 sets
We have seen that the Borel hierarchy is connected to the effective Borel hierarchy by relativization, and that the Suslin–Kleene theorem connects the structure of Σ11 or Π11 sets with Δ11 or hyperarithmetical sets. This connection makes Σ11 and Π11 sets a vital tool in the study of Borel sets. Many results
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
34
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
about Borel sets proved by exploring this connection have not been proved by classical methods. In this section we continue our review of the effective theory for Π11 sets; we will encounter some theorems without straightforward classical analogs. Theorem 1.7.1 The class of all Π11 sets on X has the reduction property, that is, for any A, B ∈ Π11 , there are A , B ∈ Π11 with A ⊆ A, B ⊆ B, A ∪ B = A ∪ B, and A ∩ B = ∅. The reduction property for Π11 is a very basic property since it implies immediately that the class of Σ11 sets has the separation property, that is, for any disjoint A, B ∈ Σ11 there is a Δ11 set C separating A from B. Furthermore, from this separation property for Σ11 sets and the Luzin–Addison separation theorem one can derive the Suslin–Kleene theorem as a corollary. The reduction property relativizes and implies the same property for Π11 sets. We have seen that WO is Π11 but not Σ11 . Recall the following definition of completeness in a boldface pointclass. Definition 1.7.2 A set S ⊆ ω ω is Π11 -complete or complete coanalytic if S is Π11 and for all Π11 subset A of X there is a continuous function f : X → X such that A = f −1 (S). The function f in the definition is called a reduction function. Note that WO is a subset of 2ω×ω , and by a standard coding can be viewed as a subset of ω ω . By Lemma 1.6.7 we have that WO is Π11 -complete. Similarly one can define Σ11 -completeness (or complete analyticity), and it is easy to derive that LO − WO is Σ11 -complete. In fact for all 1 ≤ α < ω1 similar definitions can be employed to define Σ0α - or Π0α -completeness. It is a basic result of descriptive set theory that for each 1 ≤ α < ω1 , Σ0α -complete sets exist (and the existence of Π0α -complete sets follows by taking complements) (see, for example, Reference [97] Exercise 22.12). A closely related basic result is the existence of universal Π11 sets. Theorem 1.7.3 There is a Π11 set P ⊆ ω × X such that for any Π11 set A ⊆ X there is n ∈ ω such that A = Pn = {x ∈ X : (n, x) ∈ P }. The proof of this theorem is simple and is left as an exercise (Exercise 1.7.2). The set in the theorem is said to be universal for all Π11 subsets of X. It is immediate that the complement of P is universal for all Σ11 subsets of X. Note that the theorem gives an enumeration of all Π11 subsets of X (and therefore their complements as well), which leads to the following theorem on a Π11 coding of all Δ11 sets. This is in contrast with the hyperarithmetic indices we discussed in Section 1.5.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
35
Theorem 1.7.4 There are Π11 subsets P + , P − ⊆ ω × X and D ⊆ ω such that (i) for any n ∈ D, Pn+ and Pn− are complements of each other, and (ii) for any Δ11 set A there is n ∈ D such that A = Pn+ . Proof. Fix a computable bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω. Let P ⊆ ω × X be universal for all Π11 subsets of X. Define Q+ (m, k, x) ⇐⇒ P (m, x), Q− (m, k, x) ⇐⇒ P (k, x). Then Q+ , Q− are both Π11 subsets of ω × X. By the reduction property for Π11 sets let P + , P − be Π11 subsets of ω × X such that P + ∪ P − = Q+ ∪ Q− and P + ∩ P − = ∅. Define − + − n ∈ D ⇐⇒ Q+ n ∪ Qn = X ⇐⇒ Pn ∪ Pn = X + − ⇐⇒ ∀x ∈ X (Q (n, x) ∨ Q (n, x)).
Then D ∈ Π11 . It is easy to see that properties (i) and (ii) are satisfied. In the computation of descriptive complexity involving Σ11 and Π11 sets the following theorems are very useful. They give another canonical representation of Π11 sets and show that the pointclass Π11 is closed under the existential Δ11 quantification. Theorem 1.7.5 (Kleene) If A ⊆ X × ω ω is Π11 and x ∈ B ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ Δ11 (x) (x, y) ∈ A, then B is also Π11 . Theorem 1.7.6 (Spector–Gandy) Let A ⊆ X. Then A is Π11 iff there is Π01 set C ⊆ X × ω ω such that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ Δ11 (x) (x, y) ∈ C. In Section 8.3 we will also use some facts about Π11 singletons. A real x ∈ ω ω is called a Π11 singleton if {x} is Π11 . It is easy to find examples of Π11 singletons. For instance, if x ⊆ ω is hyperarithmetical, then x, as an element of 2ω , is a Π11 singleton, since y ∈ {x} ⇐⇒ ∀n (n ∈ y ↔ n ∈ x). The usefulness of this concept comes from the following basis theorem ([126] 4E.2 or [133] Corollary 9.4).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
36
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 1.7.7 (Addison–Kondo) Every nonempty Π11 subset of ω ω contains a Π11 singleton. The following fact can be derived as an easy corollary to the above basis theorem. Corollary 1.7.8 For any Π11 singleton x there exists a Π11 singleton y such that y is not computable in x. Proof. Let x be a Π11 singleton. Consider the set P of all y ∈ ω ω not computable in x, that is, y ∈ P ⇐⇒ ∀e ∈ ω∃n ∈ ω y(n) = {e}x (n). P is obviously nonempty Δ11 . Thus by Theorem 1.7.7 P contains a Π11 singleton y as required. Exercise 1.7.1 Show that a subset A of ω ω is Π11 iff there is a Borel function f : ω ω → LO such that A = f −1 (WO). Exercise 1.7.2 Prove Theorem 1.7.3. (Hint: Use the definition of Π11 sets and the hyperarithmetical indices for the effectively open sets in the definition.) Exercise 1.7.3 A real x ∈ ω ω is Δ11 if its graph {(n, m) : x(n) = m} ⊆ ω 2 is Δ11 . Show that the following are equivalent: (1) x is Δ11 ; (2) {x} is Δ11 ; (3) {x} is Σ11 . Moreover, the statement can be relativized.
1.8
The Gandy–Harrington topology
In this section we introduce the Gandy–Harrington topology and review some facts relevant to this topic. This topic is more technical than the results reviewed in the previous sections, but is necessary in the study of equivalence relations in Part II of this book. To keep the logic clear we only give a quick introduction of the concepts and main results in this section and postpone the technical proofs to Appendix
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Preliminaries
37
A. All the nontrivial claims, including theorems and some exercises, of this section are proved there. The techniques developed so far are sufficient for all the proofs in Appendix A except that for Theorem 1.8.5, which will have to wait until we investigate strong Choquet spaces in Chapter 4. By the end of Part I of this book all the results of this section will have been established and will be ready for applications. To keep the notation simple we continue to work on the product space X in this section. Also we remark that every statement about the Gandy– Harrington topology has a relativized version given an arbitrary real oracle. Definition 1.8.1 The Gandy–Harrington topology on X is the topology generated by all Σ11 sets. Since there are only countably many Σ11 sets, the Gandy–Harrington topology is second countable. The collection of all Σ11 sets is closed under finite unions and intersections. This implies that the Σ11 sets form a base for the Gandy–Harrington topology. Also, any open set in the Gandy–Harrington topology is the union of countably many Σ11 sets, thus it is Σ11 by Exercise 1.6.2. If the underlying space is countable (that is, of the form ω k ), then the Gandy–Harrington topology on it is discrete, since all singletons are Σ11 . In contrast, the collection of all Σ11 sets in ω k is nontrivial. For general X, note that for every t ∈ T = ω k × (ω <ω )l , the basic clopen set Nt in the usual topology is Σ11 , hence also open in the Gandy–Harrington topology. This implies that the Gandy–Harrington topology is finer than the usual topology on X, and that it is Hausdorff. But the Gandy–Harrington topology is not regular (see Exercise 1.8.1). A rather surprising fact is that there is a canonical subspace on which the Gandy–Harrington topology is Polish. Definition 1.8.2 CK(x) = ω1CK . We denote An element x ∈ X is low if ω1 CK(x)
Xlow = {x ∈ X : ω1
= ω1CK }.
The following is a useful characterization of low elements. Theorem 1.8.3 Let x ∈ X. Then x is low iff for any Σ11 set A either x ∈ A or else there is a Σ11 set B with x ∈ B and A ∩ B = ∅. This in particular implies that every Σ11 subset of Xlow is relatively clopen in Xlow , and that the subspace Xlow is regular. The most important properties of Xlow lie in the following theorems. The first one of these is also called the Gandy basis theorem for Σ11 sets.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
38
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 1.8.4 (Gandy) Xlow is dense open in the Gandy–Harrington topology. Theorem 1.8.5 Xlow (with the Gandy–Harrington topology) is a Polish space. Here is an important corollary. Corollary 1.8.6 The product space X with the Gandy–Harrington topology is a Baire space. That is, the intersection of countably many dense open sets is dense. This theorem allows category arguments to be used (for instance the concept of meagerness and the Kuratowski–Ulam Theorem 3.2.1). The Gandy– Harrington topology is an important tool in the study of Borel equivalence relations. We will come back to this topic several times later in the book. Exercise 1.8.1 Show that the Gandy–Harrington topology on ω ω is not regular. (Hint: Use the fact that there is a Π11 set that is not Σ11 .) Exercise 1.8.2 Show that Xlow is Σ11 . Exercise 1.8.3 (Louveau) Let τ1 be the Gandy–Harrington topology on X and τ2 be the Gandy–Harrington topology on X × X. (Note that τ2 is finer than τ1 × τ1 .) Let C, D ⊆ X be comeager sets in τ1 . Show that C × D is comeager in τ2 . Similarly, if V is τ1 -open and C, D are both τ1 -comeager in V , then C × D is τ2 -comeager in V × V .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 2 Polish Groups
Invariant descriptive set theory is a new branch of descriptive set theory that deals with complexity of equivalence relations. On any Polish space there is always the identity equivalence relation (or the equality equivalence relation, that is, every element is equivalent to nothing but itself), and any subset of a Polish space is an invariant set for this equivalence relation. Therefore on a rather fundamental level invariant descriptive set theory encompasses and strengthens the classical and effective theories. The focus on equivalence relations, as opposed to other possible objects and structures, originated from connections with other areas of mathematics. The connection with model theory was first recognized and developed by Vaught in the early 1970s. By the end of the 1980s, through the work of many, but especially Becker, Harrington, Kechris, and Louveau, it had become clear that invariant descriptive set theory provides a good framework for the classification problems in many fields of mathematics. In the process of this development it was also recognized that orbit equivalence relations are the most important class of equivalence relations to be studied. These are equivalence relations induced by actions of Polish groups. What made the subject more exciting was that there was already a vast theory about Polish group actions from dynamical systems and operator algebras, and invariant descriptive set theory is a perfect place to mingle the techniques of logic, topology, algebra, and some other fields. Starting from this chapter we will present this exciting theory and its applications. Our emphasis will be on orbit equivalence relations, but general Borel, analytic, or even coanalytic equivalence relations will also be investigated. In order to study the complexity of orbit equivalence relations we need to have a good understanding of the actions that induce them. Thus in the rest of Part I we will develop a theory of Polish group actions. In this chapter, though, we will set the modest goal to review the basic facts about Polish groups. Much of the material in this chapter is of topological nature, but the reader can already find a good dose of logic, algebra, and geometry. One thing that might be good for the reader to keep in mind is that there are still many open questions about Polish groups. Thus there is really a lot more to do in the invariant descriptive set theory, or even just the theory of Polish groups.
39 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
40
2.1
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Metrics on topological groups
A topological group is a group (G, ·, 1G ) with a topology on G such that the map (x, y) → xy −1 from G2 to G is continuous. A topological group G is metrizable if there is a metric d on G which induces the topology on G. If d induces the topology on a topological group G we say that d is a compatible metric. A metric d on G is left-invariant if d(gh, gk) = d(h, k) for all g, h, k ∈ G. Recall that a topological space X is first countable if every element of X has a countable nbhd base. A topological group G is first countable iff its identity element 1G has a countable nbhd base. It is easy to see that a metrizable topological space is Hausdorff and first countable. The following classical theorem shows that the converse is also true for topological groups. Theorem 2.1.1 (Birkhoff–Kakutani) Let G be a topological group. Then G is metrizable iff G is Hausdorff and first countable. Moreover, if G is metrizable, then G admits a compatible left-invariant metric. Proof. We only need to show the (⇐) direction. Let {Un } be a countable nbhd base for 1G . Without loss of generality assume U0 = G and that all Un are open. Since G is Hausdorff, n Un = {1G }. We define a sequence {Vn } of open nbhds of 1G with the following properties: (i) V0 = G; Vn+1 ⊆ Vn ; (ii) Vn = Vn−1 =def {g −1 | g ∈ Vn }; 3 (iii) Vn+1 ⊆ Vn ;
(iv) Vn ⊆ Un for all n ∈ N. By induction, suppose Vn ⊆ Un ∩ Vn−1 has been defined with Vn = Vn−1 . By the continuity of the multiplication operation there are open nbhds W1 , W2 , W3 of 1G such that W1 · W2 · W3 ⊆ Vn . In particular W1 , W2 , W3 ⊆ Vn . By the continuity of the inverse operation W1−1 , W2−1 , W3−1 are also open nbhds of 1G . Define −1 Vn+1 = Un+1 ∩ Un+1 ∩ W1 ∩ W1−1 ∩ W2 ∩ W2−1 ∩ W3 ∩ W3−1 .
Then Vn+1 is still an open nbhd of 1G . It is clear that the properties (i) through (iv) are maintained. By property (iv) we know that n Vn = {1G }. For h, k ∈ G let ρ(h, k) = inf 2−n | h−1 k ∈ Vn .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
41
Then ρ(h, k) ≥ 0, ρ(h, k) = 0 iff h = k, and ρ(h, k) = ρ(k, h) by (ii). By (iii) ρ also has the following property (*): for any > 0, if ρ(g0 , g1 ), ρ(g1 , g2 ), ρ(g2 , g3 ) ≤ , then ρ(g0 , g3 ) ≤ 2. Finally define d(h, k) = inf
l
ρ(gi , gi+1 ) | g0 = h, gl+1 = k, g1 , . . . , gl ∈ G, l ∈ N .
i=0
We check that d is a compatible left-invariant metric on G. It is obvious that d(h, k) ≥ 0 and that d(h, h) = 0. Also d is symmetric since ρ is symmetric. The triangle inequality d(h, k) ≤ d(h, g) + d(g, k) is also easy to check. Thus to show that d is a metric, it suffices to prove that d(h, k) = 0 for h = k. For this we claim that d(h, k) ≥ 12 ρ(h, k) for h = k. In fact, by induction on l ∈ N we argue that l
ρ(gi , gi+1 ) ≥
i=0
1 ρ(g0 , gl+1 ) 2
(2.1)
for any g0 , . . . , gl+1 ∈ G. When l ≤ 2 inequality (2.1) follows from property (*) above. For a general inductive step l ≥ 3 we assume that inequality (2.1) holds for all l < l. Let S be the sum on the left-hand side. If ρ(g0 , g1 ) ≥ 12 S, then by the inductive hypothesis ρ(g1 , gl+1 ) ≤ 2(S − ρ(g0 , g1 )) ≤ 2S − 2ρ(g0 , g1 ) ≤ S, and hence by property (*) we have that ρ(g0 , gl+1 ) ≤ 2S. A symmetric argument also finishes the proof when ρ(gl , gl+1 ) ≥ 12 S. Hence in the remainder we only consider the case that ρ(g0 , g1 ), ρ(gl , gl+1 ) < 12 S. Let m be the largest 1 such that m−1 i=0 ρ(gi , gi+1 ) ≤ 2 S. Then 1 ≤ m < l. By the inductive hypothesis m−1 ρ(gi , gi+1 ) ≤ S. ρ(g0 , gm ) ≤ 2 i=0
m
Since i=0 ρ(gi , gi+1 ) > 12 S, we have that the inductive hypothesis again ρ(gm+1 , gl+1 ) ≤ 2
l
l i=m+1
ρ(gi , gi+1 ) ≤ 12 S and by
ρ(gi , gi+1 ) ≤ S.
i=m+1
Trivially ρ(gm , gm+1 ) ≤ S. It follows from (*) that ρ(g0 , gl+1 ) ≤ 2S. This finishes the proof of the claim and that d is a metric. It is clear that ρ is left-invariant and consequently so is d.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
42
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Finally we verify that d is compatible with the topology of G. Let U be open in G and g ∈ U . Then for some n ∈ N, gVn ⊆ U . We check that Bd (g, 2−n−1 ) = {h ∈ G | d(g, h) < 2−n−1 } ⊆ U . Let h ∈ Bd (g, 2−n−1 ). Then d(h, g) ∈ 2−n−1 . By the claim in the proof above ρ(g, h) ≤ 2d(g, h) < 2−n . From the definition of ρ, g −1 h ∈ Vn . Thus h ∈ gVn ⊆ U . Conversely, let U be open in the topology given by d and let g ∈ U . For some n ∈ N we have that Bd (g, 2−n ) ⊆ U . We check that gVn+1 ⊆ U . Let h ∈ gVn+1 . Then ρ(g, h) ≤ 2−n−1 and by the definition of d, d(g, h) ≤ ρ(g, h) ≤ 2−n−1 < 2−n . Therefore h ∈ Bd (g, 2−n ) and hence h ∈ U . For any metric space there is the notion of a metric completion. Next we investigate the similar process on a metric group. Let G be a topological group with compatible left-invariant metric d. Define D(h, k) = d(h, k) + d(h−1 , k −1 ). Then D is a also a compatible metric on G (see Exercise 2.1.1). Let G be the completion of (G, D). Lemma 2.1.2 −1 If (hn ), (kn ) are D-Cauchy sequences in G, then both (h−1 n kn ) and (kn hn ) are d-Cauchy. Proof. Let > 0 and let N0 ∈ N be such that for all n, m ≥ N0 , D(kn , km ) < 1 3 . By continuity of the multiplication operation there is δ > 0 such that for −1 gkN0 ) < 13 . Let N ≥ N0 be such that for all g ∈ G with d(g, 1G ) < δ, d(kN 0 all n, m ≥ N , D(hn , hm ) < δ. Then for n, m ≥ N , −1 −1 d(hm h−1 n , 1G ) = d(hn , hm ) ≤ D(hn , hm ) < δ
and hence −1 d(kN hm h−1 n kN0 , 1G ) < 0
1 . 3
Then for n, m ≥ N , by Exercise 2.1.2 below, −1 −1 −1 d(h−1 n kn , hm km ) = d(km hm hn kn , 1G ) −1 −1 −1 kN0 , 1G ) + d(kN hm h−1 ≤ d(km n kN0 , 1G ) + d(kN0 kn , 1G ) 0
< 13 + 13 + 13 = . −1 This shows that (h−1 n kn ) is d-Cauchy. The sequence (kn hn ) is also d-Cauchy by symmetry.
Thus if (hn ) and (kn ) are D-Cauchy it follows immediately that (h−1 n kn ) is D-Cauchy. Therefore we can define the extended multiplication operation on
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
43
G by (hn ) · (kn ) = (hn kn ) for (hn ), (kn ) ∈ G. Moreover, we can define an extension of d to G by d((hn ), (kn )) = lim d(hn , kn ). n
By Lemma 2.1.2 d is well-defined. It also follows routinely from Lemma 2.1.2 that G becomes a topological group with the extended multiplication operation and that d is a compatible left-invariant metric on G. Thus we have obtained the following theorem. Theorem 2.1.3 Let G be a topological group with a compatible left-invariant metric d. Let D be defined as above, and let G be the completion of (G, D). Then the multiplication operation of G extends uniquely onto G, making G a topological group. Moreover, there is a unique extension of d onto G which is compatible left-invariant. The details of the proof are left to the reader. Example 2.1.4 (1) All groups with the discrete topology are metrizable groups. Moreover the trivial metric 0, if g = h, d(g, h) = 1, otherwise is a compatible metric that is left-invariant and complete. (2) The groups (R, +), (Q, +), (Z, +) with their usual topologies are all metrizable topological groups. (3) All Banach spaces are topological groups under the addition operation. The norm metric is a compatible metric that is both left-invariant and complete. Exercise 2.1.1 A metric d on a group G is right-invariant if d(hg, kg) = d(h, k) for all h, g, k ∈ G. For a metric d on G define d−1 (h, k) = d(h−1 , k −1 ). Show that (a) d−1 is a metric on G. (b) d and d−1 induce the same topology on G. (c) d is left-invariant iff d−1 is right-invariant. Exercise 2.1.2 Let G be a group and d a left-invariant metric on G. Show that d(hk, 1G ) ≤ d(h, 1G ) + d(k, 1G ) for all h, k ∈ G.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
44
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 2.1.3 Prove Theorem 2.1.3. A metric d on a group G is two-sided invariant if d(g1 hg2 , g1 kg2 ) = d(h, k) for all g1 , g2 , h, k ∈ G. Exercise 2.1.4 Show that a topological group G admits a compatible twosided invariant metric iff G is Hausdorff and 1G has a countable nbhd base {Un } such that gUn g −1 = Un for all g ∈ G and n ∈ N. Exercise 2.1.5 Show that any compact metrizable group admits a compatible two-sided invariant metric. (Hint: For any open set U containing 1G and g ∈ U , there are open sets V, W with g ∈ V and 1G ∈ W such that V · W · V −1 ⊆ U .) Exercise 2.1.6 Let G be a group and d a metric on G. Show that d is twosided invariant iff d(h1 h2 , k1 k2 ) ≤ d(h1 , k1 )+d(h2 , k2 ) for all h1 , h2 , k1 , k2 ∈ G. Exercise 2.1.7 Let G be a group and d a two-sided invariant metric on G. Show that G is a topological group in the topology induced by d. Exercise 2.1.8 Let G be a topological group with compatible two-sided invariant metric d. Suppose (hn ), (kn ) are sequences in G. Show that limn hn kn = 1G iff limn kn hn = 1G . Exercise 2.1.9 Let SL(2, R) be the topological group of all 2×2 real matrices A with det(A) = 1, equipped with the subspace topology it inherits from R4 . Show that SL(2, R) does not admit any compatible two-sided invariant metric. (Hint: Consider ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ 1⎞ 1 1 n n⎟ ⎜ n ⎟ and B = ⎜ ⎜ ⎟. An = ⎝ n ⎠ n ⎝ ⎠ 1 0 n 0 n Use Exercise 2.1.8.)
2.2
Polish groups
A topological group G is Polish if its underlying topology is Polish, that is, separable and completely metrizable. It follows from Theorem 2.1.3 that any separable metrizable group is densely embedded in a Polish group. For Polish subgroups of a Polish group, we have the following characterization.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
45
Proposition 2.2.1 Let G be a Polish group and H a subgroup of G with the subspace topology. Then the following are equivalent: (i) H is Polish. (ii) H is Gδ in G. (iii) H is closed in G. Proof. The implications (iii) ⇒ (ii) ⇒ (i) ⇒ (ii) are standard consequences of Proposition 1.1.2 (d). To see that (ii) ⇒ (iii), let H be a Gδ subgroup of G. Then the closure of H, H, is a closed subgroup of H, and H is a dense Gδ in H. If H = H there is at least one coset gH = H in H. In H the coset gH is also a dense Gδ . It follows from Proposition 1.1.2 (b) that H ∩ gH = ∅, a contradiction. Hence H = H and so H is closed. Corollary 2.2.2 Let G be a Polish group with compatible left-invariant metric d. Then D(h, k) = d(h, k) + d(h−1 , k −1 ) is a compatible complete metric for G. Proof. By Theorem 2.1.3 the completion G of (G, D) is a Polish group in which G is a dense Gδ , thus G is closed in G by Proposition 2.2.1 and therefore G = G. This shows that D is a compatible complete metric on G. The following proposition is straightforward. Proposition 2.2.3 A countable product of Polish groups is a Polish group. Proof. Let Gn , n ∈ ω, be Polish groups with compatible complete metrics dn . The metric dn ≤ 1 defined in Section 1.1 is still a compatible complete metric on Gn . For g = (gn ), h = (hn ) ∈ G = Gn , define d(g, h) =
∞
2−n dn (gn , hn ).
n=0
Then it is routine to check that d is a compatible complete metric on G. Example 2.2.4 (1) All countable groups with the discrete topology are Polish groups. (2) The additive groups of Rn , Cn (1 ≤ n ≤ ω) are Polish groups. The additive group of Q with the usual topology is not Polish by Proposition 2.2.1.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
46
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(3) The multiplicative group of R+ = {x ∈ R : x > 0} is a Polish group. (4) The additive group of any separable Banach space is a Polish group. (5) The ω-power of the two element group Z2 , denoted Zω 2 , is a Polish as a topological space is homeomorphic to the group. Note that Zω 2 Cantor space 2ω . (6) If X is a compact Polish space with a compatible metric d, let H(X) be the space of all homeomorphisms of X onto itself, equipped with the compact-open topology (see Exercise 1.1.6). With composition as the group operation H(X) is a Polish group. The supnorm metric dH(X) (f, g) = sup{d(f (x), g(x)) : x ∈ X} is a compatible complete metric on H(X) (see Exercise 2.2.2). (7) If (X, d) is a Polish metric space, let Iso(X, d) be the space of all isometries of X onto itself, equipped with the pointwise convergence topology (see Exercise 1.1.7). With composition as the group operation Iso(X, d) is a Polish group (see Exercise 2.2.3). Every Polish group admits a compatible left-invariant metric and a compatible complete metric. However, not every Polish group admits a compatible complete left-invariant metric. For brevity we make the following definition. Definition 2.2.5 A Polish group is cli if it admits a compatible complete left-invariant metric. Proposition 2.2.6 Let G be a Polish group with compatible left-invariant metric d. Then G is cli iff d is complete. Proof. We only prove the nontrivial direction (⇒). Let δ be a compatible complete left-invariant metric on G. Let > 0. By compatibility of δ and d there is λ > 0 such that Bd (1G , λ) =def {g ∈ G : d(g, 1G ) < λ} ⊆ Bδ (1G , ). Now let (gn ) be a d-Cauchy sequence in G. Then there exists N ∈ N such that −1 for all n, m ≥ N , d(gn , gm ) < λ. Thus for all n, m ≥ N , d(gm gn , 1G ) < λ −1 and hence δ(gm gn , 1G ) < or δ(gn , gm ) < . This shows that (xn ) is also δ-Cauchy and hence it converges. We have thus proved that d is complete. What we essentially showed in the above proof is that if d and δ are both compatible left-invariant metrics for a Polish group, then a sequence is dCauchy iff it is δ-Cauchy. It follows from the proof of Proposition 2.2.3 that a countable product of cli Polish groups is still cli.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
47
Example 2.2.7 S∞ is the group of all permutations of ω, with the topology inherited from the Baire space ω ω . The usual metric 0, if x = y, d(x, y) = 2−n , if x = y and n is the least such that x(n) = y(n). is a compatible left-invariant metric on S∞ . Since d is not complete (why?), S∞ is not cli. Next we study quotients of Polish groups. Let G be a Polish group and H a closed subgroup of G. We denote by G/H the set of right cosets of H and by πH : G → G/H the canonical projection map πH (g) = Hg. G/H is equipped −1 (U ) is open in G. with the quotient topology, that is, U ⊆ G/H is open iff πH Note that πH is continuous and open. We next show that G/H is metrizable. Lemma 2.2.8 Let G be a Polish group with compatible left-invariant metric d. Let H be a closed subgroup of G. Let d∗ (Hg1 , Hg2 ) = inf{ d(k1 , k2 ) | k1 ∈ Hg1 , k2 ∈ Hg2 }. Then d∗ is a compatible metric for G/H. Proof. We first verify that d∗ is a metric. For this the only nontrivial part is to show that d∗ (Hg1 , Hg2 ) > 0 for Hg1 = Hg2 . Assume d∗ (Hg1 , Hg2 ) = 0. Then by the definition of d∗ there are sequences (h1,n ), (h2,n ) of elements of H such that d(h1,n g1 , h2,n g2 ) → 0 as n → ∞. By left-invariance of d, we −1 have that d(g1−1 h−1 1,n h2,n g2 , 1G ) → 0 as n → ∞. Let hn = h1,n h2,n . Then −1 g1 hn g2 → 1G as n → ∞. And by the continuity of the multiplication operation hn → g1 g2−1 as n → ∞. Since H is closed, this implies that g1 g2−1 ∈ H, or g1 ∈ Hg2 . Thus Hg1 = Hg2 . Before showing that d∗ is compatible with the quotient topology on G/H we note that G/H is first countable. In fact, if Hg ∈ G/H and {Vn } is a countable open nbhd base for g ∈ G, then {πH (Vn )} is an open nbhd base for Hg in G/H. With this it is enough to show that a subset A ⊆ G/H is closed iff for any sequence (Hgn ) in A and Hg∞ in G/H with d∗ (Hgn , Hg∞ ) → 0 as n → ∞, Hg∞ ∈ A. We first assume that A ⊆ G/H is closed, Hgn ∈ A, and d∗ (Hgn , Hg∞ ) → 0 as n → ∞. In particular for any k ∈ N there is nk such that d∗ (Hgnk , Hg∞ ) < 2−k . It follows from the definition of d∗ and the left-invariance of d that for any k there are nk and hk ∈ H such that d(hk gnk , g∞ ) < 2−k . This means −1 −1 that g∞ is an accumulation point of πH (A). Since A is closed in G/H, πH (A) −1 is closed in G, and thus g∞ ∈ πH (A), or πH (g∞ ) = Hg∞ ∈ A. −1 (A) is Conversely, let A be closed in the d∗ -topology. We show that πH −1 closed in G. For this let (gn ) be a sequence in πH (A) and assume that
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
48
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
gn → g∞ as n → ∞. Then d∗ (Hgn , Hg∞ ) → 0 as n → ∞ and Hgn ∈ A. It −1 follows that Hg∞ ∈ A and thus g∞ ∈ πH (A), as required. Thus G/H is separable metrizable. G/H is indeed a Polish space, but for this we need the following theorem of Sierpinski. Theorem 2.2.9 (Sierpinski) Let X be a Polish space, Y a metrizable space, and π : X → Y a continuous and open surjection. Then Y is Polish. Proof. Let dX be a compatible complete metric on X. Let (Us )s∈ω<ω be a sequence of nonempty open sets in X such that, for any s ∈ ω <ω , (i) diam(Us ) ≤ 2−lh(s) ; (ii) for any n ∈ ω, Us n ⊆ Us ;
(iii) U∅ = X; Us = n∈ω Us n . Such a sequence was constructed in the proof of Theorem 1.3.7. Let Vs = π(Us ). Since π is open, each Vs is open in Y . Now let dY be a compatible metric on Y . Let Yˆ be the dY -completion of Y . Let Ns be the interior of the closure of Vs in Yˆ . Then it is easy to see that Ns ∩ Y = Vs . Also note that V∅ = Y and N∅ = Yˆ . We define a sequence (Ms ) of open sets in Yˆ such that, for any s ∈ ω <ω , (a) Ms ⊆ Ns ; (b) for any n ∈ ω, Ms n ⊆ Ms ; (c) for any y ∈ Yˆ there are only finitely many n with y ∈ Ms n ;
(d) Ms ∩ n Ms n = Ms ∩ n Ns n . The sequence (Ms ) is defined by induction on lh(s). To begin with let M∅ = N∅ = Yˆ . In general suppose Ms has been defined. We define Ms n for n ∈ ω. For each n by normality we can find an increasing sequence (Fn,m )m∈ω of closed subsets of Ns n such that Ns n = m Fn,m . We let Ms n = Ms ∩ Ns n − Fm,n . m
Then conditions (a) and (b) are immediate. To see (c) and (d), let n be the least such that y ∈ Ms ∩ Ns n and let m be the least such that y ∈ Fn,m . Then y ∈ Ms n and for k > max{m, n}, y ∈ Ms k . We claim that if y ∈ Yˆ − Y then there are at most finitely many s with y ∈ Ms . For this assume y ∈ Yˆ − Y and consider the set T = {s ∈ ω <ω : y ∈ Ms }. By (b) and (c) T is a finite splitting tree. Assume that T is infinite.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
49
Then by K¨ onig’s lemma there is z ∈ ω ω such that y ∈ Mzn for all n ∈ ω. Consider instead the element x ∈ X with {x} = n Uzn . Since y = π(x) there is an open set V in Yˆ such that π(x) ∈ V and y ∈ V . Let n be such that x ∈ Uzn ⊆ π −1 (V ). Then Vzn ⊆ V and y ∈ Vzn . But this is a contradiction since y ∈ Mzn ⊆ Nzn ⊆ Vzn by our construction. The claim implies that Yˆ − Y is an Fσ . Thus Y is Gδ in the Polish space Yˆ , and therefore is Polish by Proposition 1.1.2 (d). Suppose in addition that H is a normal subgroup of G, then the above discussion gives that G/H is a Polish group. Moreover, the metric d∗ is a compatible left-invariant metric on G/H (see Exercise 2.2.7). These results are summarized in the following theorem. Theorem 2.2.10 Let G be a Polish group and H be a closed subgroup of G. Then G/H is a Polish space. If in addition H is a normal subgroup of G, then G/H is a Polish group. We close this section with a theorem on extensions of cli Polish groups. Theorem 2.2.11 Let G be a Polish group and H a closed normal subgroup of G. Then the following are equivalent: (i) G is cli; (ii) Both H and G/H are cli. Proof. Let d be a compatible left-invariant metric on G. Then d H and d∗ are compatible left-invariant metrics on H and G/H, respectively. By Proposition 2.2.6 it suffices to show that d is complete iff both d H and d∗ are complete. First suppose d is complete. Then d H is obviously complete since H is closed. For the completeness of d∗ , let (Hgn ) be a d∗ -Cauchy sequence in G/H. By passing to a subsequence we may assume that d∗ (Hgn , Hgm ) < 2−n for all m > n. Then define a sequence (kn ) with kn ∈ Hgn by induction. Let k0 = g0 . In general let kn+1 ∈ Hgn+1 be such that d(kn+1 , kn ) < 2−n . Such a kn+1 exists by the definition of d∗ and left-invariance of d. Now it is clear that (kn ) is d-Cauchy in G, and by the completeness of d there is k∞ such that kn → k∞ as n → ∞. It follows that Hgk → Hg∞ as required. Conversely, assume both d H and d∗ are complete. Let (gn ) be a d-Cauchy sequence. By passing to a subsequence we may assume that d(gn , gm ) < 2−n for n < m. It follows that (Hgn ) is d∗ -Cauchy in G/H, and therefore there is g∞ such that Hgn → Hg∞ as n → ∞. And by the definition of d∗ and leftinvariance of d we obtain a sequence (hn ) in H such that hn gn → g∞ as n →
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
50
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
∞. Again by passing to a subsequence we may assume that d(hn gn , g∞ ) < −n 2−n . By left-invariance of d, d(gn , h−1 . Since H is a normal n g∞ ) < 2 subgroup there is a sequence (hn ) in H such that h−1 n g∞ = g∞ hn . Thus −n d(gn , g∞ hn ) < 2 . It follows by the triangle inequality from our assumption that d(gn , gm ) < 2−n for n < m that (g∞ hn ) is d-Cauchy. By left-invariance of d we have that (hn ) is d-Cauchy. Now since (hn ) is in H there exists h∞ such that hn → h∞ as n → ∞. We thus get that gn → g∞ h∞ as n → ∞. Exercise 2.2.1 Show that any locally compact, second countable, Hausdorff group is Polish. Exercise 2.2.2 Let (X, d) be a compact Polish metric space. Show that H(X) is a Polish group and that the supnorm metric is a compatible complete metric for H(X). Exercise 2.2.3 Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and D ⊆ X be a countable dense subset. Show that Iso(X, d) is a Polish group and that the following metric defined in Section 1.1 is a compatible left-invariant metric for Iso(X, d): dL (ϕ, ψ) =
∞
2−i d (ϕ(qi ), ψ(qi )),
i=1
where (qi ) is an enumeration of D. Exercise 2.2.4 Let G be a Polish group with compatible two-sided invariant metric d. Show that d is complete. Exercise 2.2.5 Show that any locally compact Polish group is cli. Exercise 2.2.6 Let G be a Polish group and H a closed subgroup of G. Show that G/H is at most countable iff H is clopen. Exercise 2.2.7 Let G be a Polish group with compatible left-invariant metric d, and H a closed normal subgroup of G. Prove that d∗ is a compatible leftinvariant metric on G/H. Exercise 2.2.8 Let G be a Polish group with compatible two-sided invariant metric d, and H a closed normal subgroup of G. Show that G/H admits a compatible two-sided invariant metric. Exercise 2.2.9 Show that any solvable Polish group admits a compatible complete left-invariant metric.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
2.3
51
Continuity of homomorphisms
The automatic continuity of homomorphisms among Polish groups we will discuss in this section is one of many special and nice properties of Polish group topologies. Its proof is also significant because it marks the beginning of the use of Baire category methods in invariant descriptive set theory. Recall that a topological group is Baire if it is Baire as a topological space, that is, the intersection of countably many open dense sets is dense. In any topological space a subset is meager if it is a subset of a union of countably nowhere dense sets, nonmeager if it is not meager, and comeager if its complement is meager. A topological space is Baire iff every nonempty open subset of it is nonmeager, thus in particular a Baire space is nonmeager (in itself). We also recall the following concept. Let X be a Baire space. A subset A ⊆ X has the Baire property if there is an open set U ⊆ X such that AU =def (A − U ) ∪ (U − A) is meager. It is easy to see that the subsets of X with the Baire property form a σ-algebra and it is generated by all open sets and meager sets. A nontrivial theorem of Nikodym (see Reference [97] Corollary 29.14) states that the collection of sets with the Baire property in any topological space is closed under the Suslin operation A. It follows that every analytic set (or coanalytic set) has the Baire property. The next proposition gives equivalent conditions for a topological group to be Baire. Proposition 2.3.1 Let G be a topological group. Then the following are equivalent: (i) G is Baire; (ii) G is nonmeager; (iii) Every nonempty open subset of G is nonmeager; (iv) There exists a nonmeager open subset of G; (v) There exists a nonmeager subset of G with the Baire property. Proof. We noted that (i)⇔(iii)⇒(ii). It is also trivial that (ii)⇔(iv)⇔(v). The only nontrivial implication is (ii)⇒(i). Assume that G is nonmeager but some open subset U of G is meager. Then note that G = g∈G gU and each gU is meager. Consider the collection of all families F of disjoint open subsets of G such that each V ∈ F is contained in some gU , g ∈ G. Partially order the collection by inclusion. Then it is clear that the Zorn’s lemma applies and thus we
obtain a maximal family F in this collection. Let F = {Vi }i∈I and V = i∈I Vi . Then the maximality of F implies that V is dense open in G,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
52
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
and thus G − V is nowhere dense and thus meager. Each Vi , being a subset of gU for some g ∈ G, is meager. Let Fi,n be nowhere dense sets such that Vi ⊆ n Fi,n . Let Fn = i∈I Fi,n . Then each Fn is again nowhere dense. To see this, assume Fn is dense in an open set W . Since G − V is nowhere dense, W ∩ Vi = ∅ for some i ∈ I, and without loss of generality we may assume that W ⊆ Vi for some i ∈ I. However, Fn ∩ W ⊆ Fn ∩ Vi ⊆ Fi,n , the
latter being nowhere dense, a contradiction. We have thus seen that V ⊆ n Fn is meager, and hence G = (G − V ) ∪ V is meager. Moreover, each of (iii) to (v) is equivalent to a strengthened condition in which we require that the set contains 1G . Theorem 2.3.2 (Pettis) Let G be a topological group and A ⊆ G a nonmeager subset with the Baire property. Then A−1 A contains an open nbhd of 1G . Proof. Let U be open such that AU is meager. Fix g ∈ U and let V be open with 1G ∈ V such that V V −1 ⊆ g −1 U . We claim that V ⊆ A−1 A. To see this, take h ∈ V and we show that A ∩ Ah = ∅. For this, first note that g ∈ U ∩ U h, and hence U ∩ U h = ∅. Next note that (A ∩ Ah)(U ∩ U h) ⊆ (AU ) ∪ (AU )h, and therefore (A ∩ Ah)(U ∩ U h) is meager. Thus A ∩ Ah = ∅ since otherwise the nonempty open set U ∩ U h would be meager in the space G which is Baire. If in the above theorem A is in addition a subgroup, then A is open, and therefore clopen (see Exercise 2.3.3). The phenomenon revealed in the following theorem is often referred to as automatic continuity. Recall that a function f : X → Y is Baire measurable if for every open set U ⊆ Y , f −1 (U ) has the Baire property. Theorem 2.3.3 Let G, H be Polish groups and ϕ : G → H be a group homomorphism. If ϕ is Baire measurable, then ϕ is continuous. If moreover ϕ(G) is nonmeager, then ϕ is also open. Proof. Let U ⊆ Y be open and g ∈ ϕ−1 (U ). Let V ⊆ Y be open such that −1 U . Let D ⊆ H be a countable 1H ∈ V and V −1 V ⊆ ϕ(g)
dense subset such −1 that D = D . Note that h∈D hV = H. It follows that h∈D ϕ−1 (hV ) = G. Since G is Baire, there is some h ∈ D such that A = ϕ−1 (hV ) is nonmeager. Since ϕ is Baire measurable, A has the Baire property. Thus by Theorem 2.3.2 A−1 A contains an open nbhd N of 1G . Then ϕ(gN ) ⊆ ϕ(gA−1 A) ⊆ ϕ(g)ϕ(A)−1 ϕ(A) ⊆ ϕ(g)(hV )−1 (hV ) ⊆ ϕ(g)V −1 V ⊆ U.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
53
This shows that ϕ is continuous. We note that ϕ(G) is Borel in H. In fact, let G0 = ϕ−1 (1H ) = ker(ϕ). Then G0 is a closed normal subgroup of G and G/G0 is a Polish group by Theorem 2.2.10. Let ϕ˜ : G/G0 → H be defined by ϕ(gG ˜ 0 ) = ϕ(g). Then ϕ˜ is a continuous homomorphism from G/G0 into H which is moreover an injection. Thus by the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1 ϕ(G/G ˜ 0 ) = ϕ(G) is Borel in H. This in particular implies that ϕ(G) has the Baire property. Now suppose in addition that ϕ(G) is nonmeager, then ϕ(G) is clopen by Exercise 2.3.3. In particular, ϕ(G) is a Polish group. If W ⊆ G/G0 is open, then ϕ(W ˜ ) being a continuous injective image of an open set is Borel and has the Baire property. This shows that the inverse homomorphism ϕ˜−1 : ϕ(G) → G/G0 is Baire measurable, thus by the first part of the proof ϕ˜−1 is continuous. Therefore ϕ : G → ϕ(G) is open, since for any open E ⊆ G, ϕ(E) = ϕ(EG0 ) = ϕ(π(E)), ˜ where π : G → G/G0 is the projection map g → gG0 . Finally, since ϕ(G) is indeed open in H, ϕ is an open map from G into H. The proof of the second part of the above theorem gives the following useful corollary. Corollary 2.3.4 Let G, H be Polish groups and ϕ : G → H be a surjective continuous homomorphism. Then the natural group isomorphism ϕ∗ : G/ ker(ϕ) → H induced by ϕ is a topological group isomorphism. Exercise 2.3.1 Let X be a Baire space and A ⊆ X has the Baire property. Suppose for every nonempty open set U ⊆ X, A ∩ U is nonmeager. Show that A is comeager. Exercise 2.3.2 Let X be a Baire space, Y a second countable space, and f : X → Y . Show that if f is Baire measurable then there is a dense Gδ set A ⊆ X such that f A is continuous. Exercise 2.3.3 Let G be a Baire group and A ≤ G a nonmeager subgroup with the Baire property. Show that A is a clopen subgroup of G. Exercise 2.3.4 Let G, H be topological groups and ϕ : G → H a group homomorphism. Show that if G is Baire, H is separable and ϕ is Baire measurable, then ϕ is continuous. Exercise 2.3.5 Show that any Baire measurable group isomorphism between Polish groups is a topological group isomorphism.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
54
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 2.3.6 Let G be a Polish group and H ≤ G a closed subgroup. Show that the Borel structure generated by the quotient topology on G/H is the same as the Effros Borel structure. Exercise 2.3.7 Let G be a group and τ1 and τ2 be both Polish topologies on G making G topological groups. Show that if τ1 and τ2 have the same Borel structure then τ1 = τ2 . Exercise 2.3.8 Let G be a group, d a left-invariant metric on G, and consider the topology induced by d. Show that if the right-translation g → gh is continuous for each h ∈ G, then the inverse g → g −1 is continuous. Deduce that if multiplication is continuous, then G is a topological group. Exercise 2.3.9 (Kallman) Show that the usual topology on S∞ is the unique Polish group topology on S∞ . (Hint: For any n ∈ ω the partial identity sn : {0, 1, . . . , n} → {0, 1, . . . , n} with sn (k) = k gives rise to a nbhd of the identity Nsn . Let Bn be the subgroup {g ∈ S∞ : g(l) = l for all l > n }. Show that Nsn consists of exactly all group elements h commuting with all elements of Bn . Thus in any Polish group topology Nsn is closed.)
2.4
The permutation group S∞
One of the most important examples of Polish groups is the permutation group S∞ . Many of the results in invariant descriptive set theory were first obtained for S∞ and later generalized to arbitrary Polish groups. S∞ and its closed subgroups are closely related to countable model theory, and because of this natural but profound connection with logic the study of S∞ and its actions has been the most fruitful part of invariant descriptive set theory. In this section we characterize S∞ and its closed subgroups as Polish groups and study their basic properties. Recall from Example 2.2.7 that S∞ consists of all permutations (bijections) of ω and is a Polish subspace of the Baire space ω ω . A compatible left-invariant metric on S∞ is 0, if x = y, d(x, y) = 2−n , if x = y and n is the least such that x(n) = y(n). S∞ does not admit any compatible complete left-invariant metric. A compatible complete metric on S∞ is D(x, y) = d(x, y) + d(x−1 , y −1 )
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
55
by Corollary 2.2.2. Note that the metric d is in fact an ultrametric. Recall that an ultrametric d is a metric satisfying d(x, z) ≤ max{d(x, y), d(y, z)} instead of the usual triangle inequality. The following theorem characterizes Polish groups that are essentially closed subgroups of S∞ . Theorem 2.4.1 Let G be a Polish group. Then the following are equivalent: (i) G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . (ii) G admits a compatible left-invariant ultrametric. (iii) G admits a countable nbhd base of 1G consisting of open subgroups. (iv) G admits a countable base closed under left (or right) multiplication, that is, there is a countable base B of G so that for any U ∈ B and g ∈ G, gU ∈ B. Proof. (i)⇒(ii) is obvious. For (ii)⇒(iii), let dG be a compatible leftinvariant ultrametric on G. For each n ∈ ω let Un = {x ∈ G : dG (x, 1G ) < 2−n }. Then {Un } is a countable nbhd base for 1G . Since dG is a left-invariant ultrametric, for x, y ∈ G we have dG (x−1 y, 1G ) = dG (y, x) ≤ max{dG (x, 1G ), dG (y, 1G )} and thus Un is a subgroup. For (iii)⇒(iv), let {Un } be a countable nbhd base of 1G so that each Un is an open subgroup. Note that each Un has only countably many left (or right) cosets. Let B be the collection of all left cosets of Un for all n ∈ ω. Then B is a countable base for G. It remains to show the implication (iv)⇒(i). Let B be a countable base closed under left multiplication. Let U0 , U1 , . . . enumerate B without repetition. We define an isomorphic embedding ϕ : G → S∞ by letting ϕ(g)(n) = m ⇐⇒ gUn = Um . It is straightforward to see that ϕ is an injective continuous homomorphism. To finish the proof it suffices to show that ϕ is an open map from G onto ϕ(G), since then ϕ(G) is homeomorphic to G and is Polish and by Proposition 2.2.1 ϕ(G) is closed in S∞ .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
56
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
For this let U be open in G and let g ∈ U . We find a basic open V in ϕ(G) so that ϕ(g) ∈ V ⊆ ϕ(U ). Since g 2 · g −1 = g, there are open subsets W0 , W1 of G with g 2 ∈ W0 , g ∈ W1 such that W0 W1−1 ⊆ U . Let Un ∈ B be such that g ∈ Un ⊆ g −1 W0 ∩ W1 . Let Um = gUn ∈ B and let V = {π ∈ S∞ : π(n) = m} ∩ ϕ(G). Then V is a basic open set in ϕ(G) and ϕ(g) ∈ V . To see that V ⊆ ϕ(U ), let h ∈ G with ϕ(h) ∈ V . Then hUn = Um . It follows that h ∈ Um Un−1 = gUn Un−1 ⊆ W0 W1−1 ⊆ U and hence ϕ(h) ∈ ϕ(U ). The following proposition is immediate either as a corollary of the above theorem or from a direct proof. Proposition 2.4.2 A countable product of closed subgroups of S∞ is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Since S∞ is totally disconnected, no nontrivial connected group can be isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Example 2.4.3 (1) Any countable group G with the discrete topology is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ , because {1G } is a nbhd base of itself which is an open subgroup. ω (2) Each of the product groups Zω 2 , Z is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . In fact, any countable product of countable groups is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ by (1) and Proposition 2.4.2.
(3) None of the groups Rn , Cn is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Next we explore the role S∞ plays in countable model theory. We first review some basics of mathematical logic. A relational language is a set L of (relation) symbols together with a function a : L → ω. An interpretation of a relational language L consists of a set A and an assignment which, to each relation symbol R in L, associates a relation RA of arity a(R), that is, RA ⊆ Aa(R) . Under these circumstances we call the tuple M = (A, {RA : R ∈ L}) an L-structure or a model of L. The set A is called the universe of the model M and is also denoted |M |. The interpretation of a relation R in a model M is also denoted as RM (instead of RA as above). Models of the same language L maintain a formal resemblance but can be of an entirely different nature. For instance, let L = {R} where R is a binary relation symbol. Any directed graph G = (V, E) is an L-structure with E = RG . Any partial order P = (A, <) is also an L-structure with <= RP .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
57
A general language can also contain function symbols, that is, symbols to be interpreted as functions (again of various arity) on the universe of the model. For instance, a group can be regarded as a model of the language L = {F1 , F2 }, where F1 is a unary function (to be interpreted as the inverse) and F2 is a binary function (to be interpreted as the multiplication). Note, however, that functions in models can be alternatively interpreted as relations anyway. For instance the inverse function in a group can be completely determined by a binary relation R(x, y) whose intended interpretation is x−1 = y. Thus when describing models it suffices to consider relational languages. For an L-structure M , an automorphism is a bijection f : |M | → |M | such that, for any n-ary relation symbol R in L and any x1 , . . . , xn ∈ |M |, RM (x1 , . . . , xn ) ⇐⇒ RM (f (x1 ), . . . , f (xn )). Let Aut(M ) be the group of all automorphisms of M . Then Aut(M ) is a subset of the product space |M ||M| . Equip |M | with the discrete topology and |M ||M| the product topology, then Aut(M ) becomes a topological group. When |M | is countable, Aut(M ) becomes a Polish group (Exercise 2.4.7). The following theorem shows that every closed subgroup of S∞ is isomorphic to the automorphism group of some countable model. Theorem 2.4.4 Let G be a Polish group. Then the following are equivalent: (i) G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . (ii) There is a relational language L and a countable L-structure M such that G ∼ = Aut(M ). (iii) There is a countable relational language L and a countable L-structure M such that G ∼ = Aut(M ). Proof. We show that (ii)⇒(i)⇒(iii). For (ii)⇒(i), assume L is a relational language and M a countable L-structure. If |M | is finite then it is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . We assume that |M | is infinite, and without loss of generality assume that |M | = ω. Then Aut(M ) is a subgroup of S∞ . It suffices to note that it is closed in S∞ . Indeed, let (fk ) be a sequence in Aut(M ) and suppose fk → f as k → ∞ for f ∈ S∞ . We verify that f ∈ Aut(M ). For this let R ∈ L be an n-ary relation symbol and x1 , . . . , xn ∈ |M |. For each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, there is Ki such that for all k ≥ Ki , fk (xi ) = f (xi ). Let K = max{Ki : 1 ≤ i ≤ n}. Then for k ≥ K, RM (x1 , . . . , xn ) ⇐⇒ RM (fk (x1 ), . . . , fk (xn )) ⇐⇒ RM (f (x1 ), . . . , f (xn )). This shows that f is an automorphism of M . For (i)⇒(iii), let G be a closed subgroup of S∞ . For each n ∈ ω, define an equivalence relation ∼n on ω n by (a1 , . . . , an ) ∼n (b1 , . . . , bn ) ⇐⇒ ∃f ∈ G ∀1 ≤ i ≤ n f (ai ) = bi .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
58
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Let Cn be the set of all ∼n -equivalence classes. Let C = n Cn . Let a language L consist of an n-ary relation symbol Rc associated with each n-ary element c of C. Note that L is countable. Define an L-structure M with the universe ω as follows: for each n-ary c ∈ C, let RcM = c. We claim that Aut(M ) = G. That G ⊆ Aut(M ) is obvious from our definition. For the other inclusion, we take f ∈ Aut(M ). Since G is closed, it suffices to show that, given any n ∈ ω, there is fn ∈ G so that fn (i) = f (i) for i < n. Let n ∈ ω be fixed. Since f ∈ Aut(M ) we have that for all n-ary relation Rc ∈ L, RcM (0, . . . , n − 1) ⇐⇒ RcM (f (0), . . . , f (n − 1)). In particular, (0, . . . , n − 1) ∼n (f (0), . . . , f (n − 1)). Thus by the definition of ∼n , there is fn ∈ G so that fn (i) = f (i) for all i < n. Note that S∞ can also be viewed as the isometry group for the discrete space ω with the trivial metric (Exercise 2.4.4). It turns out that many properties of S∞ can be generalized to arbitrary isometry groups via this trivial connection. Here we give just one example. Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and {Ri }i∈I be a set of closed relations over X. Let Iso(X, d, {Ri }i∈I ) denote the set of elements ϕ of Iso(X, d) such that for every i ∈ I, if Ri is an n-ary closed relation over X (that is, a closed subset of X n ), then for any x1 , . . . , xn ∈ X, Ri (x1 , . . . , xn ) ⇐⇒ Ri (ϕ(x1 ), . . . , ϕ(xn )). This is still a Polish group (Exercise 2.4.8). We have the following straightforward generalization of the above theorem to arbitrary isometry groups. The proof is similar to that of Theorem 2.4.4 and is left as an exercise. Theorem 2.4.5 Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and G a Polish group. Then the following are equivalent: (i) G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of Iso(X, d). (ii) There is a set of closed relations {Ri }i∈I over X such that G∼ = Iso(X, d, {Ri }i∈I ). (iii) There are countably many closed relations Rn ⊆ X n such that G ∼ = Iso(X, d, {Rn }n∈ω ). Exercise 2.4.1 Let G be a Polish group and H a closed normal subgroup of G. Show that G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ iff both H and G/H are isomorphic to closed subgroups of S∞ . Exercise 2.4.2 Show that a closed subgroup G of S∞ admits a compatible complete left-invariant metric iff G is closed in the Baire space ω ω .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
59
Exercise 2.4.3 Show that a closed subgroup G of S∞ is compact iff for every n ∈ ω the set {g(n) : g ∈ G} is finite. Exercise 2.4.4 Let (X, d) be a countable discrete metric space. Show that Iso(X, d) is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Exercise 2.4.5 Let (X, d) be a compact Polish ultrametric space. Show that H(X) is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Exercise 2.4.6 Let X be a countable compact Polish space. Show that H(X) is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of S∞ . Exercise 2.4.7 Let L be a relational language and M a countable L-structure. Show that Aut(M ) is a Polish group. Exercise 2.4.8 Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and {Ri }i∈I a set of closed relations over X. Show that Iso(X, d, {Ri }i∈I ) is a closed subgroup of Iso(X, d), and hence is Polish. Exercise 2.4.9 Prove Theorem 2.4.5.
2.5
Universal Polish groups
One of the prominent properties of the class of Polish groups is the existence of universal objects. In Section 1.2 we studied the universal Urysohn space, which is a universal Polish metric space. In this section we consider topological group isomorphic embeddings among Polish groups and universal objects in this category. Thus a Polish group is called universal if every Polish group is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of it. Based on the properties of the universal Urysohn space U, we will show that Iso(U) is a universal Polish group. Lemma 2.5.1 For every Polish group G there is a Polish metric space (X, d) such that G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of Iso(X, d). Proof. Let dG be a compatible left-invariant metric on G. Let (X, d) be the completion of (G, dG ). For any g ∈ G and x ∈ X, letting (hn ) be a dG Cauchy sequence in G with d(hn , x) → 0 as n → ∞, define ϕg (x) = limn ghn . The limit exists since (ghn ) is also dG -Cauchy by left-invariance of dG . It is easy to see that the definition does not depend on the choice of (hn ) and that ϕg is an isometry of (X, d). Moreover the map g → ϕg is a continuous
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
60
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
homomorphism from G into Iso(X, d). To finish the proof it suffices to show that {ϕg : g ∈ G} is closed in Iso(X, d), since then {ϕg : g ∈ G} is a closed subgroup of Iso(X, d), hence is Polish, and by Theorem 2.3.3 the map g → ϕg is a topological group isomorphism. Suppose (gn ) is a sequence in G such that ϕgn → ψ as n → ∞ for some ψ ∈ Iso(X, d). In particular, ϕgn (1G ) = gn → ψ(1G ) and (gn ) is dG -Cauchy. −1 On the other hand, ϕ−1 by the continuity of the inverse in Iso(X, d). gn → ψ −1 But ϕgn = ϕgn−1 , hence similarly (gn−1 ) is also dG -Cauchy. By Corollary 2.2.2 (gn ) is D-Cauchy for the complete metric D on G, and there is h ∈ G such that gn → h as n → ∞. It follows that ϕgn → ϕh and hence ϕh = ψ, as required. Recall that in Section 1.2 we defined extensions E(X) and E(X, ω) for arbitrary separable metric spaces X. We also noted that X can be isometrically embedded into E(X, ω). Here we make some more observations so as to study their isometry groups. For notational simplicity we suppress the metrics when writing the isometry groups, since there is no danger of confusion. If ϕ ∈ Iso(X), we let E(ϕ) ∈ Iso(E(X)) be given by E(ϕ)(f )(x) = f (ϕ−1 (x)). When f ∈ E(X, ω), then E(ϕ)(f ) ∈ E(X, ω) (see Exercise 2.5.2). Thus E(ϕ) can be regarded as an isometry of E(X, ω). Moreover, for each x ∈ X, E(ϕ)(fx )(y) = d(x, ϕ−1 (y)) = d(ϕ(x), y) = fϕ(x) (y). Thus E(ϕ) X = ϕ. It is also easy to see that E(ϕ ◦ ψ) = E(ϕ) ◦ E(ψ) when ϕ, ψ ∈ Iso(X). Recall also from Section 1.2 the general procedure to construct an isometric copy of the universal Urysohn space. Given an arbitrary Polish metric space X define inductively X0 = X, Xn+1 = E(Xn , ω) and Xω = n Xn . Then U is isometric to Xω , the completion of Xω . We are now ready to prove the universality of Iso(U) in the class of all Polish groups. Theorem 2.5.2 (Uspenskij) Iso(U) is a universal Polish group. Proof. In view of the preceding lemma it suffices to show that for any Polish metric space X the isometry group Iso(X) is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of Iso(Xω ). For any ϕ ∈ Iso(X), inductively define a sequence (ϕn ) by ϕ0 = ϕ, ϕn+1 = E(ϕn ). Then each ϕn is an isometry of X
n . Moreover, each ϕn+1 is an extension of ϕn . Thus we may define ϕω = n ϕn and ϕω is then an isometry of Xω . Finally ϕω has a unique extension to Xω similar to the proof of the preceding lemma. Let ϕ∗ be this unique extension. It is then straightforward to see that ϕ → ϕ∗ is a continuous homomorphism from Iso(X) into Iso(Xω ). To finish the proof it suffices to show that ϕ → ϕ∗ is an open map. But this follows immediately from the fact that ϕ∗ is an extension of ϕ for any
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
61
ϕ ∈ Iso(X). To see this, let (ϕk ), ψ ∈ Iso(X) and assume (ϕk )∗ → ψ ∗ as k → ∞. Then ϕk = (ϕk )∗ X → ψ ∗ X = ψ. In the rest of this section we mention without proof some further facts about universal Polish groups. First we should point out the following theorem of Uspenskij parallel to the previous theorem. Theorem 2.5.3 (Uspenskij) The Polish group H([0, 1]ω ) of homeomorphisms of the Hilbert cube [0, 1]ω is a universal Polish group. Note that every Polish space is homeomorphic to a subspace of the Hilbert cube [0, 1]ω (see Exercise 2.5.1). Thus in this theorem the Hilbert cube is playing the role of the universal Urysohn space in Theorem 2.5.2. A proof of this theorem can be found in Reference [97] (Theorem 9.18). In general suppose G is a class of Polish groups so that for any G ∈ G and closed subgroup H ≤ G, H ∈ G. One can ask whether G has a universal object, that is, whether there is G ∈ G such that every group H ∈ G is a closed subgroup of G. Some natural properties that define such classes of Polish groups are commutativity, compactness, local compactness, admitting two-sided invariant metric, and admitting complete left-invariant metric. It is known that there are universal abelian Polish groups [136] and there are no universal locally compact Polish groups (folklore). For the other classes the answers are not known. We introduce some related concepts. Definition 2.5.4 Let G and H be Polish groups. We say that H is involved in G or G involves H, denoted H ≤w G, if H is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of a quotient group of G. It is not immediate, but easy to show that ≤w is a transitive relation (Exercise 2.5.5). Definition 2.5.5 A Polish group G is surjectively universal if every Polish group is isomorphic to a quotient group of G. A Polish group G is weakly universal if every Polish group is involved in G. Similarly one can define the same concepts for a class of Polish groups closed under taking quotients. All the concepts mentioned above give rise to such classes. Thus it is of interest to ask whether there are surjectively universal or weakly universal objects in these classes. It is unknown whether there is a surjectively universal Polish group. On the positive side, we will show in the next section that a construction of Graev gives a surjectively universal Polish group with two-sided invariant metric, which implies the existence of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
62
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
a surjectively universal abelian Polish group. In fact, some of the familiar groups turn out to be weakly universal for abelian Polish groups, such as 1 and C(0, 1) under addition [59]. However, nothing seems to be known for cli Polish groups. Exercise 2.5.1 Let X be a Polish space, d ≤ 1 a compatible complete metric, and D = {xn : n ∈ ω} a countable dense subset of X. For any x ∈ X define f (x) = (d(x, xn ))n∈ω . Show that f is a homeomorphic embedding of X into [0, 1]ω . Exercise 2.5.2 Show that if ϕ ∈ Iso(X) and f ∈ E(X, ω) then E(ϕ)(f ) ∈ E(X, ω). Exercise 2.5.3 Show that E(ϕ) is the unique extension of ϕ to an isometry of E(X, ω) so that E(ϕ) X = ϕ. Exercise 2.5.4 Let G and H be Polish groups. Show that if H is a quotient group of a closed subgroup of G then H ≤w G. Exercise 2.5.5 Show that if G, H, K are Polish groups and K ≤w H ≤w G, then K ≤w G. Exercise 2.5.6 Show that there is a universal compact subgroup of S∞ . (Hint: Use Exercise 2.4.3 to show that every compact subgroup of S∞ is homeomorphic to a subgroup of n Sn , where Sn is the symmetric group for an n-element set.)
2.6
The Graev metric groups
The Graev metrics are constructed on algebraically free groups with continuum many generators (due to Graev [62] based on earlier work of Markov [119]). These are two-sided invariant metrics that make the completions of the free groups Polish. The construction gives rise to examples of surjectively universal groups in the classes of abelian Polish groups and of Polish groups admitting two-sided invariant metrics [135]. In this section we follow the approach of Ding and Gao [27] and give a construction of Graev metrics more general than the original one. For a nonempty set X, let X −1 = {x−1 : x ∈ X} be a disjoint copy of X and let e ∈ / X ∪ X −1 . Put X = X ∪ X −1 ∪ {e}. We use the notational convention that (x−1 )−1 = x for x ∈ X and e−1 = e. Since we will mostly discuss elements of X we also make the convention that the lowercase letters
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
63
x, y, x0 , x1 , and so on. will denote elements of X if we do not explicitly specify otherwise. Let W (X) be the set of words over the alphabet X. A word w ∈ W (X) is irreducible if w = e or else w = x0 · · · xn , where for any i, xi = e and xi+1 = x−1 i . Let F(X) be the set of irreducible words. For w ∈ W (X), we denote by lh(w) the length of w. Then note that an irreducible word has positive length. For each w ∈ W (X) the reduced word for w, denoted w , is the unique irreducible word obtained by successively replacing any occurrence of xx−1 in w by e and eliminating e from any occurrence of the form w1 ew2 , where at least one of w1 and w2 is nonempty. We can turn F(X) into a group, which is called the free group on X, by defining w · u = (wu) where wu is the concatenation of words w and u. Note that this is similar to but slightly different from the usual way free groups are obtained. In this treatment the identity element of F(X) is e but not the empty word. Assume now (X, d) is a metric space. Assume that a metric d on X satisfies the following conditions for all x, y ∈ X: (i) d(x, y) = d(x−1 , y −1 ) = d(x, y); (ii) d(x, e) = d(x−1 , e); (iii) d(x, y −1 ) = d(x−1 , y). If w = x0 · · · xn and u = y0 · · · yn are two words in W (X) of the same length, then put n d(xi , yi ). ρ(w, u) = i=0
Next call a word w ∈ W (X) trivial if w = e. A trivial word is also called a trivial extension of e. For w ∈ W (X) with lh(w) > 0 but w = e, a trivial extension of w = x0 · · · xn is a word of the form u0 x0 u1 x1 · · · un xn un+1 , where each of u0 , . . . , un+1 is either trivial or empty. In particular, if w ∈ F(X) and w∗ ∈ W (X), then w∗ is a trivial extension of w if and only if (w∗ ) = w. Definition 2.6.1 The Graev metric on F(X) is defined as δ(u, v) = inf{ρ(u∗ , v ∗ ) : u∗ , v ∗ ∈ W (X), lh(u∗ ) = lh(v ∗ ), (u∗ ) = u, (v ∗ ) = v}. We will verify that δ is a two-sided invariant metric on F(X) extending d, that the group F(X) equipped with the topology given by δ becomes a topological group, and that if X is separable then so is F(X). To prove these results we need first to develop a method of computation for Graev metrics. Definition 2.6.2 Let m, n ∈ N and m ≤ n. A bijection θ on {m, . . . , n} is a match if (1) θ ◦ θ = id; and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
64
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(2) there is no m ≤ i, j ≤ n such that i < j < θ(i) < θ(j). Lemma 2.6.3 Let θ be a bijection on {m, . . . , n} such that θ ◦ θ = id. Then θ is a match iff for any nonempty set X, if w = xm · · · xn ∈ W (X) is such that xθ(i) = x−1 i for any m ≤ i ≤ n, then w is trivial. Proof. (⇒) We argue by induction on lh(w). Without loss of generality = e. we may assume m = 0. If θ(0) = 0, then w = x0 w1 and x0 = x−1 0 Since θ {1, . . . , n} is a match on {1, . . . , n}, the inductive hypothesis implies that w1 is trivial. Then w = ew1 is trivial. Otherwise, θ(0) > 0 and w = x0 w1 xθ(0) w2 with xθ(0) = x−1 0 . Thus if 0 < i < θ(0) then 0 < θ(i) < θ(0), and if θ(0) < i then θ(0) < θ(i). By inductive hypothesis, both w1 and w2 are trivial. Therefore w = x0 w1 x−1 0 w2 is trivial. (⇐) Assume there are m ≤ i, j ≤ n so that i < j < θ(i) < θ(j). Let X contain at least two distinct elements x, y and let w = xm . . . xn ∈ W (X) be the word so that xi = x, xj = y, xθ(i) = x−1 , xθ(j) = y −1 , and xk = e for any other index k. Then w = xyx−1 y −1 = e. So w is not trivial. Lemma 2.6.4 For any trivial word w = x0 · · · xn there is a match θ such that for any i ≤ n, xθ(i) = x−1 i . Proof. We prove by induction on lh(w). If lh(w) = 1 then w = e; let θ(0) = 0 and θ is a match. For lh(w) > 1 or n > 0 we consider two cases. Case 1: xn = x−1 0 . Then it follows that w = w1 w2 , while w1 = x0 · · · xm and w2 = xm+1 · · · xn are both nonempty and trivial. By inductive hypothesis there are two matches θ1 on {0, . . . , m} and θ2 on {m + 1, . . . , n} such that xθk (i) = x−1 i , k = 1, 2. Let θ = θ1 ∪ θ2 . Then θ is as required. Case 2: −1 xn = x0 . Then w = x0 w1 x−1 0 and w1 = x1 . . . xn−1 is trivial. By inductive hypothesis there is a match θ1 on {1, . . . , n − 1} such that xθ1 (i) = x−1 i . Then the required θ can be defined as θ = θ1 ∪ {(0, n), (n, 0)}. For any match θ on {0, . . . , n} and w = x0 · · · xn ∈ W (X), we define ⎧ if θ(i) > i, ⎨ xi , if θ(i) = i, xθi = e, ⎩ x−1 , if θ(i) < i. θ(i) Let wθ = xθ0 . . . xθn . Then xθθ(i) = (xθi )−1 for any i ≤ n, so wθ is trivial by Lemma 2.6.3. Moreover, ρ(w, wθ ) =
n i=0
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
d(xi , xθi ) =
θ(i)=i
d(xi , e) +
θ(i)>i
d(x−1 i , xθ(i) ).
Polish Groups
65
Note that for each w ∈ W (X) there are only finitely many matches θ on {0, . . . , lh(w) − 1} and thus only finitely many trivial words of the form wθ . The following theorem shows how matches are used in the computation of Graev metrics. Theorem 2.6.5 (Ding–Gao) For any w ∈ F(X), δ(w, e) = min{ρ(w, wθ ) : θ is a match}. Proof. We need to show that for any trivial extension w∗ of w and any trivial word u with lh(w∗ ) = lh(u), there is a match θ on {0, . . . , lh(w) − 1} so that ρ(w∗ , u) ≥ ρ(w, wθ ). For this let w = x0 · · · xn , w∗ = y0 · · · yl be a trivial extension of w, and u = z0 · · · zl a trivial word. We can assume that w∗ = w0 x0 w1 · · · wn xn wn+1 , where each wi is either trivial or empty, and xi = yki , wp = ykp−1 +1 · · · ykp −1 , for i ≤ n, p ≤ n + 1 and a sequence k−1 = −1 < k0 < · · · < kn < kn+1 = l + 1. For each p ≤ n + 1, let ϕp be a match on {kp−1
+ 1, . . . , kp − 1} given by Lemma 2.6.4 such that yϕp (j) = yj−1 . Let ϕ = p≤n+1 ϕp . Then ϕ ◦ ϕ = id. Similarly since u is trivial we can let μ be a match on {0, . . . , l} such that zμ(j) = zj−1 . We now define a match θ on {0, . . . , n}. First we consider the following graph defined on the set {0, . . . , l}. For each pair j and j , we put an edge between j and j if either ϕ(j) = j or μ(j) = j . Let Γ be the resulting graph. Then note that every element of the form ki for i ≤ n is incident with exactly one edge since it is not in the domain of ϕ. However, for any other j ≤ l there are exactly two edges incident with j, one from ϕ(j) and one from μ(j). Note that it is possible to have loops in Γ, that is, elements j with an edge to itself. Now consider the connected components of Γ. For each i ≤ n, the connected component containing ki must be a simple path with ki as one of its endpoints. If j is the other endpoint of this path, then either j has only one edge incident with it, in which case j must be of the form ki for i = i, or else j has two edges incident with it, one of which must be a loop. In the first case, we define θ(i) = i ; in the second case, we let θ(i) = i. It is clear that θ is a bijection of {0, . . . , n} with θ ◦ θ = id. We check that θ is a match. By Lemma 2.6.3 it suffices to show that if X −1 is any nonempty set and v = x0 · · · xn ∈ W (X ) satisfies xθ(i) = xi , then v is trivial. To do this we first define a word w ¯ = y¯0 · · · y¯l . For any i ≤ n, consider the connected component of ki in the graph Γ. As noted above it must be a path with ki as one of its endpoints. In fact the other elements of this path are successively μ(ki ), ϕμ(ki ), μϕμ(ki ), ϕμϕμ(ki ), and so on. Moreover, if the other endpoint is some ki for i = i, then the number of elements in the path is even. In view of this, we also successively let y¯ki = xi ,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
66
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory −1
−1
y¯μ(ki ) = xi , y¯ϕμ(ki ) = xi , y¯μϕμ(ki ) = xi , and so on, until all indices in the connected component of ki are exhausted. If θ(i) = i the construction −1 = xθ(i) . Thus y¯j is well defined for any j in guarantees that y¯kθ(i) = xi a connected component of some ki . Finally for any j ≤ l such that y¯j has not been defined above, let y¯j = e. Now let w ¯i = y¯kp−1 +1 · · · y¯kp −1 . Since ¯i is trivial. So w ¯ y¯ϕp (j) = y¯j−1 whenever kp−1 + 1 ≤ j ≤ kp − 1, we have that w −1 is a trivial extension of v. On the other hand y¯μ(j) = y¯j for any j ≤ l, and thus w ¯ is trivial. This implies that e = (w) ¯ = (v) , so v is trivial too. For any j ≤ l, we have d(yj , zj ) + d(yμ(j) , zμ(j) ) = d(yj , zj ) + d(yμ(j) , zj−1 ) −1 −1 , zj ) ≥ d(yj , yμ(j) ). = d(yj , zj ) + d(yμ(j)
Thus, if θ(i) > i, then the connected component of Γ containing ki can be enumerated as ki , μ(ki ), ϕμ(ki ), · · · , μ(ϕμ)m (ki ) = kθ(i) for some m ≥ 0. Since ϕ is a match, we have that d(yki , zki ) + d(yμ(ki ) , zμ(ki ) ) + d(yϕμ(ki ) , zϕμ(ki ) ) + d(yμ(ϕμ)(ki ) , zμ(ϕμ)(ki ) ) + ······ + d(y(ϕμ)m (ki ) , z(ϕμ)m (ki ) ) + d(yμ(ϕμ)m (ki ) , zμ(ϕμ)m (ki ) ) −1 −1 ≥ d(xi , yμ(k ) + d(yϕμ(ki ) , yμϕμ(k ) + · · · + d(yμ(ϕμ)m (ki ) , x−1 θ(i) ) i) i) −1 −1 −1 −1 −1 ) + d(yμ(k , yμϕμ(k ) + · · · + d(y(ϕμ) = d(xi , yμ(k m (k ) , xθ(i) ) i) i) i) i −1 ≥ d(xi , x−1 θ(i) ) = d(xi , xθ(i) ).
In the case of θ(i) = i, the connected component of Γ containing ki can be enumerated as either ki , μ(ki ), ϕμ(ki ), . . . , μ(ϕμ)m (ki ) = (ϕμ)m+1 (ki ) or ki , μ(ki ), ϕμ(ki ), . . . , (ϕμ)m (ki ) = μ(ϕμ)m (ki ). In the first case if j is the last index in the enumeration then ϕ(j) = j and therefore yj = e. Then a similar computation as the above gives that d(yki , zki ) + d(yμ(ki ) , zμ(ki ) ) + · · · + d(yj , zj ) ≥ d(xi , e). In the second case if j is the last index in the enumeration then μ(j) = j and therefore zj = e. Again a similar computation as above, but with one less
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
67
term, gives that d(yki , zki ) + d(yμ(ki ) , zμ(ki ) ) + · · · + d(yj , zj ) −1 −1 −1 ) + d(yμ(k , yμϕμ(k ) + ··· ≥ d(xi , yμ(k i) i) i) −1 −1 +d(y(ϕμ)m−1 (ki ) , yμ(ϕμ)m−1 (ki ) ) + d(y(ϕμ)m (ki ) , z(ϕμ)m (ki ) ) −1 −1 −1 ) + d(yμ(k , yμϕμ(k ) + ··· = d(xi , yμ(k i) i) i) −1 −1 −1 +d(y(ϕμ)m−1 (ki ) , yμ(ϕμ)m−1 (ki ) ) + d(yμ(ϕμ) m−1 (k ) , e) i
≥ d(xi , e). In summary, ρ(w∗ , u) =
l
d(yj , zj ) ≥
j=0
θ(i)=i
d(xi , e) +
θ d(x−1 i , xθ(i) ) = ρ(w, w ).
θ(i)>i
With Theorem 2.6.5 the fundamental results of Graev follow easily. Theorem 2.6.6 (Graev) Let (X, d) be a metric space. Then the Graev metric δ is a two-sided invariant metric on F(X) extending d. Furthermore, F(X) is a topological group in the topology induced by δ. If X is separable, so is F(X).
Proof. It is immediate from Definition 2.6.1 that δ is two-sided invariant and for any D ⊆ X dense in X, F(D) is dense in F(X). That δ ≥ 0 and its symmetry are also clear. For the triangle inequality, by two-sided invariance it suffices to check that for any w, u ∈ F(X), δ(w · u, e) ≤ δ(w, e) + δ(u, e). By Theorem 2.6.5 let θ, ϕ be matches so that δ(w, e) = ρ(w, wθ ) and δ(u, e) = ρ(u, uϕ ). Then ρ(wu, wθ uϕ ) = ρ(w, wθ ) + ρ(u, uϕ ). Since wu is a trivial extension of w · u and wθ uϕ is trivial, δ(w · u, e) ≤ ρ(wu, wθ uϕ ) = δ(w, e) + δ(u, e). To see that δ(w, u) = 0 implies w = u for w, u ∈ F(X), by two-sided invariance it suffices to show that δ(w, e) = 0 implies w = e. Suppose δ(w, e) = 0 and let θ be a match so that 0 = δ(w, e) = ρ(w, wθ ). Then the definition of ρ gives that w = wθ , so w is trivial after all. But the only trivial element of F(X) is e, hence w = e. Now if x, y ∈ X are distinct, then δ(x, y) = δ(y −1 x, e) and (y −1 x)θ can only result in y −1 y and ee. Then y −1 y achieves the smaller value d(x, y) = d(x, y). This shows that δ extends d. The continuity of the group operations follows from the two-sided invariance and the triangle inequality as usual.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
68
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Let (F(X), δ) denote the completion of (F(X), δ). Then by Theorem 2.1.3 F(X) becomes a Polish group with a two-sided invariant compatible metric δ. Definition 2.6.7 The Graev metric group G is F(ω ω ) with the usual metric d(x, y) =
0, if x = y, 2− min{n : x(n)=y(n)} , if x = y,
and the metric d on ω ω extending d is determined by letting d(x−1 , y −1 ) = d(x, y), d(x, e) = d(x−1 , e) = d(x, y −1 ) = 1 for x, y ∈ ω ω . Theorem 2.6.8 The Graev metric group G is surjectively universal for the class of all Polish groups admitting compatible two-sided invariant metrics. Proof. Let G be a Polish group with a compatible two-sided invariant metric dG . Then by Exercise 2.2.4 dG is complete. Without loss of generality we may assume dG < 1. And then by Exercise 1.3.7 there is a Lipschitz map ϕ from ω ω onto G, that is, dG (ϕ(x), ϕ(y)) ≤ d(x, y) for all x, y ∈ ω ω . Let ϕˆ : F(ω ω ) → G be the canonical group homomorphism extending ϕ. We claim that ϕˆ is also ˆ ϕ(v)) ˆ ≤ δ(u, v) for u, v ∈ F(ω ω ). By invariance Lipschitz, that is, dG (ϕ(u), and homomorphism properties it suffices to show that dG (ϕ(u), ˆ 1G ) ≤ δ(u, e) for all u ∈ F(ω ω ). Let v be a trivial word with lh(v) = lh(u) and ρ(u, v) = δ(u, e). Assume u = x1 . . . xn and v = y1 . . . yn . Then by Exercise 2.1.6 we have that ˆ i ), ϕ(y ˆ i )) δ(u, e) = ρ(u, v) = ni=1 d(xi , yi ) ≥ ni=1 dG (ϕ(x ≥ dG (ϕ(u), ˆ ϕ(v)) ˆ = dG (ϕ(u), ˆ 1G ). Finally we define ϕ : F(ω ω ) → G. Let σ ∈ F(ω ω ) and (un ) be a δ-Cauchy ˆ n ). sequence in F(ω ω ) with un → σ as n → ∞. We let ϕ(σ) = limn ϕ(u The right-hand side makes sense since (ϕ(u ˆ n )) is dG -Cauchy by the Lipschitz condition. It is routine to check that the definition of ϕ does not depend on the choice of the Cauchy sequence. Moreover ϕ is still Lipschitz, hence in particular it is a continuous homomorphism from G onto G. Exercise 2.6.1 Consider X = {xn : n ∈ ω} with metric d(xn , xm ) = 2− min(n,m) . Extend d to d on X by letting d(xn , e) = 2−n and d(xn , x−1 m ) = 2− min(n,m) . Compute ρ(x1 x2 x3 , x2 x3 x1 ) and δ(x1 x2 x3 , x2 x3 x1 ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Groups
69
Exercise 2.6.2 Show that for any w, u ∈ F(X) there are trivial extensions w∗ of w and u∗ of u such that δ(w, u) = ρ(w∗ , u∗ ). Exercise 2.6.3 Let (X, d) be a compact metric space and for n ∈ ω let F(X, n) = {u ∈ F(X) : lh(u) ≤ n}. Show that F(X, n) is a compact subset of (F(X), δ). Exercise 2.6.4 Let (X, d) be a metric space and Y ⊆ X. Let δY be the Graev metric on F(Y ) induced from the subspace (Y, d Y ) and let δX be the Graev metric on F(X). Show that δY = δX F(Y ). In particular, if Y is dense in X, then F (Y ) = F (X). Exercise 2.6.5 (Shakhmatov–Pelant–Watson) Let G be the Graev metric group. Let G be the commutator subgroup of G, that is, G is the group generated by elements of the form g −1 h−1 gh for g, h ∈ G. Let N be the closure of G. Show that N is a closed normal subgroup of G and that the quotient group G/N is surjectively universal for all abelian Polish groups. (Hint: Recall from group theory that if H is a normal subgroup of G then G/H is abelian iff H contains the commutator subgroup of G.)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 3 Polish Group Actions
In this chapter we turn to an overview of the basic concepts and results about Borel actions of Polish groups. Many of the results in this chapter originated in the study of operator algebras, representation theory, and dynamical systems at least for special classes of Polish groups. As explained at the beginning of Chapter 2, our ultimate goal is to study the complexity of equivalence relations, among which orbit equivalence relations are important examples.
3.1
Polish G-spaces
Definition 3.1.1 Let G be a group and X a set. An action of G on X is a map a:G×X →X such that, for all x ∈ X and g, h ∈ G, (i) a(1G , x) = x; (ii) a(g, a(h, x)) = a(gh, x). When a is an action of G on X, the triple (X, G, a) is called a transformation group, or alternatively the pair (X, a) is called a G-space. Some informal notation is often used to avoid the awkward mention of the action a, especially when composition is involved. When the action a is understood, we write g · x for a(g, x), (X, G) as the transformation group, and X as a G-space. Definition 3.1.2 Let G be a topological group, X a topological space, and a an action of G on X. If a is continuous, then (X, G, a) is called a topological transformation group and (X, a) a topological G-space. Furthermore, if G is a Polish group, X is a Polish space and a is continuous, then (X, G, a) is called a Polish transformation group and (X, a) a Polish G-space.
71 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
72
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
We first give a useful criterion for the continuity of an action of a Polish group on a Polish space. For this we need the following definition. Definition 3.1.3 Let G be a topological group, X a topological space, and a an action of G on X. The action a is separately continuous if for any g ∈ G the map ag : X → X defined by ag (x) = a(g, x) is continuous and for any x ∈ X the map ax : G → X defined by ax (g) = a(g, x) is continuous. For a separately continuous action a, each ag , g ∈ G, is a homeomorphism of the space X, with ag−1 as its inverse. We next show that separate continuity is sufficient to guarantee continuity of an action of a Polish group. Theorem 3.1.4 Let G be a Polish group, X a metrizable space, and a an action of G on X. Then a is continuous iff it is separately continuous. Proof. The (⇒) direction is obvious. We only need to show (⇐). Assume that a is separately continuous. We show that a is continuous at every point (g0 , x0 ). First we claim that there is some g1 ∈ G such that a is continuous at (g1 , x0 ). For this let d be a compatible metric on X. For n, k ∈ ω let Fn,m = {g ∈ G : ∀x(d(x, x0 ) < 2−n ⇒ d(a(g, x), a(g, x0 )) ≤ 2−m )}. Then it follows from
that
separate continuity
Fn,m is a closed subset of G and that G = m n Fn,m . Let D = m n (Fn,m − Int(Fn,m )). Then D is meager in G and thus there is g1 ∈ G − D. We check that a is continuous at (g1 , x0 ). For this let {(hk , yk )} be a sequence converging to (g1 , x0 ). Let > 0. Let m be large enough such that 2−m+1 < . Then for some n we have g1 ∈ Fn,m . Fix such an n and we note that g1 ∈ Int(Fn,m ) since g1 ∈ D. Since hk → g1 as k → ∞ there is K0 such that for all k ≥ K0 , hk ∈ Fn,m . Also since yk → x0 as k → ∞ there is K1 such that for all k ≥ K1 , d(yk , x0 ) < 2−n . Thus for all k ≥ max{K0 , K1 }, we have both hk ∈ Fn,m and d(yk , x0 ) < 2−n , and therefore d(a(hk , yk ), a(hk , x0 )) ≤ 2−m . From left continuity of a we also have K2 such that for all k ≥ K2 , d(a(hk , x0 ), a(g1 , x0 )) < 2−m . Thus for all k ≥ max{K0 , K1 , K2 }, we have d(a(hk , yk ), a(g1 , x0 )) < 2−m+1 < . We have thus shown that a is continuous at (g1 , x0 ). Finally we note that a(g0 , x0 ) = a(g0 g1−1 , a(g1 , x0 )), thus by the left continuity it follows that a is continuous at (g0 , x0 ). Example 3.1.5 (1) Let G be any topological group. Then G acts on itself by left multiplication: al : G × G → G al (g, h) = gh.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
73
Then al is continuous. Similarly G also acts continuously on itself by right multiplication, where ar (g, h) = hg −1 , and by conjugacy, where ac (g, h) = ghg −1 . (2) Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and G a closed subgroup of Iso(X). Then there is a natural application action of G on X given by g · x = g(x). This action is continuous since it is separately continuous. (3) Let X be a compact Polish space and G a closed subgroup of H(X). Then the application action of G on X is also continuous. We recall some algebraic notion associated with group actions. Definition 3.1.6 Let a group G act on a set X. For each x ∈ X, the G-orbit of x, denoted [x]G or G · x, is the set {g · x : g ∈ G}. A subset A of X is G-invariant if G · x ⊆ A for every x ∈ A. Any orbit is an invariant set. Any invariant set is the union of a collection of orbits. Definition 3.1.7 Let a group G act on a set X. The action is said to be free if for every g ∈ G with g = 1G and every x ∈ X, g · x = x. For any G-space X, the free part of X (or of the action) is the subset F = {x ∈ X : ∀g ∈ G (g = 1G ⇒ g ·x = x)}. The subset X − F is the nonfree part of the action. The free part of an action on X is an invariant subset of X. Definition 3.1.8 Let a group G act on a set X. For every x ∈ X, the stabilizer of x, denoted Gx , is {g ∈ G : g · x = x}. The stabilizer of any element is a subgroup of G. For g ∈ G and x ∈ X, Gg·x = gGx g −1 . For any x ∈ X, Gx = {1G } iff x is in the free part of the action. Also note that there is a canonical map from G/Gx onto G · x given by gGx → g · x. This map is a bijection. (See Exercise 3.1.4.) Definition 3.1.9 Let G be a group, X, Y G-spaces, and f : X → Y . f is called a G-map if for any g ∈ G and x ∈ X, f (g · x) = g · f (x). An injective G-map is called a G-embedding. Under a G-map the orbit structures are preserved: if C is a G-orbit then f (C) is a G-orbit; if A is G-invariant then so is f (A). If f is a G-embedding all the algebraic structures are preserved: for any x ∈ X, Gx = Gf (x) ; thus if F is the free part of X then f (F ) is contained in the free part of Y .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
74
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
In the context of a continuous Polish group action, the orbits are demonstrating nice properties. First note that every stabilizer group is closed in G. And thus by Theorem 2.2.10 G/Gx becomes a Polish space. For each x ∈ X, the canonical map from G/Gx onto G · x is continuous. Proposition 3.1.10 (Ryll-Nardzewski) Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then every orbit is Borel.
Proof. The canonical map is a continuous injection from the Polish space G/Gx onto G · x. By the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1 G · x is Borel. Exercise 3.1.1 Let G be a group and X a set. Consider the space X G of all functions from G into X. Define al : G × X G → X G by al (g, p)(h) = p(g −1 h). Show that al is an action of G on X G . This is called the left action of G on X G . Similarly define a right action and a conjugacy action of G on X G . Exercise 3.1.2 Let G be a countable group with the discrete topology, X a topological space, and X G equipped with the product topology. Show that the left, right, and conjugacy actions of G on X G defined above are all continuous. Exercise 3.1.3 Let G be a Polish group and X a compact Polish G-space. For each g ∈ G let hg : X → X be defined by hg (x) = y iff g · x = y. Show that hg is a homeomorphism of X and the map g → hg is a topological group isomorphic embedding from G into H(X). Exercise 3.1.4 Let a group G act on a set X. Let g ∈ G and x ∈ X. Prove the following statements: (a) Gg·x = gGx g −1 ; (b) Gx = {1G} iff x is in the free part of the action; (c) The canonical map from G/Gx to G · x is a bijection. Exercise 3.1.5 Let G be a group, X, Y G-spaces, and f : X → Y . Let x ∈ X. If f is a G-map show that f (G · x) = G · f (x). If f is a G-embedding show that Gf (x) = Gx . Exercise 3.1.6 Let G be a countable group and X a Polish space. Let XlG be the Polish G-space with the left action (see Exercises 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 above) and XrG the Polish G-space with the right action. Show that there is a homeomorphic G-map (G-homeomorphism) between XlG and XrG . Hence we may refer to either action as X G with the shift action.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
75
Exercise 3.1.7 Let G be a countable group and ([0, 1]ω )G be the Polish Gspace with the shift action. Show that for any Polish G-space X there is a continuous G-embedding from X into ([0, 1]ω )G . (Hint: Use Exercise 2.5.1.) Exercise 3.1.8 Let G be a Polish group, d a compatible complete metric on G, and Y a Polish metric space. Let L(G, Y ) be the Polish space of all Lipschitz functions from (G, d) into Y . Consider the action of G on L(G, Y ) defined by (g · f )(h) = f (g −1 h). Show that under this action L(G, Y ) is a Polish G-space. Exercise 3.1.9 Let G be a Polish group and d ≤ 1 a compatible metric on G. Recall from Exercise 1.1.9 that L(G, d) denotes the space of all Lipschitz functions from (G, d) into [0, 1]. Consider the action of G on L(G, d) defined by (g · f )(h) = f (hg). Show that under this action L(G, d) is a compact Polish G-space.
3.2
The Vaught transforms
Baire category method plays the central role in many results in invariant descriptive set theory. It is very useful to use the following logical notation of category quantifiers in the study of Polish group actions. Let X be a topological space, A ⊆ X, and x ∈ X, then we write A(x) for the statement x ∈ A, and ¬A(x) for x ∈ A. In this fashion a subset is identified with a property. We also write ∀∗ x A(x) for the statement that A is comeager in X, and read the quantifier ∀∗ x as “for comeager many x.” Similarly, we write ∃∗ x A(x) for the statement that A is nonmeager in X, and read the quantifier ∃∗ x as “for nonmeager many x.” Sometimes we specify the domain of the quantifiers by writing ∀∗ x ∈ X and ∃∗ x ∈ X, especially when there is more than one space involved. We will use the following basic theorem throughout the book, whose proof can be found in Reference [97] Theorem 8.41. Theorem 3.2.1 (Kuratowski–Ulam) Let X, Y be second countable topological spaces and A ⊆ X × Y with the Baire property. Then ∀∗ (x, y) A(x, y) ⇐⇒ ∀∗ x ∀∗ y A(x, y) ⇐⇒ ∀∗ y ∀∗ xA(x, y).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
76
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 3.2.2 Let G be a topological group and X a G-space. For A ⊆ X and nonempty open set V ⊆ G, the Vaught transforms are the sets A V = {x ∈ X : ∃∗ g ∈ V g · x ∈ A}, A∗V = {x ∈ X : ∀∗ g ∈ V g · x ∈ A}. The following proposition is a basic algebraic property of the Vaught transforms. Proposition 3.2.3 Let G be a topological group and X a G-space. Then for any A ⊆ X, both A G and A∗G are G-invariant subsets of X. Conversely, if G is a Baire group and A ⊆ X is G-invariant then A = A G = A∗G . Proof. To see that A G is G-invariant, let x ∈ A G and g ∈ G. The set {h ∈ G : h · x ∈ A} is nonmeager in G. Note, however, that {h ∈ G : h·(g·x) ∈ A} = {h ∈ G : h·x ∈ A}g −1 . It follows that {h ∈ G : h·(g·x) ∈ A} is nonmeager in G. Hence g · x ∈ A G . A similar argument shows that A∗G is invariant as well. The converse is easy. The following theorem of Effros is fundamental for the study of orbits in a Polish G-space. Theorem 3.2.4 (Effros) Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then the following are equivalent for each x ∈ X: (i) The canonical map from G/Gx onto G · x is a homeomorphism; (ii) G · x is nonmeager in its relative topology; (iii) G · x is Gδ in X. Proof. The directions (i)⇒(iii)⇒(ii) are obvious. It suffices to show (ii)⇒(i). For this we fix x ∈ X and assume G · x is nonmeager in its relative topology. Let ϕ : G · x → G/Gx be the inverse of the canonical map, that is, ϕ(g · x) = gGx . Then ϕ is Borel. This is because, given any open set U in G/Gx , since ϕ−1 is continuous and injective, ϕ−1 (U ) is Borel by the Luzin– Suslin Theorem 1.3.1. Thus there is a dense Gδ subset C of G · x such that ϕ C is continuous (see Exercise 2.3.2). It follows that for every h ∈ G, the set h−1 · C is also dense Gδ , hence comeager in G · x. This means that ∀h ∈ G ∀∗ y ∈ G · x (h · y ∈ C). By the Kuratowski–Ulam Theorem 3.2.1, it follows that ∀∗ y ∈ G · x ∀∗ h (h · y ∈ C) or ∀∗ y ∈ G · x (y ∈ C ∗G ). Since C ∗G is G-invariant, we must have that G · x ⊆ C ∗G . Now we are ready to deduce that ϕ is continuous. For this let (gn ), g∞ ∈ G be such that
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
77
gn · x → g∞ · x as n → ∞. For each n ∈ ω let Dn = {h ∈ G : h · (gn · x) ∈ C}. Also let D∞ = {h ∈ G : h · (g∞ · x) ∈ C}. Since every Dn is comeager, their intersection is comeager. Therefore there is h ∈ n Dn ∩ D∞ . Thus h · (gn · x) = (hgn ) · x ∈ C and h · (g∞ · x) = (hg∞ ) · x ∈ C. By the continuity of the action we have that (hgn ) · x → (hg∞ ) · x as n → ∞. Thus by the continuity of ϕ on C we have that hgn Gx → hg∞ Gx , which implies that gn Gx → g∞ Gx . This shows that ϕ is continuous. In the next proposition we list some other basic properties of the Vaught transforms. Proposition 3.2.5 Let G be a Polish group and X a G-space. Then the following hold: (i) (Monotonicity) For A ⊆ B ⊆ X and nonempty open V ⊆ U ⊆ G, A∗V ⊆ A V ; A V ⊆ A U ; A∗U ⊆ A∗V ; A V ⊆ B V ; A∗V ⊆ B ∗V . (ii) (De Morgan’s laws) For A ⊆ X and nonempty open V ⊆ G, X − A V = (X − A)∗V ; X − A∗V = (X − A) V .
(iii) (Countable union rule) For A = n∈ω An , where An ⊆ X, and V = m∈ω Vm , where Vm ⊆ G nonempty open, m A V = A Vm = A V . A V = n n n∈ω
m∈ω
n m
(iv) (Countable intersection rule) For A = n∈ω An , where An ⊆ X, and V = m∈ω Vm , where Vm ⊆ G nonempty open, m A∗V A∗Vm = A∗V . A∗V = n n = n∈ω
m∈ω
n m
(v) (G-invariance) For A ⊆ X, nonempty open V ⊆ G and g ∈ G, g · A V = A (V g
−1
)
; g · A∗V = A∗(V g
−1
)
.
The proof of this proposition is straightforward and is left as an exercise (Exercise 3.2.1). In the context of Polish transformation groups the two Vaught transforms can characterize each other. Proposition 3.2.6 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, A ⊆ X a Borel subset, and V ⊆ G nonempty open. Then
A V = {A∗U : U ⊆ V nonempty open}, A∗V =
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
{A U : U ⊆ V nonempty open}.
78
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof. We only show the first equality. The second follows from the De Morgan’s laws. Let x ∈ A V and consider the set C = {g ∈ V : g · x ∈ A}. Then C is Borel in G, hence has the Baire property. Since C is nonmeager, there is nonempty open U ⊆ V such that C is comeager in U (that is, U − C is meager). Thus we have that x ∈ A∗U . The converse is obvious. The union and the intersection in this proposition can be made countable if we fix a countable base for G (see Exercise 3.2.2). This has the following immediate corollary. Theorem 3.2.7 (Vaught) Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Let A ⊆ X and V ⊆ G nonempty open. Let 1 ≤ α < ω1 . Then A V ∈ Σ0α if A ∈ Σ0α , and A∗V ∈ Π0α if A ∈ Π0α . Proof. We first check that if A is open then A V is open. For this let x ∈ A V . Since ∃∗ g ∈ V (g · x ∈ A) we can fix a g ∈ V with g · x ∈ A. By the continuity of the action there are open sets U ⊆ V and W ⊆ X such that g ∈ U , x ∈ W, and U · W ⊆ A. Then W ⊆ A V . This shows that A V is open. Using Exercise 3.2.2 and the countable union and intersection rules in Proposition 3.2.5 the required statements now can be easily shown by a transfinite induction on α. Thus Vaught transforms of Borel sets are Borel. In his seminal paper [161] in which the Vaught transforms were first introduced, Vaught also showed that the Vaught transforms of analytic sets are analytic. In the rest of this section we give a proof of this theorem. Recall from Section 1.6 that analytic sets in general Polish spaces are defined as the Suslin sets. To study the Vaught transforms on analytic sets we will consider the effect of category quantifiers on the Suslin operation. We will use the basic facts about the Suslin operation reviewed in Section 1.6, including the exercises in that section, and in particular Exercise 1.6.9. Also, we will introduce a game in the proof. This leads to another important method of descriptive set theory we will come back to several times later. However, we remark that the result itself will not be used throughout this book, so it is safe for the reader to skip the rest of this section. Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Let B = {Vn }n∈ω be a countable base for G. Let {As }s∈ω<ω be a family of closed subsets of X. Given x ∈ X, we define a two-player game G({As }, x) as follows. Players I and II take turns to play natural numbers as indicated below:
II
···
n1
I n0 (m0 , p0 )
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
(m1 , p1 )
···
nk ···
(mk , pk )
···
Polish Group Actions
79
The rules of the play are: Vmk ⊆ Vnk and Vnk+1 ⊆ Vmk . The first player who breaks the rules loses. When an infinite play is finished, Player II wins the ∗Vmk play if x ∈ A(p0 ,··· ,pk ) for all k ∈ ω. Theorem 3.2.8 Let A be the set obtained from {As } by the Suslin operation. Then x ∈ A∗G iff Player II has a winning strategy in the game G({As }, x). Proof. Let W be the set of all x ∈ X such that Player II has a winning α strategy in G({As }, x). Let Dα (α < ω1 ) be the sets defined in Exer As , Bα , cise 1.6.9. Note that A = α Bα = α (Bα − Dα ). We show that Bα∗G = (Bα − Dα )∗G = W. A∗G = α
α
We first show that A∗G ⊆ W . For this let x ∈ A∗G . Then Azn ). ∀∗ g ∈ G (g · x ∈
z∈ω ω n∈ω
For each s ∈ ω let Es = z n As zn . Then A = E∅ and for each s ∈ ω <ω we have Es = p∈ω Es p . We describe a winning strategy for Player II. Let Player I play n0 in his first move.
Since there are comeager many g ∈ Vn0 such that g · x ∈ A = E∅ = p E(p) , there is p0 ∈ ω such that there are nonmeager many g ∈ Vn0 such that g · x ∈ E(p0 ) . It follows that there is a basic open Vm0 ⊆ Vn0 such that there are comeager many g ∈ Vm0 such that g · x ∈ E(p0 ) . This finishes our description of the winning strategy for the first round of the play. It is apparent that the strategy can be repeated in general. We verify that it is winning for Player II. For this just note that Es ⊆ As for any s ∈ ω <ω . Thus if mk , pk are played in the k-th round then we have that ∀∗ g ∈ Vmk (g · x ∈ E(p0 ,...,pk ) ), and therefore ∀∗ g ∈ Vmk (g · x ∈ A(p0 ,...,pk ) ), as required. Next we show that W ⊆ α Bα∗G . Given Vn0 ⊇ Vm0 ⊇ · · · ⊇ Vnk ⊇ Vmk and s = (p0 , . . . , pk ), we let Ws (n0 , m0 , . . . , nk , mk ) be the set of all x ∈ X such that in the game G({As }, x) if n0 , (m0 , p0 ), . . . , nk , (mk , pk ) have been played in the first k rounds then Player II still has a winning strategy in the remaining game. We show that for any α < ω1 , <ω
∗Vmk Ws (n0 , m0 , . . . , nk , mk ) ⊆ (Aα . s)
This includes the case lh(s) = 0. We proceed by induction on α < ω1 . The case α = 0 is immediate. If λ is a limit, Aλs = α<λ Aα . Since this is a s λ ∗Vmk α ∗Vmk countable intersection, we have that (As ) = α<λ (As ) . For the successor case, note that ∗Vmk α+1 ∗Vmk α ∗Vmk α (As ) = (As ) ∩ As p . p
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
80
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
But by the inductive hypothesis ∗Vmk α A = p s p
∗Vmk+1 (Aα s p )
Vnk+1 ⊆Vmk Vmk+1 ⊆Vnk+1 p
⊇
Ws p (n0 , m0 , . . . , nk+1 , mk+1 )
Vnk+1 ⊆Vmk Vmk+1 ⊆Vnk+1 p
= Ws (n0 , m0 , . . . , nk , mk ). Hence by the inductive hypothesis again Ws (n0 , m0 , . . . , nk , mk ) ⊆ (Aα+1 )∗Vmk . s This finishes the induction, and for lh(s) = 0 we obtain W ⊆ Bα∗G for all α < ω1 .
Finally we show that α Bα∗G ⊆ α (Bα − Dα )∗G ⊆ A∗G . For this let x ∈ α Bα∗G . Then for all α < ω1 , ∀∗ g ∈ G (g ·x ∈ Bα ). We claim that there is β < ω1 such that ∀∗ g ∈ G (g ·x ∈ Dα ), and thus x ∈ α (Bα −Dα )∗G . Assume that for every α < ω1 there are nonmeager many g ∈ G with g · x ∈ Dα . Since {Dα }α<ω1 is a pairwise disjoint collection of Borel sets, the collection of sets {g ∈ G : g · x ∈ Dα } is thus an uncountable collection of pairwise disjoint nonmeager Borel subsets of G. This contradicts the second countability of G.
Now the last inclusion follows immediately from the equality α (Bα − Dα ) = A. Theorem 3.2.9 (Vaught) Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. For any open V ⊆ G and analytic A ⊆ X, both A V and A∗V are analytic. Proof. Fix a sequence {As } of closed sets so that A is obtained from {As } by the Suslin operation. Let B = {Vn }n∈ω be a countable base for G. To deal with A∗V consider an enhanced game of G({As }, x) in which Player I must play his first move n0 so that Vn0 ⊆ V . Then the same proof of the preceding theorem gives that x ∈ A∗V iff Player II has a winning strategy in this enhanced game. Since a winning strategy in this game of natural numbers is essentially an element of ω ω , it follows from a straightforward computation that having a winning strategy in this game is an analytic condition. Thus A∗V is analytic. Now A V = Vn ⊆V A∗Vn . Since analytic sets are closed under countable unions, A V is also analytic.
Exercise 3.2.1 Prove Proposition 3.2.5.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
81
Exercise 3.2.2 Let G be a Polish group and {Un } be a countable base for G. Let X be a Polish G-space and A ⊆ X a Borel subset. Show that for any nonempty open set V ⊆ G, A V = {A∗Un : Un ⊆ V } and A∗V = {A Un : Un ⊆ V }. Exercise 3.2.3 Let G be a Polish group and X be a Polish G-space. For nonempty open U ⊆ G let GU = {g ∈ G : U g = U }. Show that GU is a closed subgroup of G and that for any set A ⊆ X, A∗U is invariant under the induced action of GU . Exercise 3.2.4 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, and A ⊆ X an invariant meager set. Show that A is included in a countable union of closed, nowhere dense sets, each of which is GU -invariant (see above) for some nonempty open U ⊆ G. Exercise 3.2.5 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, and A ⊆ X an invariant analytic set. Show that A is the union of ω1 many invariant Borel sets. Exercise 3.2.6 Let X, Y be Polish spaces and B ⊆ X × Y Borel. Show that the sets BΔ = {x ∈ X : ∃∗ y ∈ Y (x, y) ∈ B}, B∗ = {x ∈ X : ∀∗ y ∈ Y (x, y) ∈ B} are both Borel.
3.3
Borel G-spaces
Definition 3.3.1 Let G be a Polish group, X a standard Borel space, and a : G × X → X an action of G on X. If a is a Borel function then we say that X is a (standard) Borel G-space. Theorem 3.3.2 (Miller) Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then for any x ∈ X, Gx is closed and G · x is Borel. Proof. Fix x ∈ X and consider H = Gx . H is a closed subgroup of G and the action of G on X restricted to H is Borel. Thus without loss of generality we may assume H = G and therefore Gx is dense in G. Note that Gx is
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
82
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Borel, and therefore has the Baire property. It thus suffices to show that Gx is nonmeager, since then it is clopen by Exercise 2.3.3. We fix a Polish topology on X and let {Un } be a countable base. Let An = {g ∈ G : g · x ∈ Un }. Again each An is Borel, and therefore has the Baire property. We claim that each An is either meager or comeager. Toward a contradiction, assume some An is neither meager nor comeager. By Exercise 2.3.1 there are nonempty open sets V1 and V2 in G such that An is comeager in V1 and meager in V2 . Since Gx is dense there is h ∈ Gx ∩ V1−1 V2 , and then V1 h ∩ V2 = ∅. However, note that An h = An , and therefore An is comeager in V1 h as well as in V1 h ∩ V2 . This means that An is nonmeager in V2 , a contradiction. Now note that for any g ∈ G we have that gGx = {An : g ∈ An }. Thus if Gx is meager then for every g ∈ G there is some n with g ∈ An and An meager. This implies that G = {An : An meager}, and thus G is meager, a contradiction. This finishes the proof of the first part. Now we have shown that Gx is closed, it follows that G/Gx is Polish. We note that the canonical map from G/Gx onto G · x is a Borel injection. To see this, note that the Borel structure generated by the quotient topology on G/Gx is exactly the Effros Borel structure (Exercise 2.3.6). By the Borel selection Theorem 1.4.6 there is a Borel function s : G/Gx → G such that s(gGx ) ∈ gGx for any g ∈ G. By the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1 the range of s, T = s(G/Gx ), is a Borel subset of G. Furthermore the natural map e : g → g · x from T into G · x is injective and Borel since the action is Borel. Hence the canonical map from G/Gx into G·x, being e◦s, is a Borel injection. Thus G · x is Borel again by the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1. The first part of the proof uses a category argument which is a special case of a more general principle called the first topological 0-1 law (see Exercise 3.3.2). The Vaught transforms continue to make sense for Borel G-spaces. In addition, the basic algebraic properties Propositions 3.2.3 and 3.2.5 continue to hold for Borel G-spaces. Next we show that Vaught transforms preserve Borel sets even in Borel G-spaces. Theorem 3.3.3 Let G be a Polish group and X be a Borel G-space. Let A ⊆ X be Borel and V ⊆ G be nonempty open. Then both A V and A∗V are Borel. Proof. Since the action is Borel for a Borel set A the set {(g, x) : g · x ∈ A} is a Borel subset of G × X. Thus to prove the theorem it suffices to show that for any Borel B ⊆ G × X and nonempty open V ⊆ G, the sets B V = {x ∈ X : ∃∗ g ∈ V (g, x) ∈ B} and B∗V = {x ∈ X : ∀∗ g ∈ V (g, x) ∈ B} are both Borel. Since B∗V = X − (X − B) V , we only need to show the Borelness of B V . For this consider the collection of sets B ⊆ G × X with the property that for any nonempty open V ⊆ G B V is Borel. We show
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
83
that the collection contains all sets of the form U × A for A ⊆ X Borel and U ⊆ G open, and is closed under complement and countable union. Consider first B = U × A. Then B V = A if U ∩ V = ∅ and B V = ∅ if U ∩ V = ∅. In either case B V is Borel. Next fix a countable base {Un } for G. Note that for any B ⊆ G × X, (X − B) V = X − B∗V =X−
{B Un : Un ⊆ V } =
{X − B Un : Un ⊆ V }.
Thus the collection is closed under complement. Finally let B = m Bm .
Then B V = m (Bm ) V . Thus the collection is closed under countable union, and we are done. Let F (G) be the Effros Borel space with the right action of G: g · F = F g −1 . Then F (G) becomes a Borel G-space. Let F (G)ω be the product of infinitely many copies of F (G). Then with the coordinatewise right action F (G)ω is still a Borel G-space. The following theorem shows that it is a universal Borel G-space. Theorem 3.3.4 (Becker–Kechris) Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then there is a Borel G-embedding from X into F (G)ω . Proof. Fix a Polish topology on X and let {An } be a countable base for X in this topology. Let {Vm } be a countable base for G. Define a map θ : X → F (G)ω by m θ(x)(n) = {h ∈ G : ∀m (h ∈ Vm ⇒ x ∈ A V ) }. n
It is easy to see that the set defined is closed in G. We check that θ is a Borel G-embedding. To see that θ(g · x) = g · θ(x), we fix n ∈ ω and note that m h ∈ θ(g · x)(n) ⇐⇒ ∀m (h ∈ Vm ⇒ g · x ∈ A V ) n mg ⇐⇒ ∀m (h ∈ Vm ⇒ x ∈ A V ) n mg ⇐⇒ ∀m (hg ∈ Vm g ⇒ x ∈ A V ) n
⇐⇒ hg ∈ θ(x)(n) ⇐⇒ h ∈ θ(x)(n)g −1 = (g · θ(x))(n)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
84
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
To see that θ is Borel, note that for any nonempty open V ⊆ G, θ(x)(n) ∩ V = ∅ ⇐⇒ x ∈ A V n , is Borel by Theorem 3.3.3. Finally to see that θ is injective, we and A V n m assume θ(x) = θ(y). Then it follows that for every n and m, x ∈ A V iff n m y ∈ A V . Thus for comeager many g ∈ G, g · x ∈ A ⇐⇒ g · y ∈ A . In n n n particular, there is some g ∈ G with g · x ∈ An ⇐⇒ g · y ∈ An . Since {An } is a base we get that g · x = g · y, and therefore x = y. The space F (G) also admits a left action of G: g·F = gF . Under this action F (G) is also a Borel G-space. It is obvious that there is a Borel isomorphic G-map (Borel G-isomorphism) between the two spaces with the left and the right actions, namely F → F −1 . And thus we may regard the two G-spaces as the same. It is also worthwhile to state the following version of the Cantor–Bernstein theorem for Borel G-embeddings, although its proof is classical and is left as an exercise (Exercise 3.3.3). Theorem 3.3.5 Let G be a Polish group and X, Y be Borel G-spaces. Suppose there is a Borel G-embedding from X into Y and also a Borel G-embedding from Y into X. Then there is a Borel G-isomorphism between X and Y . Exercise 3.3.1 Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. For any x, y ∈ X define Gx,y = {g ∈ G : g · x = y}. Show that Gx,y is closed for any x, y ∈ X. Exercise 3.3.2 Let X be a Baire space and G a group of homeomorphisms on X. Suppose for any nonempty open sets U, V in X there is a g ∈ G with g · U ∩ V = ∅. Let A ⊆ X be a G-invariant subset of X with the Baire property. Show that A is either meager or comeager. Exercise 3.3.3 Prove Theorem 3.3.5. Exercise 3.3.4 Let G be a countable group. Let (2ω )G be the Polish Gspace with the (left or right) shift action. Show that for any Borel G-space X there is a Borel G-embedding from X into (2ω )G . Moreover, if X is a Polish G-space then the Borel G-embedding can be a function of Baire class 1. Furthermore, if X is a 0-dimensional Polish G-space then the G-embedding can be continuous. Exercise 3.3.5 Let G be a Polish group with a compatible complete leftinvariant metric d. Let L(G, d) denote the Polish G-space of all Lipschitz functions from G into R (see Exercise 3.1.8). Define ϕ : F (G) → L(G, d) by ϕ(F )(x) = d(x, F ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
85
Show that ϕ is a Borel G-embedding from F (G) into L(G, d). Deduce that L(G, d)ω is a universal Borel G-space. Exercise 3.3.6 Let G be a Polish group and d a compatible left-invariant metric on G. (a) Let (G, d) denote the d-completion of G, with the extended metric still denoted by d. Consider the action of G on G defined by g · {hn } = {ghn }. Show that under this action G becomes a Polish G-space. (b) Let L(G, d) denote the Polish space of all Lipschitz functions from G to R. Consider the action of G on L(G, d) defined by (g · f )(x) = f (g −1 · x). Show that under this action L(G, d) becomes a Polish G-space. (c) Define ϕ : F (G) → L(G, d) by ϕ(F )(x) = d(x, F ), where F is the closure of F in G. Show that ϕ is a Borel G-embedding. Deduce that L(G, d)ω is a universal Borel G-space.
3.4
Orbit equivalence relations
Equivalence relations are the main objects studied in invariant descriptive set theory. In this section we review some generalities about equivalence relations and prove some basic results about orbit equivalence relations induced by actions of Polish groups. Definition 3.4.1 For an arbitrary equivalence relation E on a set X, we let [x]E denote the (E−)equivalence class of x ∈ X, that is, [x]E = {y ∈ X : xEy}. More generally, if A ⊆ X we denote by [A]E the (E−)saturation of A, that is, [A]E = {y ∈ X : ∃x ∈ A (xEy) }. We call A (E−)invariant if [A]E = A. A is called a complete section or full if [A]E = X. We denote by X/E the quotient space of E, that is, the set of all E-equivalence classes {[x]E : x ∈ X}.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
86
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 3.4.2 Let G be a group and X be a G-space. Then the orbit equivalence relation, X (or simply EG ), is given by denoted EG X y ⇐⇒ ∃g ∈ G (g · x = y). xEG
For an orbit equivalence relation EG , the quotient space X/E is also denoted X/G. Definition 3.4.3 Let E be an equivalence relation on a set X. A transversal for E is a set T ⊆ X meeting each E-equivalence class at exactly one point, that is, |T ∩ [x]E | = 1 for all x ∈ X. A selector for E is a map s : X → X such that s(x)Ex and s(x) = s(y) for all xEy. An equivalence relation E on X is a subset of X × X. When X is Polish or standard Borel, the descriptive complexity of the equivalence relation E is closely related to the descriptive complexity of its orbits and to the topological properties of the quotient space. First we note that if G is a Polish group and X is Σ11 . However, not X a Borel G-space, then the orbit equivalence relation EG all Σ11 equivalence relations on a standard Borel space are orbit equivalence X relations. This is because, by Theorem 3.3.2, every orbit of an EG is Borel. On the other hand, if E is a Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X, then every E-equivalence class is Borel. We will see that the converse is not true in general. The following theorem is one of a few positive results connecting the complexity of an orbit equivalence relation and that of the orbits. Theorem 3.4.4 (Effros) Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then the following are equivalent: (i) EG is Gδ . (ii) Each orbit G · x is Gδ . (iii) X/G is T0 , that is, for any p, q ∈ X/G with p = q, {p} = {q}. Proof. The implication (i)⇒(ii) is obvious. We show that (ii)⇒(iii)⇒(i). Let π : X → X/G be the quotient map. We first note that π is open. This is because for any open U ⊆ X, π −1 (π(U )) = [U ]G = g∈G g · U is open since each g · U is open. Since X is second countable, it follows that X/G is also second countable. Also note that for any p ∈ X/G, π −1 (p) = π −1 {p} .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions 87 The inclusion π −1 (p) ⊆ π −1 {p} follows from continuity of π. For the other inclusion, note that F = π −1 (p) is G-invariant by the continuity of the action,
and thus π(F ) is closed. As p ∈ π(F ), π −1 {p} ⊆ π −1 (π(F )) = F .
Now for the proof of the direction (ii)⇒(iii), suppose each orbit is Gδ . Assume p, q ∈ X/G with p = q but {p} = {q}. Thus π −1 (p) = π −1 {p} = π −1 {q} = π −1 (q) = C. Now both π −1 (p) and π −1 (q) are Gδ orbits which are dense in C, hence they are both comeager in C and therefore π −1 (p) ∩ π −1 (q) = ∅. But this contradicts the assumption that p = q. For the implication (iii)⇒(i), we fix a countable base {Un } for the quotient space X/G. Then {π −1 (Un )} is a countable family of open sets separating the orbits, that is, xEG y ⇐⇒ ∀n ( x ∈ π −1 (Un ) ↔ y ∈ π −1 (Un ) ). This demonstrates that EG is Gδ . It is straightforward to see that X/E is T1 iff every E-equivalence class is closed. The following proposition characterizes when X/G is Hausdorff. The proof is left as an exercise (Exercise 3.4.1). Proposition 3.4.5 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then X/G is Hausdorff iff EG is closed. In the next proposition some condition between T1 and Hausdorffness is considered. It gives a sufficient condition for the existence of Borel selectors. Note that if s : X → X is a Borel selector for E then {x : s(x) = x} is a Borel transversal for E. Conversely, if T is a Borel transversal for E then the function defined by s(x) = y ⇐⇒ y ∈ T and xEy is a selector for E, and s is Borel if E is Borel. Proposition 3.4.6 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X. If every Eequivalence class is closed and, for any open A ⊆ X, the saturation of A is Borel, then there is a Borel selector for E. In particular, if G is a Polish group, X is a Polish G-space and every orbit is closed, then there is a Borel selector for EG .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
88
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof. Let π : X → X/E be the quotient map. Then X/E is a subset of the Effros Borel space F (X), and as a map from X into F (X), π is Borel. This is because, for any x ∈ X and open set U ⊆ X, [x]E ∩ U = ∅ ⇐⇒ x ∈ [U ]E . Now by Theorem 1.4.6 there is a Borel function σ : F (X) → X with σ(F ) ∈ F for every nonempty closed F ⊆ X. Let s = σ ◦ π. Then s is a Borel selector for E. In case of a continuous G-action, the saturation of any open set is open, and thus the conclusion holds. Finally the following proposition gives a sufficient condition for X/G to be Polish. Proposition 3.4.7 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Suppose for any closed subset A ⊆ X, the saturation of A is closed. Then X/G is Polish. Proof. The assumption implies that the quotient map is closed. Thus it is closed, open, continuous, and onto. Since a closed continuous image of a normal space is normal, we conclude that X/G is normal. Since a continuous open image of a second countable space is second countable, we conclude that X/G is second countable. Now it follows from the Urysohn metrization theorem that X/G is metrizable. Thus by Theorem 2.2.9 X/G is Polish. We will see that there are orbit equivalence relations which are non-Borel. In general, it is of great interest to decide if a particular orbit equivalence relation is Borel. We will give some characterizations in Section 8.2. The following proposition gives a sufficient condition. Proposition 3.4.8 Let G be a Polish group and X a standard Borel space. If the action of G on X is free, then EG is Borel. Proof.
This follows from the Luzin–Suslin Theorem 1.3.1. To see this, let A = {(g, x, y) : g · x = y}.
Then A is a Borel subset of G × X × X, and hence is a standard Borel space. Let π : A → X × X be the projection map π(g, x, y) = (x, y). Then π is injective since the action is free. Since π(A) = EG , it follows that EG is Borel. Exercise 3.4.1 Prove Proposition 3.4.5.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
89
Exercise 3.4.2 Let G be a compact Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Show that EG is closed. Exercise 3.4.3 Let (X, d) be a Polish metric space and G a compact subgroup of Iso(X). Show that X/G is Polish. Exercise 3.4.4 Let G be a compact Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Show that EG is Borel. Exercise 3.4.5 Let G be a locally compact Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Show that EG is Fσ . Exercise 3.4.6 Let G be a locally compact Polish group and X a Borel Gspace. Show that EG is Borel. Exercise 3.4.7 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Show that X if EG is Borel then there is α < ω1 such that all orbits are Π0α .
3.5
Extensions of Polish group actions
In Section 3.3 we saw that every Polish group G admits a universal Borel G-space. In this section we consider extensions of Borel (or Polish) G-spaces to H-spaces when H involves G. First note that if G is a quotient of H then any G-space is trivially an H-space, and thus any Borel (or Polish) G-space is also a Borel (respectively Polish) H-space. Next we deal with the case G is a closed subgroup of H. Theorem 3.5.1 (Hjorth) Let H be a Polish group, G a closed subgroup, and X a Polish G-space. Consider the continuous action of G on X × H by g · (x, h) = (g · x, gh). Then (X × H)/G is Polish. Proof. Let π be the quotient map from X × H onto (X × H)/G. Then π is continuous and open. Since X × H is second countable, so is (X × H)/G. Let EG be the orbit equivalence relation on X × H. Then note that EG is closed, since (x, h)EG (y, k) ⇐⇒ kh−1 ∈ G and kh−1 · x = y.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
90
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Thus (X × H)/G is Hausdorff by Proposition 3.4.5. By Sierpinski’s Theorem 2.2.9 it suffices to show that (X × H)/G is metrizable, and by the Urysohn metrization theorem it suffices to show that (X × H)/G is regular. The regularity of (X × H)/G is equivalent to the following property of the space X × H: Let F ⊆ X × H be an invariant closed set and (x, h) ∈ F . There are open sets U ⊆ X and N ⊆ H with x ∈ U and 1H ∈ N such that for any (y, k) ∈ F there is an open set W ⊆ X × H with (y, k) ∈ W so that G · (U × hN ) ∩ W = ∅. For this fix such F and (x, h). First let U0 ⊆ X and N0 ⊆ H be open sets with x ∈ U0 , 1H ∈ N0 , and (U0 × N0 h) ∩ F = ∅. Let N1 ⊆ N0 be open with N1−1 = N1 and U ⊆ U0 be open with x ∈ U such that N12 · U ⊆ U0 . Let N ⊆ N1 be open with N −1 = N and hN 2 h−1 ⊆ N1 . We verify that U and N are as required. For this let (y, k) ∈ F . Consider two cases. Case 1: Gk ∩ N1 h = ∅. In this case let W = X × kN . Then W is open and (y, k) ∈ W . Assume W ∩ G · (U × hN ) = ∅. Then kN ∩ GhN = ∅. This implies that Gk ∩ hN 2 = ∅. But hN 2 ⊆ N1 h, contradicting our case assumption. Case 2: Gk ∩ N1 h = ∅. Let g0 ∈ G be such that g0 k ∈ N1 h. Note that g0 · (y, k) ∈ U0 × N0 h but g0 k ∈ N1 h ⊆ N0 h. It follows that g0 · y ∈ U0 , and thus g0 · y ∈ N12 · U . Let V ⊆ X be open such that g0 · y ∈ V and V ∩ N12 · U = ∅. Let W = g0−1 · (V × N1 h). Then W is open and (y, k) ∈ W . Assume W ∩ G · (U × hN ) = ∅. Then (V ×N1 h)∩G·(U ×hN ) = ∅. Let g ∈ G be such that (V ×N1 h)∩g·(U ×hN ) = ∅. Then g ∈ N12 since V ∩ g · U = ∅. However, N1 h ∩ ghN = ∅. And thus g ∈ N1 hN −1 h−1 ⊆ N12 , a contradiction. Theorem 3.5.2 (Mackey–Hjorth) Let H be a Polish group and G a closed subgroup of H. Let X be a Polish G-space with action a. Then there is a Polish H-space Y with action b such that: (i) X is a closed subset of Y ; (ii) a(g, x) = b(g, x) for all g ∈ G and x ∈ X; (iii) Every H-orbit in Y contains exactly one G-orbit in X.
Proof. Let Y = (X × H)/G be as in the preceding theorem. Let π be the quotient map from X × H onto Y . For (x, h) ∈ X × H, denote π(x, h) = [(x, h)]G by [x, h] for simplicity. Define j : X → Y by j(x) = [x, e]. Then it is easy to see that j is a continuous embedding. We claim that j is in fact a homeomorphic embedding and that j(X) is closed in Y . In fact (x, h) ∈ π −1 (j(X)) iff h ∈ G. Thus π −1 (j(X)) is closed and therefore so is j(X). To
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
91
see that j is open onto j(X), let U ⊆ X be open. Then (x, g) ∈ π −1 (j(U )) iff g −1 · x ∈ U . Thus there are open sets N ⊆ G and V ⊆ X with g −1 ∈ N , x ∈ V , and N · V ⊆ U , and thus V × N −1 ⊆ π −1 (j(U )). This shows that π −1 (j(U )) is open in X × H, and so is j(U ) in j(X). Therefore we have essentially verified (i). Let H act on Y by k · [x, h] = [x, hk −1 ]. To verify (ii) let g ∈ G and x ∈ X. It suffices to note that [g · x, e] = [x, g −1 ]. To verify (iii) note that the H-orbit of [x, h] contains the unique G-orbit of [x, e]. It remains to check that the H-action on Y is continuous. For this we check that it is separately continuous. First fix [x, h] ∈ Y and let W ⊆ Y be open. Then k · [x, h] ∈ W iff (x, hk −1 ) ∈ π −1 (W ), and thus there is an open N ⊆ G with k ∈ N such that N · [x, h] ⊆ W . Next fix k ∈ H and let W ⊆ Y be open. Then (x, h) ∈ π −1 (k −1 · W ) iff (x, hk −1 ) ∈ π −1 (W ), and thus there are open sets U ⊆ X and N ⊆ G with x ∈ U , h ∈ N , and U × N k −1 ⊆ π −1 (W ). This shows that k −1 · W is open. Theorem 3.5.3 (Mackey) Let H be a Polish group and G a closed subgroup of H. Let X be a Borel G-space with action a. Then there is a Borel H-space Y with action b such that: (i) X is a Borel subset of Y ; (ii) a(g, x) = b(g, x) for all g ∈ G and x ∈ X; (iii) Every H-orbit in Y contains exactly one G-orbit in X. Proof. Define the action of G on X × H, the space Y , and the action of H on Y the same as in the preceding theorem. We first verify that Y with the quotient Borel structure is standard Borel. For this let T be a Borel transversal of the right G-cosets in H. Then the quotient map π restricted on X × T is a Borel isomorphism onto Y . Since X × T is standard Borel, so is Y . The injection j : X → Y is now a Borel embedding, and therefore j(X) is a Borel subset of Y . This essentially verified (i). Clauses (ii) and (iii) are algebraic properties with the same proof as in the preceding theorem. Finally it follows from also the same proof that the action of H on Y is Borel. As immediate corollaries in both Theorems 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 we may assume G ≤w H. X Y Exercise 3.5.1 Let EG and EH denote the orbit equivalence relations in Y X Theorems 3.5.2 and 3.5.3. Show that EH is Borel iff EG is Borel.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
92
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 3.5.2 Let actions a and b be given by Theorems 3.5.2 and 3.5.3. Show that if a is a free action then so is b.
3.6
The logic actions
Recall from Section 2.4 that the infinite permutation group S∞ and its closed subgroups can be viewed as automorphism groups of countable models. In this section we relate general actions of S∞ and its closed subgroups to certain special actions on classes of countable models. These special actions are called logic actions. Let L be a countable relational language, that is, L = {Ri }i∈I , where I is a countable set of indices and each Ri is an ni -ary relation symbol. Let Mod(L) denote the space of all countable L-models with the underlying universe ω. Each element of Mod(L) can be viewed as an element of the product space XL =
ni
2ω .
i∈I
Thus Mod(L) becomes a compact Polish space (that is homeomorphic to the Cantor space) with the product topology on XL . More formally for each x ∈ XL let Mx ∈ Mod(L) be the countable model coded by x. Then for any i ∈ I and (k1 , . . . , kni ) ∈ ω ni , RiMx (k1 , . . . , kni ) ⇐⇒ xi (k1 , . . . , kni ) = 1. With this correspondence Mod(L) and XL can be used interchangeably. The logic action of S∞ on Mod(L) is defined by letting g · M = N iff RiN (k1 , . . . , kni ) ⇐⇒ RiM (g −1 (k1 ), . . . , g −1 (kni )) for all i ∈ I and (k1 , . . . , kni ) ∈ ω ni . Thus g · M = N iff g is an isomorphism from M onto N . This is clearly a continuous action, and the orbit equivalence relation is exactly the isomorphism relation on Mod(L), which we denote by ∼ =L . The following theorem shows that Mod(L) is a universal Borel S∞ -space if L is sufficiently rich. Theorem 3.6.1 Let L = {Ri }i∈I be a countable relational language with each Ri an ni -ary relation symbol. If {ni : i ∈ I} is unbounded in ω, then the Polish S∞ -space Mod(L) is a universal Borel S∞ -space, that is, for any Borel S∞ -space X there is a Borel S∞ -embedding from X into Mod(L).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
93
Proof. By Theorem 3.3.4 F (S∞ )ω is a universal Borel S∞ -space. It suffices to construct a Borel S∞ -embedding from F (S∞ )ω into Mod(L). This is done in several steps. First consider the action of S∞ on ω ω by g · x = g ◦ x. This action is continuous. Moreover, it extends to an action of S∞ on F (ω ω ): g · F = {g · x : x ∈ F }. It is easy to see that this action is Borel. Now let S∞ act on F (ω ω )ω coordinatewise. Then F (ω ω )ω is a Borel S∞ -space. We claim that there is a Borel S∞ -embedding from F (S∞ ) into F (ω ω ). This will in an obvious way give a Borel S∞ -embedding of F (S∞ )ω into F (ω ω )ω . In fact the desired embedding from F (S∞ ) into F (ω ω ) is just F → F , where F denotes the closure of F in ω ω . It is injective since F ∩ S∞ = F . It is easy to verify that this is indeed a Borel S∞ -map. Next we consider a language L0 with infinitely many relation symbols of each arity. Thus L0 = {Rm,l }(m,l)∈ω2 , where each Rm,l is an l-ary relation symbol. We claim that there is a Borel S∞ -embedding from F (ω ω )ω into Mod(L0 ). To see this note that each nonempty closed set F ∈ F (ω ω ) is correspondent to a unique pruned tree TF ⊆ ω <ω so that [TF ] = F . More explicitly, s ∈ TF iff there is x ∈ F with s ⊆ x. Now for F = (F0 , F1 , . . . ) ∈ F (ω ω )ω , define MF so that M
Rm,lF (k1 , . . . , kl ) ⇐⇒ (k1 , . . . , kl ) ∈ TFm . Then F → MF is the desired Borel S∞ -embedding. Finally we verify that there is a Borel S∞ -embedding from Mod(L0 ) into Mod(L). Since {ni : i ∈ I} is unbounded, we can find an injection j : ω 2 → I such that nj(m,l) ≥ l for all m, n ∈ ω. Let J ⊆ I be the range of j. Then we define M0 → M from Mod(L0 ) to Mod(L) by letting M0 M Rj(m,l) (k1 , . . . , knj(m,l) ) ⇐⇒ Rm,l (k1 , . . . , kl )
for any m, l, k1 , . . . , knj(m,l) and letting RiM always hold if i ∈ J. It is straightforward to check that this is a Borel S∞ -embedding. Next we show that the hypothesis of unbounded arity for the language L in the above theorem is necessary. For this we need to introduce a new concept. First we fix the following notation. For n ∈ ω, let Dn denote the set of all bijections s : A → B, where A and B are n-element subsets of ω. Let
D = n Dn . For s ∈ D and g ∈ S∞ , we write s ⊆ g if g is an extension of s. For s ∈ D, let Ns = {g ∈ S∞ : s ⊆ g}. Then the collection {Ns : s ∈ D} is a clopen base for S∞ . Definition 3.6.2 Let X be an S∞ -space and n ∈ ω. An element x ∈ X is called n-based if for any g ∈ S∞ , if g ∈ (S∞ )x then there is s ∈ Dn such that s ⊆ g and Ns ∩ (S∞ )x = ∅. The action of S∞ on X is n-based if every element x ∈ X is n-based.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
94
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
If L is a relational language consisting of relation symbols of arity ≤ n, then Mod(L) is n-based. If X and Y are both S∞ -spaces, Y is n-based, and there is an S∞ -embedding from X into Y , then X is also n-based. Theorem 3.6.3 (Dougherty) Let n > 0 and L be a countable relational language containing an n-ary relation symbol. Then there is M ∈ Mod(L) which is not (n − 1)-based. Proof. Let R be an n-ary relation symbol in L. Without loss of generality we assume L = {R}. Let I be the set of all n-tuples (a1 , . . . , an ) so that ai = aj for i = j. We will construct M = (ω, RM ) so that RM = ∅, RM = I, and for any s ∈ Dn−1 there is g ∈ Ns ∩ Aut(M ). These imply that M is not (n − 1)-based. For any t ∈ D, we let At be the set {S ⊆ I : ∀(a1 , . . . , an ) ∈ dom(t)n S(a1 , . . . , an ) ⇐⇒ S(t(a1 ), . . . , t(an ))}. Intuitively, At is the collection of all n-ary relations S so that t is a partial automorphism of the model (ω, S). Thus if t ∈ Dm for m < n, then At = P(I). If g is an automorphism for (ω, S), then S ∈ t⊆g At . Conversely, if S ∈ t ⊆ gAt then g is an automorphism for (ω, S). For t ∈ Dm and k ∈ ω, we also let + Et,k = {S ⊆ I : S ∈ At ⇒ ∃u ⊇ t (u ∈ Dm+1 ∧ k ∈ dom(u) ∧ S ∈ Au )},
and − = {S ⊆ I : S ∈ At ⇒ ∃u ⊇ t (u ∈ Dm+1 ∧ k ∈ range(u) ∧ S ∈ Au )}. Et,k + − Now the sets At , Et,k , and Et,k can all be viewed as subsets of 2I , and as such + − they are in fact open subsets. We claim that both Et,k and Et,k are dense in I 2 . + − , since the argument for Et,k is similar. We only verify the claim for Et,k j Let i1 , . . . , il ∈ I be finitely many elements in I, with ij = (a1 , . . . , ajn ). Let A = {aj1 , . . . , ajn : 1 ≤ j ≤ l}. Let also S0 ∈ 2i1 ,...,il . We need to define S ∈ 2I + so that S0 ⊆ S and S ∈ Et,k . If there is an S ⊆ S0 so that S ∈ At then we are done. Otherwise we have that any S ⊆ S0 is an element of At . We define k0 = k if k ∈ dom(t) and k0 to be any element not in dom(t) if k ∈ dom(t). To define u it is enough to define u(k0 ). For this we let u(k0 ) to be arbitrarily chosen from ω − A. Then we can extend S0 to S1 with a finite domain so that any extension S of S1 is an element of Au . Now let S ⊇ S1 be arbitrary, and + we have obtained S ∈ Et,k . + − It follows that t,k Et,k ∩ Et,k is comeager in 2I , and thus there is S ∈ 2I so + − that S ∈ Et,k and S ∈ Et,k for all t ∈ D, k ∈ ω, and so that S = ∅ and S = I. It remains to check that for any s ∈ Dn−1 there is g ∈ Ns ∩ Aut(M ). For this we
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Polish Group Actions
95
define a sequence t0 ⊆ t1 ⊆ . . . and let g = m tm . To begin with, let t0 = s. Then since S ∈ Et+0 ,0 there is u0 ⊇ t0 such that S ∈ Au0 , and since S ∈ Eu−0 ,0 there is t1 ⊇ u0 such that S ∈ At1 . We now have that 0 ∈ dom(t1 )∩range(t1 ). In general, suppose tm is defined. Then since S ∈ Et+m ,m there is um ⊇ tm such that S ∈ Aum , and since S ∈ Eu−m ,m there is tm+1 ⊇ um such that S ∈ Atm+1 .
Since S ∈ m Atm , we have that g ∈ Aut(M ). Corollary 3.6.4 Let n > 0 and L be a countable relational language consisting of relation symbols of arity ≤ n. If L is a countable relational language containing an (n + 1)-ary relation symbol, then there is no S∞ -embedding from Mod(L ) into Mod(L). In particular, Mod(L) is not a universal Borel S∞ -space. In Part III of this book we will give a more thorough treatment of countable model theory and logic actions. Exercise 3.6.1 Show that being n-based is an invariant property. That is, if X is an S∞ -space, x ∈ X, y ∈ [x], and x is n-based, then y is n-based. Exercise 3.6.2 Show that any Borel S∞ -space X can be decomposed into disjoint Borel subsets {Xn } so that each Xn is n-based. Exercise 3.6.3 For each n > 0 let Ln be the relational language with exactly n unary relation symbols. Let also Lω be the relational language with countably many unary relation symbols. Show that for n, m ≤ ω, there is a Borel S∞ -embedding from Mod(Ln ) into Mod(Lm ) iff n ≤ m. Exercise 3.6.4 Let L be a countable relational language with only unary relation symbols. Show that ∼ =L is Borel.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 4 Finer Polish Topologies
In this chapter we introduce the very useful technique of change of topology on Polish G-spaces. With the technique and results developed in this chapter we will be able to unify the study of Polish G-spaces and Borel G-spaces. We will also encounter a technical topological concept of strong Choquet space, which will be used several times in the proofs of important theorems later on.
4.1
Strong Choquet spaces
Given a nonempty topological space X, the strong Choquet game GX is a two-player game defined as follows: I x0 , U0 II
x1 , U1 V0
······ V1
Players I and II take turns to play open sets Ui , Vi and elements xi ∈ X, i ∈ ω. The rules of the game are xi ∈ Vi ⊆ Ui and Ui+1 ⊆ Vi , for all i ∈ ω. The first player who violates these rules loses. If an infinite sequence of objects are played following the rules then Player II wins the play if n Un = n Vn = ∅. Also in the case that X is empty, we regard that Player I has no legitimate move and therefore he loses. Definition 4.1.1 A topological space X is a strong Choquet space if Player II has a winning strategy in the strong Choquet game GX . It is easy to show that any completely metrizable space or any locally compact Hausdorff space is strong Choquet (Exercises 4.1.2 and 4.1.3). It is also clear that any strong Choquet space is a Baire space (Exercise 4.1.4). We prove some closure properties for strong Choquet spaces. Theorem 4.1.2 (a) If X is strong Choquet and Y ⊆ X is Gδ , then Y is strong Choquet.
97 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
98
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(b) If f : X → Y is continuous, open, and surjective and X is strong Choquet, then Y is strong Choquet. (c) If X = i∈I Xi , then X is strong Choquet iff each Xi , i ∈ I, is strong Choquet. Proof. (a) Let X be strong Choquet and Y = n Wn ⊆ X, where each Wn is open. We need to describe a winning strategy for Player II in the game GY . For this suppose x0 , U0 , x1 , U1 , . . . are Player I’s moves in a play of the game GY . We inductively define Player II’s responses in this play. To begin with let U0 be an open set in X with U0 ∩ Y = U0 . Then in the game GX let Player I play x0 and U0∗ = U0 ∩ W0 as his first move. Let V0∗ be Player II’s response in GX according to her winning strategy. Then in the game GY we let V0 = V0∗ ∩ Y be Player II’s first response. Note that x0 ∈ V0 since x0 ∈ V0∗ ∩ Y ⊆ V0∗ ∩ W0 . In general suppose x0 , U0 , V0 , . . . , xn , Un , Vn and Un , Un∗ , Vn∗ have been defined so that Un ∩ Y = Un , Un∗ = Un ∩ Wn , and Vn = Vn∗ ∩ Y . Also suppose that in the (n + 1)-th round Player I has played xn+1 and Un+1 in the game GY . Then without loss of generality assume Un+1 ⊆ Vn . Let Un+1 be an open set in X with Un+1 ∩ Y = Un+1 . Again ⊆ Vn∗ since Un+1 ⊆ Vn . Then without loss of generality we may choose Un+1 ∗ in the game GX let Player I play the moves xn and Un+1 = Un+1 ∩Wn+1 in the ∗ (n + 1)-th round. Suppose Vn+1 is Player II’s response in the (n + 1)-th round in the game GX according to her winning strategy. Then in the game GY let ∗ Player II’s response in the (n+1)-th round be Vn+1 = Vn+1 ∩Y . It is then easy to see that the rules of the game are followed, that is, xn+1 ⊆ Vn+1 ⊆∗Un+1 . Moreover, from the play of the auxiliary game G we get that X n Un = ∅. Thus n Un = n (Un ∩ Y ) = n Un ∩ n Wn = n (Un ∩ Wn ) = n Un∗ = ∅. This shows that the strategy we just described is winning for Player II. (b) The auxiliary game is again GX . If y0 , U0 , y1 , U1 , . . . are Player I’s moves in GY then let x0 , f −1 (U0 ), x1 , f −1 (U1 ), . . . be the moves in the auxiliary game, where xn is an arbitrary element of X with f (xn ) = yn . If Player II responds with W0 , W1 , . . . in the auxiliary game according to her winning strategy, then let Vn = f (Wn ) be Player II’s responses in the game GY . We thus have described a winning strategy of Player II in the game GY . (c) For each i ∈ I let πi be the projection map from X onto Xi . Then πi is continuous, open, and surjective. If X is strong Choquet then each Xi is strong Choquet by part (b). Conversely, suppose for each i ∈ I, Xi is strong Choquet. We use a system of auxiliary games GXi , i ∈ I. Now we describe a winning strategy for Player II in the game GX . To begin with, let x0 , U0 be Player I’s first move in the game GX . Let W0 be a basic open set with x0 ∈ W0 ⊆ U0 . (Ui1 ) ∩ · · · ∩ πi−1 (Uin ), where Then there are i1 , . . . , in ∈ I such that W0 = πi−1 1 n Uik ⊆ Xik is open. Then in each of the auxiliary game GXik let πik (x0 ) and πik (W0 ) = Uik be Player I’s first move, and using Player II’s winning strategies get responses Vik . Back in the game GX we then let Player II’s first response to be V0 = πi−1 (Vi1 ) ∩ · · · ∩ πi−1 (Vin ). The general inductive 1 n
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
99
definition of n-th round moves is similar. Note that at the end of the play at most countably many auxiliary games are played, and each of them is won by Player II. This gives a nonempty intersection of the moves made in the game GX , and therefore Player II has won. Theorem 4.1.3 Let X be a Polish space and Y ⊆ X. Then Y is strong Choquet iff Y is Polish. Proof. By Exercise 4.1.2 if Y is completely metrizable then it is strong Choquet. Conversely, suppose Y is strong Choquet and without loss of generality assume that Y is dense in X. We show that Y is a Gδ subset of X. We need to make use of the following claim about collections of open sets in X: any collection U of open sets in X has a point-finite refinement, that is, a collection U of open sets so that
(i) U = U ; (ii) for any W ∈ U there is some U ∈ U such that W ⊆ U ; and (iii) for any x ∈ X there are at most finitely many elements W ∈ U with x ∈ W. Let d be a compatible complete metric on X. We may also require that (iv) for any > 0, diam(W ) < for all W ∈ U . For a proof of the claim, let U be given. By refining we may assume that diam(U ) < for all U ∈ U. Since X is second countable we may also get a countable subcover of U, and hence we may assume that U is countable. Let U0 , U1 , . . . , Un , . . . enumerate U. For each n ∈ ω let (Un,m
)m∈ω be a sequence of open sets such that U ⊆ U , U ⊆ U , and n,m n,m+1 n,m n m Un,m = Un . Then
Un − m
for n ≥ 1. To define T we fix a winning strategy σ for Player II in the game GY . First consider the set S1 of all sequences of the form (U0 , x0 , V0 , U1 ) where U0 = X, V0 is obtained by applying σ to the play of the game GY in which Player I’s first move is x0 , U0 ∩ Y = Y , and U1 ∩ Y ⊆ V0 (thus U1 ∩ Y is a legitimate partial move of Player I for the next round). Let U1 = {U1 : (X, x0 , V0 , U1 ) ∈ S1 for some x0 ∈ Y } and W1 = U1 . Then it
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
100
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
is clear that W1 is open and Y ⊆ W1 . Now by the above claim we can get a point-finite refinement of U1 , which we denote by U1 , with diam(U ) < 2−1 for every U ∈ U1 . Now let T1 ⊆ S1 so that for any U1 ∈ U1 there is a unique (X, x0 , V0 , U1 ) ∈ T1 . In general we consider the set Sn of all sequences of the form (U0 , x0 , V0 , . . . , Un−1 , xn , Vn−1 , Un ) where (U0 , x0 , V0 , . . . , Un−1 ) ∈ Tn−1 , Vn is obtained by applying σ to the play of the game GY in which the following moves have been made: x1 , U1 = U1 ∩ Y
I x0 , Y II
V0
······ V1
xn−1 , Un−1 = Un−1 ∩Y
Vn−1
and finally
Un ∩ Y ⊆ Vn−1 . Let Un = {Un : (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un ) ∈ Sn } and Wn = Un . Still Y ⊆ Wn . Then for each p = (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un−1 ) ∈ Tn−1 , the collection Up = {Un ∈ Un : (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un ) extends p} has a point-finite refinement Up with elements of diameter < 2−n . We let Un =
p∈Tn−1 Up . Then in particular Un is a point-finite refinement of Un . We then define Tn ⊆ Sn so that
for any Un ∈ Un there is a unique (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un ) ∈ Tn . Finally let T = n Tn . To finish the proof of the theorem we check that Y = n Wn . We have seen that Y ⊆ n Wn . It suffices to check that n Wn ⊆ Y . For this suppose x ∈ n Wn . Thus for every n ∈ ω there is (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un ) ∈ T with x ∈ Un . Consider Tx = {(X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un ) ∈ T : x ∈ Un }. By the construction of T the subtree Tx is finite-splitting, and therefore by K¨ onig’s lemma there is an infinite sequence (X, x0 , V0 , . . . , Un , xn , Vn , . . . ) such that x ∈ n Un and the sequence (x0 , Y, V0 , . . . , xn , Un = Un ∩ Y, Vn , . . . ) is a play in the game GY obtained by applying σ. Since σ is a winning strategy for Player II, −n U = ∅. However, it follows that , n) < 2 n Un = ∅; but since diam(U n n U contains a unique element, and thus U = U = {x}. This n n n n n n shows that x ∈ Y .
Theorem 4.1.4 (Choquet) A topological space is Polish iff it is second countable, T3 , and strong Choquet.
Proof. Suppose X is second countable, T3 , and strong Choquet. By the Urysohn metrization theorem X is metrizable. Let d be a compatible metric ˆ d) ˆ be the completion of (X, d). X is now a strong Choquet on X. Let (X, ˆ and by the above theorem X is Polish. subspace of the Polish space X, Recall from Section 1.8 that the Gandy–Harrington topology on ω ω is generated by Σ11 subsets. This turns out to be an important example of strong Choquet space. Theorem 4.1.5 The space ω ω with the Gandy–Harrington topology is strong Choquet.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
101
Proof. Recall from Exercise 1.6.1 that every Σ11 set can be represented as p[T ] for some computable tree T on ω × ω. We describe a winning strategy for Player II in the strong Choquet game on ω ω . Let Player I start by playing x0 and U0 . Let A0 ∈ Σ11 be such that x0 ∈ A0 ⊆ U0 and let T0 be a computable tree on ω × ω with A0 = p[T0 ]. Since x0 ∈ p[T0 ] there is y0 such that (x0 , y0 ) ∈ [T0 ]. To define Player II’s response we use the following notation. For any tree T on ω × ω and (s, t) ∈ T , let T(s,t) = {(s , t ) ∈ T : (s ⊆ s or s ⊇ s) and (t ⊆ s or t ⊇ t)}. Then T(s,t) is a subtree of T and if T is computable so is T(s,t) . Let s0 = x0 1 and t00 = y0 1. We let Player II play V0 = p[(T0 )(s0 ,t00 ) ]. It is easy to see that x0 ∈ V0 ⊆ A0 ⊆ U0 , and thus the rules are obeyed. Let Player I next play x1 and U1 , with x1 ∈ U1 ⊆ V0 . Then since x1 ∈ V0 there is y0 with (x1 , y0 ) ∈ [(T0 )(s0 ,t00 ) ]. Let s1 = x1 2 and t01 = y0 2. Then s0 ⊆ s1 and t00 ⊆ t01 . Also let A1 ∈ Σ11 with x1 ∈ A1 ⊆ U1 , T1 be a computable tree on ω × ω with A1 = p[T1 ], and y1 be such that (x1 , y1 ) ∈ [T1 ]. Note that s0 ⊆ x1 . So we just let t10 = y1 1, and we get x1 ∈ p[(T1 )(s0 ,t10 ) ]. Thus if we let Player II play V1 = p[(T0 )(s1 ,t01 ) ] ∩ p[(T1 )(s0 ,t10 ) ], then we have that x1 ∈ V1 ⊆ A1 ⊆ U1 . Proceeding this way, when Player I plays x0 , U0 , x1 , U1 , . . . Player II responds with V0 , V1 , . . . with xn ∈ Vn ⊆ Un . In the process Player II also defines computable trees Tn on ω ×ω and sequences s0 ⊆ s1 ⊆ . . . , tn0 ⊆ tn1 ⊆ . . . with the following properties: (i) xn ∈ An = p[Tn ] ⊆ Un ; (ii) lh(sn ) = n + 1 and sn ⊆ xn ; (iii) (sk , tnk ) ∈ Tn . Moreover, Vn = p[(T0 )(sn ,t0n ) ] ∩ p[(T1 )(sn−1 ,t1n−1 ) ] ∩ · · · ∩ p[(Tn )(s0 ,tn0 ) ]. Now let
x = n sn . We check that x ∈ n An ⊆n Vn . For each n, let yn = k tnk . Then (sk , tnk ) ∈ Tn and hence (x, yn ) ∈ p[Tn ] = An as required. Theorem 4.1.5 was used in the proof of Theorem 1.8.5 (see the proof of Theorem A.2.2). Exercise 4.1.1 Let X be a topological space and B be a base for the topology of X. Let GX (B) be the game GX in which Players I and II must play elements of B for the open sets. Show that X is strong Choquet iff Player II has a winning strategy in GX (B). Exercise 4.1.2 Show that any completely metrizable space is strong Choquet. Exercise 4.1.3 Show that any locally compact Hausdorff space is strong Choquet.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
102
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 4.1.4 Show that any strong Choquet space is Baire. Exercise 4.1.5 Use Choquet’s Theorem 4.1.4 to give another proof of Sierpinski’s Theorem 2.2.9. Exercise 4.1.6 Let X be a Polish space and Y ⊆ X. Show that if Y is meager then Player I has a winning strategy in the game GY .
4.2
Change of topology
The technique of change of topology is very useful in the study of equivalence relations. We shall employ the technique to turn Borel actions into continuous actions and equivalence relations with certain characteristics into canonical equivalence relations. Lemma 4.2.1 Let X be a space, τ a Polish topology on X, and F ⊆ X a closed subset. Let σ be the topology generated by τ ∪ {F }. Then σ is a Polish topology on X. Proof. Since both F and X − F are Polish subspaces of X, there are compatible complete metrics dF < 1 and dX−F < 1 on F and X − F respectively. It is easy to see that the topology σ is compatible with the following complete metric d defined on X: ⎧ if x, y ∈ F , ⎨ dF (x, y), d(x, y) = dX−F (x, y), if x, y ∈ X − F , ⎩ 1, otherwise. The topology σ is obviously second countable, hence separable. Lemma 4.2.2 Let on X with
X be a space and (τn )n∈ω be a sequence of Polish topologies τ Hausdorff. Let τ be the topology generated by τ . Then τ is a n n n n Polish topology on X. Proof. Let Xn = (X, τn ) and Y = the diagonal D ⊆ Y defined by
n
Xn be the product space. Consider
D = {(xn ) ∈ Y : xn = xn+1 for all n ∈ ω}. Then D is closed in Y since n τn is Hausdorff. Therefore D is Polish. Consider the embedding e : X → Y given by e(x)n = x for all n ∈ ω. Then e
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
103
is in fact a homeomorphism from (X, τ ) onto the subspace D, and so (X, τ ) is Polish. In fact e is obviously a bijection. The continuity of e follows from the fact that τn ⊆ τ for all n ∈ ω. To see that e−1 is open let U be subbasic open in (X, τ ). Thus U ∈ n τn and U ∈ τn0 for some n0 ∈ ω. Now for any (xn ) ∈ D, (xn ) ∈ e(U ) iff xn0 ∈ U . Therefore e(U ) ∩ D is open in D. Theorem 4.2.3 Let X be a Polish space, 1 ≤ α < ω1 , and A a countable collection of Σ0α subsets of X. Then there is a countable collection B of Σ0α sets such that A ⊆ B and the topology generated by B is Polish and is finer than the original topology on X. Proof. We prove it by a transfinite induction on 1 ≤ α < ω1 . The base case α = 1 is trivial. For the successor case, assume the theorem is true 0 for α ≥ 1 and consider a countable
collection A = {A0 , A1 , . . . } 0of Σα+1 sets. For each n ∈ ω, let An = m∈ω Bn,m where each Bn,m is Πα . Then the collection C = {X − Bn,m : n, m ∈ ω} is a countable collection of Σ0α sets, and by the inductive hypothesis there is a countable collection D ⊇ C of Σ0α sets so that the topology generated by D is Polish and is finer than the original topology on X. Now consider X with this new Polish topology σ generated by D. Each Bn,m is σ-closed, thus by Lemma 4.2.1 the topology τn,m generated by σ ∪ {Bn,m } is Polish, whereas n,m τn,m ⊇ σ is Hausdorff. Thus by Lemma 4.2.2 the topology τ generated by σ ∪ {Bn,m : n, m ∈ ω} is again Polish, and in addition each An is open in τ . Now if we let B = B0 ∪ {Bn,m : n, m ∈ ω} ∪ A where B0 is a countable base for the topology σ, then B generates the topology τ , as required. Suppose now α is a limit ordinal and A
= {A0 , A1 , . . . } is a countable collection of Σ0α sets. Again assume An = m∈ω Bn,m where each Bn,m is in Π0β(n,m) for some β(n, m) < α. Let C = {Bn,m : n, m ∈ ω}. Fix a cofinal sequence in α, γ0 < γ1 < · · · < α, and for each k ∈ ω let Ck = {B ∈ C : B ∈ Π0γk }. Then each Ck is a countable collection of Σ0γk +1 sets. Since γk + 1 < α for all k ∈ ω, by the inductive hypothesis there is Dk ⊇ Ck so that the topology generated by Dk is Polish and is finer than the original topology on X. By Lemma 4.2.2 the topology τ generated by k Dk is Polish. It is clear that each An is open in τ . Thus if we let B = k Dk ∪ A then B generates τ as well. Corollary 4.2.4 Let X be a Polish space with topology τ and A a countable collection of Borel sets of X. Then there is a Polish topology σ finer than τ such that all elements of A are σ-open. In fact the property of being contained in a finer Polish topology characterizes Borelness (see Exercise 4.2.1). Next we show a nice analog for analytic sets.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
104
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 4.2.5 Let X be a Polish space with topology τ and A a countable collection of Σ11 sets of X. Then there is a second countable strong Choquet topology σ on X finer than τ such that all elements of A are σ-open. Proof. Without loss of generality we may assume X is uncountable and thus is Borel isomorphic to ω ω . It then suffices to prove the theorem for ω ω . In fact, let ϕ : (X, τ ) → ω ω be a Borel isomorphism and B be a countable base for τ . Then {ϕ(A) : A ∈ A ∪ B} is a countable collection of Σ11 sets of ω ω . If σ is a second countable strong Choquet topology on ω ω finer than the usual topology such that all elements of {ϕ(A) : A ∈ A∪B} are σ -open, then the topology σ generated by {ϕ−1 (B) : B ∈ σ } on X is a second countable strong Choquet topology finer than τ such that all elements of A are σ-open. Thus we assume X = ω ω . Then there is some x ∈ X such that A ⊆ Σ11 (x). Now the relativized Gandy–Harrington topology σ generated by all Σ11 (x) sets is second countable and strong Choquet by Theorem 4.1.5. Thus σ is as required. Theorem 4.2.6 (Becker) Let τ be a Polish topology on X and σ a second countable strong Choquet topology finer than τ . Then every σ-open set is Σ11 in τ .
Proof. Let A ∈ σ. We show that A is Suslin in τ . Since A is open in the strong Choquet space (X, σ), the subspace (A, σ A) is a strong Choquet space. We fix a winning strategy for Player II in the game GA . Similar to the proof of Theorem 4.1.3 we can construct a tree T of sequences of the form (U0 , x0 , V0 , U1 , x1 , V1 , . . . , Un , xn , Vn , Un+1 ) where x0 , U1 , . . . , xn , Un are Player I’s moves in GA , V0 , V1 , . . . , Vn are Player II’s responses according to her winning strategy, and Un+1 is a partial move for Player I in the (n + 1)-th round. Then we define a Suslin system (Ps )s∈ω<ω as follows. Let τ P∅ = A . To define Ps for lh(s) = 1 consider elements (U0 , x0 , V0 , U1 ) ∈ T where U0 = A and diam(U1 ) < 2−1 . Note that such elements exist since σ is finer than τ . In fact in the topology σ the collection of all possible U1 components from such elements form an open cover of A (since x0 ∈ A can be arbitrarily chosen, the collection of V0 components form an open cover). Now that σ is second countable, there exists a countable subcover U1 consisting of such U1 components. We then let the collection {Ps : lh(s) = τ 1} be an enumeration of {U1 : U1 ∈ U1 }. In general if Ps has been defined for each s with lh(s) = n and is correspondent to some element (U0 , x0 , V0 , U1 , . . . , Un ) ∈ T where U0 = A and diam(Un ) < 2−n , the collection {Ps k : k ∈ ω} is an enumeration of the τ -closures of some elements Un+1 with diam(Un+1 ) < 2n+1 where the collection of all of them is a σ-open cover of Un and (U0 , x0 , V0 , U1 , . . . , Un , xn , Vn , Un+1 ) ∈ T for some xn and Vn .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
105
We claim s )s∈ω <ω by the Suslin operation, that is, that A is obtained from (P A = z n Pzn . To see first A ⊆ z n Pzn , let x ∈ A. By our construction one can find U1 ⊇ U2 ⊇ . . . and s1 ⊆ s2 ⊆ . . . with lh(sn ) = n such that x∈U n ⊆ Psn . Let z = n sn . Then x ∈ n Pzn . For the converse suppose x ∈ n Pzn for some z ∈ ω ω . Let sn = z n and Un from the construction τ such that Psn = Un . Since the construction followed a winning strategy of Player II it follows that n Un = ∅. On the other hand diam(Un ) < 2−n since −n it follows that diam(Psn ) ≤ 2 , and in particular n Un ⊆ n Psn can have at most one element. This implies that x ∈ n Un and thus x ∈ A. Corollary 4.2.7 Let X be a Polish space with topology τ and A ⊆ X. Then A is Σ11 iff there is a second countable strong Choquet topology σ on X finer than τ such that A is σ-open. Exercise 4.2.1 Let X be a Polish space with topology τ and A ⊆ X. Show that A is Borel iff there is a Polish topology σ on X finer than τ such that A is σ-open. Exercise 4.2.2 Show that the topology on ω ω generated by all Δ11 sets is Polish. Exercise 4.2.3 Let τ be a Polish topology on X and σ a finer second countable strong Choquet topology. Show that there is a second countable strong Choquet topology σ finer than σ and a dense open subset Y of X with respect to σ such that (Y, σ Y ) is Polish. (Hint: Use Theorem 1.8.5.) Exercise 4.2.4 Prove the following uniform version of Theorem 4.2.3: Let X, Y be Polish spaces, 1 ≤ α < ω1 , and A ⊆ X ×Y be Σ0α . Then there is a Σ0α subset B of X × Y × ω such that A(x, y) ⇐⇒ B(x, y, 0), and for every y ∈ Y , a Polish topology on X finer than the original topology is generated by the countable collection {By,n : n ∈ ω}, where By,n = {x ∈ X : (x, y, n) ∈ B}.
4.3
Finer topologies on Polish G-spaces
In this section we extend the technique of change of topology to Polish G-spaces. We would like to maintain that the action is still continuous with respect to the finer topology. However, there are simple obstacles for a full generalization of the results in the preceding section. Consider a nontrivial continuous action of a connected Polish group G on a Polish space X. By the continuity of the action every G-orbit is connected. Let x ∈ X with more than one element in [x]G . Then there is no finer Polish
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
106
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
topology on X so that {x} is open and the action is still continuous, since otherwise [x]G would be discrete. It turns out that the modification needed in this context is to consider the Vaught transforms. Lemma 4.3.1 Let G be a Polish group, (X, τ ) a Polish G-space, and F ⊆ X closed. Then there is a Polish topology σ ⊆ Σ02 (X, τ ) finer than τ such that the action is continuous with respect to σ and F W is σ-open for all nonempty open W ⊆ G. Proof. We are going to make use of a special Polish G-space L(G, d) introduced in Exercise 3.1.9. Let d ≤ 1 be a compatible right-invariant metric on G. Define, for each x ∈ X, fx ∈ L(G, d) by fx (g) = d(g, {h ∈ G : h · x ∈ F }) = inf{d(g, h) : h · x ∈ F }. We claim that x → fx is a G-map. In fact, let k ∈ G and x ∈ X, we verify that k · fx = fk·x by the following computation using the right-invariance of d: (k · fx )(g) = fx (gk) = inf{d(gk, h) : h · x ∈ F } = inf{d(gk, h k) : h k · x ∈ F } = inf{d(g, h ) : h · (k · x) ∈ F } = fk·x (g). Let G act on X × L(G, d) diagonally: g · (x, f ) = (g · x, g · f ). Let ϕ : X → X × L(G, d) be given by ϕ(x) = (x, fx ). It is clear that ϕ is a G-embedding. We next claim that ϕ(X) is a Gδ subset of X × L(G, d). To see this let G0 be a countable dense subset of G. Then for (x, f ) ∈ X × L(G, d), (x, f ) ∈ ϕ(X) ⇐⇒ f = fx ⇐⇒ ∀g ∈ G0 f (g) = fx (g) ⇐⇒ ∀q ∈ Q ∀g ∈ G0 (f (g) < q ↔ fx (g) < q) ⇐⇒ ∀q ∈ Q ∀g ∈ G0 (f (g) < q ↔ ∃h ∈ G0 (d(g, h) < q ∧ h · x ∈ F ). The computation shows that for fixed q and g, the sets {x ∈ X : fx (g) < q} and {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) < q} are both open. It follows that ϕ(X) is a countable intersection of Boolean combinations of open sets in X × L(G, d), and therefore is Gδ in X × L(G, d). Now ϕ(X) is an invariant Gδ subset of X × L(G, d), hence it is a Polish G-space with the diagonal action. Let σ be the topology on X pulled back from ϕ(X) along ϕ, that is, A ⊆ X is σ-open iff ϕ(A) is open in X × L(G, d). It is clear that (X, σ) is a Polish G-space since it is G-homeomorphic to the Polish G-space ϕ(X). We claim that σ has the other required properties.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
107
First note that ϕ is an open mapping, since ϕ−1 : ϕ(X) → X is just the projection of the product space onto its first factor, and is thus continuous. It follows that σ is a Polish topology finer than τ . Next we check that σ ⊆ Σ02 (X, τ ). This is equivalent to checking that ϕ is a Baire class 1 function from (X, τ ) into X × L(G, d). Again let G0 be a countable dense subset of G. Then a subbase for X × L(G, d) consists of sets of the form O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) < q} or O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) > q} for O ⊆ X open, g ∈ G0 , and q ∈ Q. Now ϕ(x) ∈ O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) < q} ⇐⇒ x ∈ O ∧ fx (g) < q ⇐⇒ x ∈ O ∧ ∃h ∈ G0 (d(g, h) < q ∧ h · x ∈ F ), implying that ϕ−1 (O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) < q}) is open, and ϕ(x) ∈ O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) > q} ⇐⇒ x ∈ O ∧ ∃q ∈ Q+ ∀h ∈ G0 (d(g, h) < q + q → h · x ∈ F ), implying that ϕ−1 (O × {f ∈ L(G, d) : f (g) > q}) is Σ02 . Finally we check that F W is σ-open for any W ⊆ G nonempty open. For this consider A = {(x, fx ) : fx (1G ) > 0}. A is open in ϕ(X), and also ϕ(x) ∈ A W ⇐⇒ ∃∗ g ∈ W (g · fx )(1G ) = fx (g) > 0 ⇐⇒ ∃∗ g ∈ W g · x ∈ F ⇐⇒ x ∈ F W . In the computation we used the fact that fx (g) > 0 ⇒ g · x ∈ F and the following version of the converse. If U ⊆ W is an open set such that for densely many g ∈ U , g · x ∈ F , then by continuity of the action we have U · x ⊆ F and thus for all g ∈ U , fx (g) > 0. The next lemma is an analog of Lemma 4.2.2 with a similar proof. The proof is left as an exercise (Exercise 4.3.4). Lemma 4.3.2 Let G be a Polish group, X a G-space, and (τn )n∈ω a sequence of Polish topologies on X with n τn Hausdorff. Suppose that the action is continuous
with respect to τn for all n ∈ ω. Let τ be the topology generated by n τn . Then (X, τ ) is a Polish G-space. We use the following notation. Let G be a topological group and X a Gspace. For a collection A of subsets of X and a collection U of nonempty open subsets of G, let A U = {A U : A ∈ A, U ∈ U}.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
108
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 4.3.3 (Hjorth) Let G be a Polish group, (X, τ ) a Polish G-space, U ⊆ G a countable collection of nonempty open subsets of G, 1 ≤ α < ω1 , and A a countable collection of Σ0α subsets of (X, τ ). Then there is a Polish topology σ ⊆ Σ0α (X, τ ) finer than τ such that (X, σ) is a Polish G-space and A U ⊆ σ. Proof. Without loss of generality we may assume that U is a countable base for the topology of G. We prove the theorem by a transfinite induction on α. Note that there is nothing to prove when α = 1. For the successor case, suppose α = β + 1 with β ≥ 1. Enumerate A as {Ai }i∈ω and U as {Uj }j∈ω . Also let {Bi,k }i,k∈ω be Π0β sets with Ai = k Bi,k for all i ∈ ω. Let C = {X − Bi,k : i, k ∈ ω}. Then C ⊆ Σ0β (X, τ ). By the inductive hypothesis there is a Polish topology τ ⊆ Σ0β (X, τ ) finer than τ such that (X, τ ) is a Polish G-space and C U ⊆ τ . Each Bi,k is τ -closed, hence by Lemma 4.3.1 for each i, k ∈ ω there is a Polish topology τi,k ⊆ Σ02 (X, τ ) finer than τ such W that (X, τi,k ) is a Polish G-space and Bi,k is τi,k -open for all nonempty open W ⊆ G. Let σ be the topology generated by i,k τi,k . Then by Lemma 4.3.2 (X, σ) is a Polish G-space. It is clear that σ consists of Σ0α (X, τ ) sets since each τi,k consists of such sets. To see that A U ⊆ σ, note that Uj U Uj Ai = Bi,k = Bi,k j , k
k
which is σ-open. Finally consider the case
α is a limit. Again let A = {Ai }i∈ω , U = {Uj }j∈ω and for each i ∈ ω, Ai = k Bi,k with Bi,k ∈ Π0β(i,k) with β(i, k) < α. Then each Bi,k ∈ Σ0β(i,k)+1 and β(i, k) + 1 < α. By the inductive hypothesis for each i, k ∈ ω there is a Polish topology τi,k ⊆ Σ0β(i,k)+1 finer than τ such that U
j (X, τi,k ) is a Polish G-space
and Bi,k is τi,k -open for all j ∈ ω. Let σ be the topology generated by i,k τi,k . Then by Lemma 4.3.2 (X, σ) is a Polish
U U G-space. Again Ai j = k Bi,k j is σ-open.
Corollary 4.3.4 (Becker–Kechris) Let G be a Polish group, (X, τ ) a Polish G-space, and A ⊆ X invariant Borel. Then there is a Polish topology σ finer than τ such that (X, σ) is a Polish G-space and A is σ-open.
Proof. A G .
This follows immediately from the preceding theorem since A =
The Becker–Kechris theorem was first proved by a different method which yielded a slightly weaker result than Theorem 4.3.3. In the next section we
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
109
give this method and use it to prove another result on topological realization of Borel G-spaces. Exercise 4.3.1 Let G be a Polish group with a compatible right invariant metric d and X a Polish G-space. For each x ∈ X and open set O ⊆ X define fxO (g) = d(g, {h ∈ G : h · x ∈ O}). Show that if O = {Oi }i∈ω is a countable base for X then x → (fxOi )i∈ω is a G-embedding from X into L(G, d)ω . Exercise 4.3.2 Show that the G-embedding in Exercise 4.3.1 is of Baire class 1. Exercise 4.3.3 In Exercise 4.3.1 let σ be the weak topology on X given by the G-embedding into L(G, d)ω . Show that (X, σ) is a Polish G-space. Exercise 4.3.4 Prove Lemma 4.3.2. Exercise 4.3.5 Prove the following uniform version of Corollary 4.3.4: Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, Y a Polish space, 1 < α < ω1 , and A ⊆ X × Y a Σ0α subset such that for all y ∈ Y , Ay = {x ∈ X : (x, y) ∈ A} is invariant. Then there is a Borel set B ⊆ X × Y × ω such that (x, y) ∈ A ⇐⇒ (x, y, 0) ∈ B, and for all y ∈ Y , the topology σy generated by the countable collection {By,n : n ∈ ω}, where By,n = {x ∈ X : (x, y, n) ∈ B}, is finer than the original topology on X, and such that (X, σy ) is a Polish G-space. (Hint: See Exercise 4.2.4.)
4.4
Topological realization of Borel G-spaces
In this section we give the method used by Becker and Kechris in Reference [8] to generate finer topologies on Polish G-spaces. A benefit of the method is the useful result that any Borel G-space can be turned into a Polish G-space. The method is based on a very simple construction. Let G be a Polish group, U a base for the topology of G, X a Borel G-space, and A a collection of analytic subsets of X. We will show that, under suitable assumptions, the topology generated by A U already has the desired nice properties. We prove these properties in a series of lemmas below. For brevity, in these lemmas we make the same assumptions about G, U, X, and A as above unless otherwise specified.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
110
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Lemma 4.4.1 Let g ∈ G, x ∈ X, A ∈ Σ11 (X), and W ⊆ G nonempty open. Suppose g · x ∈ A W . Then there are nonempty U, V ∈ U such that x ∈ A U , g ∈ V , and U V −1 ⊆ W . Proof. It follows from g · x ∈ A W that x ∈ A (W g) . Thus the set H = {h ∈ W g : h · x ∈ A} is nonmeager. Since H is Σ11 in G, it has the Baire property. Thus for some U0 ∈ U with U0 ⊆ W g, H is comeager in U0 ; that is, x ∈ A∗U0 . Now U0 g −1 ⊆ W , so there are U, V ∈ U with U ⊆ U0 , g ∈ V and U V −1 ⊆ W . Then x ∈ A∗U0 ⊆ A∗U ⊆ A U . Lemma 4.4.2 The action of G on X is continuous with respect to the topology on X generated by A U . Proof. Let τ be the topology on X generated by A U . Fix g0 ∈ G, x0 ∈ X, A ∈ A, W ∈ U with g0 · x0 ∈ A W . By Lemma 4.4.1 there are U, V ∈ U such that x0 ∈ A U , g0 ∈ V , and U V −1 ⊆ W . Let N = A U . Note that N ∈ A U and thus is τ -open. We check that for all g ∈ V and x ∈ N , g · x ∈ A W . Since U V −1 ⊆ W , U g −1 ⊆ W . Thus x ∈ N = A U ⊆ A (W g) . Hence g · x ∈ A W . Lemma 4.4.3 Let B be a base for a Polish topology on X generating the Borel structure of X and B ⊆ A. Then the topology generated by A U is T1 . Proof. Let x, y ∈ X with x = y. It suffices to find B ∈ B and U ∈ U such that x ∈ B U ∈ A U and y ∈ B U . Let τ be the topology on X generated by B. Consider the function f : G → X × X defined by f (g) = (g · x, g · y). Since X is a Borel G-space and τ generates the Borel structure on X, f is a Borel function from G into (X, τ ) × (X, τ ). Thus there is a dense Gδ subset H of G such that f H is continuous. Let g0 ∈ H. Since g0 · x = g0 · y, there are B, C ∈ B with B ∩ C = ∅ such that (g0 · x, g0 · y) ∈ B × C. By the continuity of f H, there is an open set U ⊆ G with g0 ∈ U ∩ H such that f (U ∩ H) ⊆ B × C. Since U ∩ H is comeager in U , we have that x ∈ B ∗U and y ∈ C ∗U . Thus in particular x ∈ B U and y ∈ B U since B ∗U ⊆ B U and B U ⊆ (X − C) U = X − C ∗U . Lemma 4.4.4 Suppose that for any A ∈ A and U ∈ U, X − A U ∈ A. Then the topology generated by A U is regular. Proof.
Let x ∈ A W for A ∈ A and W ∈ U. It suffices to find U ∈ U such
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
111
that x ∈ A U ⊆ A U ⊆ A W . Since 1G · x = x, by Lemma 4.4.1 we obtain nonempty U1 , V1 ∈ U such that x ∈ A U1 , 1G ∈ V1 , and U1 V1−1 ⊆ W . Now by Lemma 4.4.1 again we obtain U2 , V2 ∈ U such that x ∈ A U , 1G ∈ V2 , and U2 V2−1 ⊆ U1 . Let U = U2 and N = A U . Let V ∈ U be such that V ⊆ V1−1 ∩ V2 and F = (A U1 )∗V . We claim that F is closed and x ∈ N ⊆ F ⊆ A W . To see that F is closed, note that X − F = (X − A U1 ) V is open by our assumption on the closure property of A. For N ⊆ F , let y ∈ N . Note that for any g ∈ V ⊆ V2 , U = U2 ⊆ U1 g since U2 g −1 ⊆ U2 V2−1 ⊆ U1 . Thus for any g ∈ V , y ∈ N = A U ⊆ A (U1 g) ; it follows that g · y ∈ A U1 . Thus we have that ∀∗ g ∈ V (g · y ∈ A U1 ) and thus y ∈ (A U1 )∗V = F . For F ⊆ A W , let y ∈ F = (A U1 )∗V . Let g0 ∈ V be such that g0 · y ∈ U1 . Then y ∈ A (U1 g0 ) . But since U1 g0 ⊆ U1 V1−1 ⊆ W , we get that A y ∈ A W . It is easy to construct collections A with the closure properties specified in the preceding lemmas. For instance, one can start by choosing a countable base B for a Polish topology τ on X generating the given Borel structure. Then inductively define a sequence of collections by letting A0 = B and An+1 = {X − A U : A ∈ An , U ∈ U}. Finally let A = n An . Such a collection A satisfies the assumptions of both Lemmas 4.4.3 and 4.4.4, and if U is a countable base for G then the topology generated by A U is second countable (since both A and U are countable) and T3 , and the action of G on X is continuous with respect to it. Also note that every element of this A is Σ0n (X, τ ) for some n < ω, which is not as economical as Lemma 4.3.1. However, the advantage here is that the action is always continuous. Next in order to guarantee that the topology is Polish, we seek closure conditions to guarantee that the topology is strong Choquet. One condition desired by the following lemma is the existence of a Polish topology finer than the one generated by A U . To do this we combine the construction of Theorem 4.2.3 into the above iterative closure construction of A. Thus a minimal collection A with all desired closure properties can be given as follows. Assume U is a countable base for G. Let A0 be a countable base for a Polish topology τ on X generating the given Borel structure. For each n ∈ ω, let An+1 ⊇ {X − A U : A ∈ An , U ∈ U} ∪ A U be given by Theorem 4.2.3 so that An+1 generates a Polish topology on X. Let A = n An . Then A generates a Polish topology by Lemma 4.2.2, and A U ⊆ A. Note that every element of this A is still Σ0n (X, τ ) for some n ∈ ω. The presentation of the construction can be made a bit more succinct by requiring that A is a countable Boolean algebra. The details are left as an exercise (see Exercise 4.4.3). Lemma 4.4.5 Let U be a countable base for G and A a countable Boolean algebra of Borel
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
112
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
subsets of X such that A U ⊆ A and the topology on X generated by A is Polish. Then the topology generated by A U is strong Choquet. Proof. Let τ be the topology generated by A U and σ be that by A. Let B be the collection of nonempty intersections of finitely many elements of A U . Then B is a countable base for τ . Since σ is Polish, we can fix a complete metric d on X giving rise to σ. We also fix a compatible complete metric on G. Now to show that τ is strong Choquet, we consider the strong Choquet game G(X,τ ) : I x0 , M0 x1 , M1 ······ II N0 N1 We informally describe a winning strategy for Player II as follows. Suppose x0 , M0 , x1 , M1 , . . . are played by Player I in a run of the game. We inductively define nonempty τ -open Ni , and in addition, Ai ∈ A and Ui ∈ U, so that the following are satisfied: τ
(i) xi ∈ Ni ⊆ Ni ⊆ Mi ; i ; (ii) Ni ⊆ A U i
σ
(iii) diam(Ai ) < 2−i and Ai ⊆ Ai−1 ; σ
(iv) diam(Ui ) < 2−i and Ui ⊆ Ui−1 . U
To see that such Ni , Ai , Ui exist, assume xi ∈ Mi ⊆ Ni−1 ⊆ Ai−1i−1 by the inductive hypothesis. Since σ Ai−1 = {A ∈ A : A ⊆ Ai−1 , diam(A) < 2−i }, Ui−1 =
σ {U ∈ U : U ⊆ Ui−1 , diam(U ) < 2−i },
and the action is Borel with respect to σ, there are some Ai , Ui satisfying (iii) i i and (iv) with x ∈ A U . Now that τ is regular by Lemma 4.4.4, and A U i i τ Ui and Mi are τ -open, there is τ -open Ni such that xi ∈ Ni ⊆ Ni ⊆ Mi ∩ Ai . Thus (i) and (ii) are also satisfied. The strategy for Player II is therefore to keep the sets Ai and Ui on the side and play an Ni satisfying (i) through (iv). To see that this strategy is winning, let gi ∈ Ui with gi · xi ∈ Ai , g be the unique element such that {g} = i Ui and y be the unique element such that {y} = i Ai . Then limi gi = g and limσi gi · xi = y. Since τ ⊆ σ, we have limτi gi · xi = y. By Lemma 4.4.2 the action is continuous with respect to τ , and thus limτi xi = limτi gi−1 · (gi · xi ) = g −1 · y. Let x = g −1 · y. We claim that x ∈ Ni for all i ∈ ω. For this τ fix i ∈ ω and note that for all j > i, xj ∈ Nj ⊆ Nj ⊆ Mj ⊆ Ni . Thus τ x = limτj>i xj ∈ Ni+1 ⊆ Ni . Thus the strategy is winning for Player II.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Finer Polish Topologies
113
Thus we have completed the proof of the following theorem. Theorem 4.4.6 (Becker–Kechris) Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then there is a Polish topology τ on X such that τ generates the Borel structure of X and (X, τ ) is a Polish G-space. Another formulation of the theorem states that any Borel G-space is Borel isomorphic to a Polish G-space. The method given in this section can be easily adapted to give a proof of a theorem in the same spirit of Theorem 4.3.3. However, by the discussion preceding Lemma 4.4.5, the finer topology makes use of Borel sets of rank slightly higher than the given sets. Combined with the technique of Theorem 4.2.5 the method of this section can also be adapted to show an analog of Theorem 4.2.5 in the G-space setting. Exercise 4.4.1 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, U a base for G, A ⊆ Σ11 (X), and D a base for X. Show that the action is continuous with respect to the topology on X generated by A U ∪ D. Exercise 4.4.2 Let G be Polish group, X a Polish G-space, U a base for G, A ⊆ Σ11 (X), and D a base for X. Show that the topology generated by (A ∪ D) U is finer than the original topology on X. Exercise 4.4.3 Let G be a Polish group with a countable base U, X a Borel G-space, and B a countable base for a Polish topology τ on X generating the given Borel structure. Show that there is a countable Boolean algebra A ⊇ B such that A U ⊆ A and the topology generated by A is Polish. Exercise 4.4.4 Prove the following uniform version of Theorem 4.4.6: Let G be a Polish group, X a Borel G-space, Y a standard Borel space, and A ⊆ X × Y a Borel set such that Ay is G-invariant for all y ∈ Y . Then there is a Borel set B ⊆ X × Y × ω such that (x, y) ∈ A ⇐⇒ (x, y, 0) ∈ B, and for all y ∈ Y , the topology σy generated by the countable collection {By,n : n ∈ ω}, where By,n = {x ∈ X : (x, y, n) ∈ B}, is a Polish topology giving the same Borel structure on X, and (X, σy ) is a Polish G-space.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Part II
Theory of Equivalence Relations
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 5 Borel Reducibility
In this part of the book we give an introduction to the theory of definable equivalence relations in the Borel reducibility hierarchy. The notion of Borel reducibility is the most penetrating concept studied in the invariant descriptive set theory. It was originally borrowed from computability theory and structural complexity theory to help determine the relative complexity of equivalence relations. In this sense invariant descriptive set theory can be regarded as a complexity theory for equivalence relations. There are, however, two prominent features that are unique to invariant descriptive set theory. The first one is that almost no equivalence relations studied here are artificial. In fact almost all of them arose from other fields of mathematics and some of them have even been studied in those fields intensively before their study became the main focus of invariant descriptive set theory. Thus results in invariant descriptive set theory are relevant to a broad range of mathematical fields. The second feature, which might be more interesting, is that we are comparing objects or problems of different mathematical nature in the same framework, thus making new connections between mathematical fields. For instance, it is very common that a classification problem in algebra turns out to have the same complexity as a problem in topology or analysis.
5.1
Borel reductions
Definition 5.1.1 Let E be an equivalence relation on set X and F an equivalence relation on set Y . A function f : X → Y is called a reduction from E to F if x1 Ex2 ⇐⇒ f (x1 )F f (x2 ) for all x1 , x2 ∈ X. We say that E is reducible to F and denote E ≤ F if there is a reduction from E to F . With the Axiom of Choice E ≤ F is equivalent to there being an injection of X/E into Y /F (Exercise 5.1.1). Thus the order ≤ on equivalence relations is exactly the order on cardinalities of the quotient spaces. The notion becomes
117 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
118
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
much more interesting when we impose definability requirements on the spaces and functions. Definition 5.1.2 Let X, Y be Polish spaces and E, F equivalence relations on X, Y respectively. E is said to be continuously reducible to F , denoted E ≤c F , if there is a continuous reduction from E to F . E is Borel reducible to F , denoted E ≤B F , if there is a Borel reduction from E to F . The notion of Borel reducibility is the most useful in measuring the relative complexity of equivalence relations. Intuitively, if E ≤B F then E is considered to be at most as complex as F , since every inquiry about E can be transferred and answered through an inquiry about F . Of course there is a different reducibility notion associated with every class of definable functions. But the continuous and Borel reductions will be our main focus in this book. The notion of Borel reducibility also makes sense if X, Y are only standard Borel spaces. One can also strengthen the notion of reduction as follows. Definition 5.1.3 For equivalence relations E, F on sets X, Y respectively, a reduction f : X → Y is called an embedding if f is injective. We say that E embeds into F if there is an embedding of E into F , and denote E F . If X, Y are Polish spaces then E continuously embeds into F , denoted E c F , if there is a continuous embedding from E into F , and E Borel embeds into F , denoted E B F , if there is a Borel embedding from E into F . Obviously the notion E B F also makes sense if X, Y are only standard Borel spaces. Finally we also have the notion of a strict order and various notions of equivalence. Definition 5.1.4 Let E, F be equivalence relations on X, Y respectively. (1) We write E < F if E ≤ F and F ≤ E. The notation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
119
and Y . They are Borel isomorphic, denoted E ∼ =B F , if there is a Borel bijective reduction f : X → Y . In the special case that the equivalence relations are induced by group actions, we have the following simple facts. Proposition 5.1.5 X Y and EG be the induced Let G be a group and X, Y be G-spaces. Let EG orbit equivalence relations. X into (a) If f : X → Y is a G-embedding, then f is an embedding from EG Y EG . X and (b) If there are G-embeddings f : X → Y and g : Y → X, then EG Y EG are isomorphic.
The proof is left as an exercise (Exercise 5.1.6). Note that in this proposition part (a) applies to any class of definable functions, but it is not the case with part (b). Nevertheless part (b) can be stated with Borel functions, from which the following proposition is a corollary. Proposition 5.1.6 Let G be a Polish group and X, Y be Borel G-spaces. If there are Borel X ∼ Y . G-embeddings f : X → Y and g : Y → X, then EG =B EG The existence of universal Borel G-spaces immediately gives rise to the following concept and result. Definition 5.1.7 For any class C of equivalence relations, a universal equivalence relation for C is some F ∈ C such that for any E ∈ C, E ≤B F . Theorem 5.1.8 For any Polish group G there is a universal G-orbit equivalence relation, that is, a universal equivalence relation in the class of all orbit equivalence relations induced by Borel actions of G. Proof.
By Theorem 3.3.4 and Proposition 5.1.5(b).
If H is a Polish group and G is a closed subgroup of H, then Theorem 3.5.3 established that any G-orbit equivalence relation is Borel reducible to some Horbit equivalence relation (see Exercise 5.1.7). Thus the existence of universal Polish groups immediately gives the following theorem. Theorem 5.1.9 There is a universal equivalence relation for all orbit equivalence relations induced by Borel actions of Polish groups.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
120
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof. By Theorem 2.5.2 there is a universal Polish group H. Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then G is isomorphic to a closed subgroup of H. By Theorem 3.5.3 there is a Borel H-space Y so that X is a Borel subset of Y and that every H-orbit contains exactly one G-orbit. It X to follows that the identity map from X into Y is a Borel reduction of EG Y EH . Let E be a universal H-orbit equivalence relation given by Theorem 5.1.8 Y X above. Then EH ≤B E. It follows that EG ≤B E and thus E is a universal X equivalence relation for all EG , where G is Polish and X a Borel G-space. Looking at the other end, the simplest equivalence relations are the identity relations. Definition 5.1.10 Let X be a set. The identity relation (or the equality relation) on X, denoted by id(X), is the relation {(x, y) ∈ X × X : x = y}. Note that identity relations are also orbit equivalence relations. They are induced by trivial actions of the trivial group. Any reduction from an identity relation is necessarily an embedding. In addition, reductions involving the identity relation are closely related to the following concept. Definition 5.1.11 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X. We say that there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes if there is a perfect set A ⊆ X such that for any x, y ∈ A, xEy implies x = y. The following proposition collects some easy facts about reductions involving the identity relation. Proposition 5.1.12 Let E be an equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then the following are equivalent: (i) There are perfectly many E-equivalence classes; (ii) For some uncountable Polish space X, id(X) ≤B E; (iii) For any Polish space X, id(X) ≤B E; (iv) id(ω ω ) ≤B E; (v) id(2ω ) ≤B E; (vi) id(2ω ) B E; (vii) id(2ω ) c E.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
121
Proof. The implication (i)⇒(vii) follows from Exercise 1.3.4. It is obvious that (vii)⇒(vi)⇒(v). The equivalence of (ii) through (v) is by the Borel isomorphism theorem (Corollary 1.3.8). Finally (ii)⇒(i) by the perfect set theorem for analytic sets (Theorem 1.6.6). Note that conditions (ii) through (vi) make sense and are equivalent even if X is only a standard Borel space. In this case we say that there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes if any of the conditions (ii) through (vi) holds. Exercise 5.1.1 Show that E ≤ F iff there is an injection from X/E into Y /F . Exercise 5.1.2 Classify all equivalence relations on Polish spaces up to isomorphism, bireducibility, and biembeddability, respectively. Exercise 5.1.3 Classify all Borel equivalence relations on Polish spaces with at most countably many equivalence classes up to Borel isomorphism, Borel bireducibility, and Borel biembeddability, respectively. Exercise 5.1.4 Show that if E ≤c F and F is Π0α (or Σ0α ) for any α < ω1 then so is E. Exercise 5.1.5 Show that if E ≤B F and F is Borel (or analytic) then so is E. Exercise 5.1.6 Prove Propositions 5.1.5 and 5.1.6. X Y Exercise 5.1.7 Let EG and EH be given by Theorem 3.5.3. Show that X Y EG ∼B EH .
Exercise 5.1.8 Let E be a Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Suppose E has at most countably many equivalence classes. Show that there is a standard Borel space Y such that E ∼B id(Y ).
5.2
Faithful Borel reductions
Definition 5.2.1 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and E, F be equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. We say that f : X → Y is a faithful Borel reduction from E to F , if f is a Borel reduction from E to F such that for any invariant Borel set A ⊆ X, the F -saturation of f (A), [f (A)]F is Borel. We say that E is faithfully Borel reducible to F , denoted E ≤f B F , if there is a faithful Borel reduction from E to F .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
122
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
The notion of a faithful Borel reduction is a bit technical. However, it is related to several important problems in invariant descriptive set theory, and many natural reductions between equivalence relations turn out to be faithful. Proposition 5.2.2 Let G be a Polish group and X, Y Borel G-spaces. If f : X → Y is a Borel X to G-embedding from X to Y then f is a faithful Borel reduction from EG Y EG . Proof. Let f : X → Y be a Borel G-embedding and A ⊆ X an invariant Borel set. Then f (A) is invariant Borel. Theorem 5.2.3 Let G be a Polish group, X a Borel G-space, and Y a standard Borel space. X and F a Borel equivalence relation on Y . Suppose f is a Borel Let E = EG reduction from E to F . Then f is a faithful Borel reduction from E to F . Proof. Without loss of generality we may assume that X = Y = ω ω . Let A ⊆ X be invariant Borel and B = [f (A)]F . By definition B is Σ11 . We show that B is also Π11 , hence it is Borel by Suslin’s Theorem 1.6.3. For this let α denote the action of G on X. Let z be a real such that α, f, A, F ∈ Δ11 (z). We claim that ∀y ∈ B ∃x ∈ Δ11 (y, z) (x ∈ A ∧ f (x)F y). It follows from the claim that B = {y ∈ Y : ∃x ∈ Δ11 (y, z) (x ∈ A ∧ f (x)F y) }, and thus B is Π11 by Kleene’s Theorem 1.7.5. The rest of the proof is thus devoted to a proof of the claim. Fix y ∈ B and x0 ∈ A with f (x0 )F y. Since [x0 ]G = f −1 ([y]F ), there is a Borel code w for [x0 ]G such that w ∈ Δ11 (y, z). We will show that ∃x ∈ Δ11 (w, z) ∩ [x0 ]G , which is enough for establishing the claim. Recall that w is a labeled well-founded tree T, λ on ω. For the convenience of this proof we omit the definition of λ on nonterminal nodes of T and instead assume that nonterminal nodes of T on even levels correspond to countable intersections, those on odd levels correspond to countable unions, and for terminal nodes t ∈ T , λ(t) ∈ ω ω correspond to basic open sets Nλ(t) . With this convention we have that x ∈ [x0 ]G ⇐⇒ ∀i∃j . . . ∃k x ∈ Nλ(i,j,...,k) . We consider a game G(s, c), with s ∈ ω <ω and c a Borel code for a closed set, played as follows: I i0 i1 i2 ··· II u, j0 j1 j2
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
123
where i0 , j0 , i1 , j1 , · · · ∈ ω and t ∈ ω <ω . The rules of the game are that s u and that i0 , j0 , . . . ∈ T . The play is finished when a terminal node t of T has been played. Then Player II wins if ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g ·x ∈ Nu ∩Bc ∩Nλ(t) ) provided that ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g · x ∈ Ns ∩ Bc ). It is easy to see that Player II has a winning strategy in the game G(s, c). ∗ In fact, suppose that ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃ g ∈ G (g · x ∈ Ns ∩ Bc ). Suppose also [x0 ]G = i0 j0 Ci0 ,j0 where each Ci0 ,j0 is the Borel set coded by the tree Ti0 ,j0 . Then for any i0 , we have that [x0 ]G ∩ Ns ∩ Bc ⊆ {[x0 ]G ∩ Nu ∩ Bc ∩ Ci0 ,j0 : s u, j0 ∈ ω}. Since the right-hand side is a countable union it follows that for some u s and j0 ∈ ω, ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g · · · x ∈ Nu ∩ Bc ∩ Ci0 ,j0 ). This gives Player II’s first move. Similar arguments apply to subsequent moves. And the winning condition for Player II is maintained throughout the play. We also need to note that Player II has a winning strategy Γ(s, c) which is in Δ11 (w, z, s, c). For this note that the winning condition is in fact Borel since ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g·x ∈ . . . ) is equivalent to ∀x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g·x ∈ . . . ). Thus Γ(s, c) can be defined by choosing the lexicographically least moves that maintain the winning condition. Now let P = {u ∈ ω <ω : ∃v ∈ ω <ω (u, v) is a terminal node of T }, where (u, v) denote the shuffle of u and v. Thus P consists of all legitimate moves for Player I in the above game. Let
i∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g · x ∈ Nλ(u,v) ∩ Ns(i ) ).
Granting such a sequence, let x = i s(i). Then ∀u ∈ P ∃v∃i∀i > i (Ns(i ) ∩ Nλ(u,v) = ∅). It follows that ∀u ∈ P ∃v (x is a limit point of Nλ(u,v) ). Since Nλ(u,v) is closed, we have that ∀u ∈ P ∃v (x ∈ Nλ(u,v) ), and hence x ∈ [x0 ]G . To define the sequence we use induction and simultaneously define a sequence c(i) of Borel codes for closed sets. To begin with let s(0) = ∅ and Bc(0) = X. In general suppose s(i) and c(i) have been defined and suppose Γ(s(i), c(i)) is the winning strategy for Player II in the game G(s(i), c(i)) defined in the preceding paragraph. Let Player I play ui and apply Γ(s(i), c(i)) to obtain s(i + 1) s(i) as a part of Player II’s response. Let v be the other part of Player II’s moves. Then let Bc(i+1) = Bc ∩Nλ(ui ,v) . To verify that this is as required, let u ∈ P . Let ui = u and v be played by Player II according to the construction. Then for all i > i, Bc(i ) ⊆ Nλ(u,v) . Since Γ(s(i), c(i)) is winning for Player II, we have that ∃x ∈ [x0 ]G ∃∗ g ∈ G (g ·x ∈ Nλ(u,v) ∩Ns(i ) ). This finishes the proof of the theorem.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
124
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Corollary 5.2.4 Let G be a Polish group, X a Borel G-space, Y a standard Borel space, and F a Borel equivalence relation on Y . Suppose f : X → Y is a Borel reduction X X to F such that [f (X)]F = Y . Then EG ∼B F . from EG Proof. The above proof gives rise to a Borel function g : Y → X such that for any y ∈ [f (X)]F , letting x = g(y), then f (x)F y. Note that the definition of x does not depend on the choice of x0 . It is easy to see that g is a reduction X from F to EG . Exercise 5.2.1 Show that the Borel reduction constructed in Corollary 5.2.4 is also faithful. Exercise 5.2.2 Let E, F be Borel orbit equivalence relations on Polish spaces X, Y , respectively. Show that if E ≤B F then there is an invariant Borel set Z ⊆ Y such that E ∼B F Z.
5.3
Perfect set theorems for equivalence relations
In this and the next sections we study Borel reductions involving the identity relations. Recall from Proposition 5.1.12 that reduction from the identity relation on 2ω is equivalent to the existence of perfectly many equivalence classes. In this section we give various sufficient conditions for there being perfectly many equivalence classes for an equivalence relation on a Polish space. Again category arguments are playing the vital role in this study. Theorem 5.3.1 (Mycielski) Let X be a Polish space and E a meager equivalence relation on X. Then id(2ω ) c E. Proof. First note that X is perfect. In fact, otherwise X must contain at least one isolated point x, and any equivalence relation on X must contain the open set {(x, x)}, and therefore is nonmeager.
Let d < 1 be a compatible complete metric on X. Let E ⊆ n Fn with Fn ⊆ X 2 closed and nowhere dense for all n ∈ ω. We may assume that id(X) ⊆ F0 and Fn ⊆ Fn+1 for all n ∈ ω. We define a sequence (Us )s∈2<ω of open sets in X by induction on lh(s) such that, for all s ∈ 2<ω , (i) diam(Us ) ≤ 2−lh(s) ; (ii) Us 0 , Us 1 ⊆ Us ; Us 0 ∩ Us 1 = ∅;
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
125
(iii) for all s, t ∈ 2<ω with lh(s) = lh(t) = n+1 and s = t, (Us ×Ut )∩Fn = ∅. To begin let U∅ = X. Assume now that for all s with lh(s) = n the set Us has been defined. We define all Us 0 and Us 1 . For notational convenience we enumerate all Us for lh(s) = n as U1 , . . . , Ui , . . . , Uk with 1 ≤ i ≤ k = 2n . Since X is perfect there are disjoint open subsets Vi , Vk+i ⊆ Ui for all 1 ≤ i ≤ k with diam(Vi ), diam(Vk+i ) ≤ 2−n−1 , and by regularity we may assume that Vi , Vk+i ⊆ Ui and Vi ∩Vk+i = ∅. Thus we have obtained a collection {Vi }1≤i≤2k of disjoint open sets satisfying (i) and (ii). To guarantee (iii) we make the following observation. Since Fn is nowhere dense, for any disjoint nonempty open sets W1 and W2 , W1 × W2 ⊆ Fn . It follows that there are nonempty W1 ⊆ W1 and W2 ⊆ W2 with (W1 × W2 ) ∩ Fn = ∅. Applying this observation successively to all pairs (i, j) with 1 ≤ i, j ≤ 2k and i = j, we obtain open sets Vi ⊆ Vi such that, for all such pairs (i, j), (Vi × Vj ) ∩ Fn = ∅. Now condition (iii) is satisfied if we let Us 0 = Vi and Us 1 = Vk+i where Ui = Us . ω For u ∈ 2 we now let f (u) to be the unique element of the set n Uun . Then f is a continuous function from 2ω into X. To finish the proof of the theorem we only need to verify that (f (u), f (v)) ∈ E for u = v. For this let u, v ∈ 2ω with u = v. Let n be the least integer with u(n) = v(n). Then for all m > n, u m = v m. By (iii), (Uum × Uvm ) ∩ Fm = ∅. Thus (f (u), f (v)) ∈ Fm for all m > n. Therefore (f (u), f (v)) ∈ E as required. Corollary 5.3.2 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X. If there is a nonempty open set U ⊆ X such that E is meager on U × U , then id(2ω ) c E. Corollary 5.3.3 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X. Suppose E has the Baire property. If every E-equivalence class is meager, then there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Proof. The condition can be stated as ∀x ∀∗ y (x, y) ∈ E. By Kuratowski– Ulam Theorem 3.2.1 it follows that E is meager. Another corollary of Theorem 5.3.1 concerning the Gandy–Harrington topology is going to play an important role in the proof of Silver’s theorem later in this section. Corollary 5.3.4 Let τ be the Gandy–Harrington topology on the Baire space ω ω and E an equivalence relation on ω ω . If there is a Σ11 set V ⊆ ω ω such that E is τ × τ -meager in V × V , then there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Proof. Let Y = Xlow be the Polish space of low elements with the Gandy– Harrington topology (Theorem 1.8.5). By the Gandy Basis Theorem 1.8.4
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
126
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
U = Y ∩ V is a nonempty open subset of Y . Now E is meager on U × U , and thus by Corollary 5.3.2 there is a continuous reduction f : 2ω → Y witnessing id(2ω ) E. Since τ is finer than the usual topology f as a function from 2ω into ω ω is still continuous. Thus there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. The following theorem, often referred to as the Silver dichotomy theorem, is the first of a series of dichotomy theorems undoubtedly occupying the center of the invariant descriptive set theory of equivalence relations. It is also important because of its proof presented here, due to Harrington, which is an elegant example of the use of effective descriptive set theoretic methods in establishing an important result of classical character. Theorem 5.3.5 (Silver) Let X be a standard Borel space and E a coanalytic equivalence relation on X. Then either there are countably many E-equivalence classes or there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Proof. Without loss of generality we may assume X = ω ω . By relativization we also assume that E is Π11 . Let τ be the Gandy–Harrington topology on ω ω . First we define V = {x ∈ X : there is no Δ11 set U such that x ∈ U ⊆ [x]E }. We claim that if V = ∅ then there are only countably many E-equivalence classes. This is because, if V = ∅, then every E-equivalence class contains some nonempty Δ11 set. Since there are only countably many Δ11 sets, it follows that there are only countably many E-equivalence classes. For the rest of the proof we assume V = ∅. We claim that V ∈ Σ11 . Indeed, x ∈ V ⇐⇒ ∀U ∈ Δ11 ( x ∈ U → ∃y ∈ U (x, y) ∈ E ). With the coding of Δ11 sets given by Theorem 1.7.4 we get that x ∈ V ⇐⇒ ∀n [(n ∈ D ∧ x ∈ Pn+ ) → ∃y (y ∈ Pn− ∧ (x, y) ∈ E)]. This shows that V ∈ Σ11 . To finish the proof we claim that E is τ × τ -meager in V × V . Then by the above corollary there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. We establish the claim in several steps. As the first step, we check that for every x ∈ V there is no Σ11 set U such that x ∈ U ⊆ [x]E . To see this, assume toward a contradiction that x ∈ V and U ∈ Σ11 and x ∈ U ⊆ [x]E . Then note that [x]E is Π11 since y ∈ [x]E ⇐⇒ ∀z(z ∈ U → (y, z) ∈ E). Now by the separation property for Σ11 sets (see Theorem 1.7.1 and the remarks following it) there is W ∈ Δ11 such that U ⊆ W ⊆ [x]E , thus x ∈ V .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
127
From this it follows immediately that every nonempty Σ11 subset U of V meets more than one E-equivalence class. Next we note that every set involved has the Baire property in the Gandy– Harrington topology or its products. Specifically, the equivalence relation E as a subset of ω ω × ω ω has the Baire property in τ × τ , and each equivalence class [x]E has the Baire property in τ . This is because, by a theorem of Nikodym (see the remarks preceeding Proposition 2.3.1), the collection of all sets with the Baire property in any topological space is closed under the Suslin operation. Now both E and [x]E are Π11 , and therefore coanalytic, and therefore their complements are results of the Suslin operation applied to sequences of closed sets in the usual topology of ω ω . Since the Gandy–Harrington topology is coarser, they continue to be the results of Suslin operation, and thus have the Baire property in the sense of τ . This allows us to use the Kuratowski– Ulam Theorem 3.2.1. Now to show that E is τ × τ -meager in V × V , by the Kuratowski–Ulam theorem it suffices to show that for all x ∈ V , [x]E is τ -meager in V . Thus it suffices to show that for all x ∈ V , [x]E is not τ -comeager in any U ⊆ V where U ∈ Σ11 . Again toward a final contradiction assume that for some x ∈ V and U ⊆ V , U ∈ Σ11 , [x]E is τ -comeager in U . Now by Louveau’s lemma Exercise 1.8.3, if [x]E is τ -comeager in U ∈ Σ11 , then [x]E × [x]E is comeager in U × U in the Gandy–Harrington topology of ω ω × ω ω . Since (U × U ) ∩ (ω ω × ω ω − E) is nonempty and Σ11 , we have that ([x]E × [x]E ) ∩ (U × U ) ∩ (ω ω × ω ω − E) = ∅, which is a contradiction. Exercise 5.3.1 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X with the Baire property. Suppose every E-equivalence class is countable. Show that there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Exercise 5.3.2 Let X be a Polish space, U ⊆ X open, and E an equivalence relation on X with the Baire property. Suppose τ is a strong Choquet topology on X finer than the Polish topology. Show that if E is τ × τ -meager on U × U , then there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Exercise 5.3.3 Let E be a Π11 equivalence relation on ω ω . Show that the following are equivalent: (i) There are only countably many E-equivalence classes. (ii) For every x ∈ ω ω there exists a Δ11 set U with x ∈ U ⊆ [x]E . (iii) For every x ∈ ω ω there exists a Σ11 set U with x ∈ U ⊆ [x]E . (iv) Every E-equivalence class is Π11 .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
128
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 5.3.4 Let E be a Π11 equivalence relation on ω ω with only countably many classes. Show that E is a union of countably many Δ11 relations. In particular E is Borel.
5.4
Smooth equivalence relations
Definition 5.4.1 Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. We call E smooth or concretely classifiable if E ≤B id(2ω ). It is clear from the definition that smooth equivalence relations are Borel. Since any two uncountable standard Borel spaces are Borel isomorphic, E is smooth iff E ≤B id(X) for any uncountable Polish space X. Among the countable Polish spaces we consider ω with the discrete topology and let id(ω) denote its identity relation. The following is an immediate corollary of the Silver dichotomy theorem. Theorem 5.4.2 Let E be a smooth equivalence relation. Then exactly one of the following holds: (I) E ∼B id(2ω ); (II) E ≤B id(ω). Proof. By the Silver dichotomy theorem either there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes or else there are only countably many E-equivalence classes. In the first case we have both id(2ω ) ≤B E and, by smoothness, E ≤B id(2ω ). Hence E ∼B id(2ω ). For the second case let C0 , C1 , . . . enumerate all the E-equivalence classes. Then the function θ defined by θ(x) = n iff x ∈ Cn gives a Borel reduction from E to id(ω). The converse of this theorem is trivial. Easily we obtain a complete classification of smooth equivalence relations in terms of Borel bireducibility (see Exercise 5.4.2). Definition 5.4.3 Let E be an equivalence relation on a space X and S a family of subsets of X. We say that E is generated by S if for any x, y ∈ X, xEy ⇐⇒ for any S ∈ S, x ∈ S iff y ∈ S. In this situation S is also called a generating family or a separating family for E. If X is a Borel space then a generating family S is called Borel if every element of S is Borel.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility
129
Proposition 5.4.4 Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Then E is smooth iff there is a countable Borel generating family for E. Proof. Let S = {S0 , S1 , . . . , Sn , . . . } be a countable Borel generating family for E. Define θ : X → 2ω by θ(x)(n) = 1 ⇐⇒ x ∈ Sn . Then θ is a Borel reduction from E to id(2ω ). Conversely, suppose θ : X → 2ω is a Borel reduction. Then define Sn = {z ∈ 2ω : θ(z)(n) = 1}. We have that S = {S0 , S1 , . . . , Sn , . . . } is a countable Borel generating family for E. Corollary 5.4.5 Let E be a smooth equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then there is a finer Polish topology σ on X such that E is closed as a subset of (X 2 , σ × σ). Proof. Let S0 , S1 , . . . , Sn , . . . enumerate a countable Borel generating family for E. By Theorem 4.2.3 there is a finer Polish topology σ on X such that each of Sn is σ-clopen. Now xEy ⇐⇒ ∀n ( x ∈ Sn ⇐⇒ y ∈ Sn ), and thus E is closed in (X 2 , σ × σ). Next we give some sufficient conditions for smoothness. First we show that closed equivalence relations are smooth. To do this we establish the following useful general lemma which is reminiscent of the Luzin separation theorem for Σ11 sets. Lemma 5.4.6 Let E be a Σ11 equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Let A, B ⊆ X be disjoint Σ11 E-invariant sets. Then there is an E-invariant Borel set C with A ⊆ C and B ∩ C = ∅. Proof. Let A0 = A and C0 be a Borel set separating A0 and B by the Luzin separation theorem. That is, A0 ⊆ C0 and B ∩ C0 = ∅. Let A1 = [C0 ]E . Then A1 is Σ11 and A1 ∩ B = ∅. By the separation theorem again let C1 be a Borel set separating A1 and B. Continue this way, and we obtain A = A0 ⊆ C0 ⊆ A1 ⊆ C1 ⊆ A2 ⊆ . . . Cn ⊆ An ⊆ . . . 1 where Cn is Borel
and An is E-invariant, Σ1 and disjoint from B. Let now C = n Cn = n An . Then C is invariant Borel, A ⊆ C, and B ∩ C = ∅ as required.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
130
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proposition 5.4.7 Let E be a closed equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then E is smooth.
Proof. Since E is closed we can write X 2 − E = n Un × Vn where Un , Vn are basic open sets. Let An = [Un ]E and Bn = [Vn ]E . Then we have that An and Bn are disjoint Σ11 E-invariant sets. By Lemma 5.4.6 there is E-invariant Borel Cn such that An ⊆ Cn and Bn ∩ Cn = ∅. We claim that {Cn : n ∈ ω} is a generating family for E, and thus E is smooth. To see this, let x, y ∈ X be such that x ∈ Cn ⇐⇒ y ∈ Cn for all n ∈ ω. Assume (x, y) ∈ E. Then for some n ∈ ω we have that x ∈ Un and y ∈ Vn . However, this implies that x ∈ An ⊆ Cn and y ∈ Bn ⊆ X − Cn , a contradiction. In the next chapter we will show that any Borel equivalence relation whose equivalence classes are Gδ is smooth. For now we turn to the following easy fact. Proposition 5.4.8 Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space. If E has a Borel selector then E is smooth. Proof.
The selector function is a reduction.
Note that not every closed equivalence relation has a Borel selector (Exercise 5.4.6), hence the converse of the above proposition is not true. Next we give a characterization for the existence of Borel selectors for smooth equivalence relations. Definition 5.4.9 Let X be a standard Borel space and E an equivalence relation on X. We call E idealistic if there is an assignment C → IC that associates with each E-equivalence class C a σ-ideal IC of subsets of C such that (i) C ∈ IC ; (ii) for each Borel set A ⊆ X 2 the set AI defined by x ∈ AI ⇐⇒ {y ∈ [x] : (x, y) ∈ A} ∈ I[x] is Borel. Clause (ii) in the above definition is often referred to as Borelness of the map C → IC . The following proposition helps motivate the definition. Proposition 5.4.10 X is idealistic. Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then EG
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Reducibility Proof.
131
Let x ∈ X and C = [x]G . Then define IC on C by S ∈ IC ⇐⇒ {g ∈ G : g · x ∈ S} is meager in G.
It is easy to check that IC is a σ-ideal and C ∈ IC . To see that C → IC is Borel, let A ⊆ X 2 be a Borel set. Then x ∈ AI ⇐⇒ {y ∈ [x] : (x, y) ∈ A} ∈ I[x] ⇐⇒ {g ∈ G : (x, g · x) ∈ A} is meager in G ⇐⇒ ∀∗ g ∈ G (x, g · x) ∈ A, hence AI is Borel. Theorem 5.4.11 (Kechris) Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Then E has a Borel selector iff E is smooth and idealistic.
Proof. (⇒) Let s be a Borel selector for E. We show that E is idealistic. For any x ∈ X and C = [x]E , define IC on C by S ∈ IC ⇐⇒ s(x) ∈ S. Then IC is a σ-ideal and C ∈ IC . To see that C → IC is Borel, let A ⊆ X 2 be a Borel set. Then x ∈ AI ⇐⇒ {y ∈ [x] : (x, y) ∈ A} ∈ I[x] ⇐⇒ (x, s(x)) ∈ A is Borel. (⇐) Suppose E is smooth and idealistic. Let f : X → 2ω witness that E ≤B 2ω . By Theorem 4.2.3 we may assume X is Polish and f is continuous. Let F be the graph of f , that is, (x, y) ∈ F ⇐⇒ f (x) = y. Then F ⊆ X × 2ω is closed. By the usual argument we can obtain a sequence
(Fs )s∈ω<ω of nonempty closed subsets of X × 2ω so that F∅ = F , Fs = n∈ω Fs n , and diam(Fs ) < 2−lh(s) . For each y ∈ 2ω and s ∈ ω <ω , let Fsy = {x ∈ X : (x, y) ∈ Fs }. Then for any E-equivalence class C = [x]E , if f (x) = y then F∅y = C and for any
<ω y s ∈ ω , Fs = n∈ω Fsy n . Now let C → IC witness that E is idealistic. Then F∅y ∈ IC , and moreover if Fsy ∈ IC then for some n ∈ ω, Fsy n ∈ IC . Thus if we define T y = {s ∈ ω <ω : Fsy ∈ IC }, then T y is a tree on ω. Let g(y) be the leftmost branch of T y . It is straightforward to check that g is y a Borel function. Furthermore, n∈ω Fg(y)n is a singleton, and we name its unique element h(y). It is clear that (h(y), y) ∈ F and therefore h(y) ∈ C. Let H be the set of all h(y) thus obtained. It is clear that H is a transversal for E on X. To finish the proof it suffices to show that H is Borel. For this, simply note that y ). x ∈ H ⇐⇒ ∀n ∈ ω (x ∈ Fg(y)n
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
132
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Corollary 5.4.12 (Burgess) X Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. If EG is smooth then it has a Borel selector. Exercise 5.4.1 Show that for any equivalence relation E on a Polish space, id(ω) ≤B E iff there are infinitely many E-equivalence classes. Exercise 5.4.2 Show that if an equivalence relation E is smooth then either E ∼B id(2ω ), or E ∼B id(ω), or for some finite n ∈ ω, E ∼B id(n), where id(n) denotes the identity relation on any finite set of size n. Exercise 5.4.3 Let E be an equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Show that E is smooth iff there is a finer Polish topology σ on X such that E is closed in (X 2 , σ × σ). Exercise 5.4.4 Show that an intersection of countably many smooth equivalence relations on a Polish space is smooth. Exercise 5.4.5 Let G be a compact Polish group and X a Borel G-space. X is smooth. Show that EG Exercise 5.4.6 Let F ⊆ ω ω × ω ω be closed so that {x : ∃y (x, y) ∈ F } is Σ11 but not Borel. Let X = F and define the equivalence relation E on X by (x1 , y1 )E(x2 , y2 ) ⇐⇒ x1 = x2 . Show that E is closed but has no Borel selector. Exercise 5.4.7 Show that the orbit equivalence relation induced by the conjugacy action of S∞ on itself is smooth. Exercise 5.4.8 Let G be a Polish group and X be a Polish G-space. Suppose X X is Gδ . Show that EG is smooth. (Hint: The map x → [x]G every orbit of EG is a Borel reduction.)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 6 The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
The Glimm–Effros dichotomy is undoubtedly the most important theoretical result that helped form the subject of invariant descriptive set theory. In the context of operator algebra Glimm and Effros have obtained the dichotomy for locally compact group actions and more generally Fσ orbit equivalence relations. Nowadays the terminology usually refers to the remarkable theorem for all Borel equivalence relations proved by Harrington, Kechris, and Louveau. The theorem and its proof were so influential that for a while the main activity of the field was to prove new dichotomy theorems. For orbit equivalence relations the Glimm–Effros dichotomy have been obtained by Solecki, Hjorth, Becker, and others. Another remarkable connection with other fields of mathematics is the study of hyperfinite equivalence relations. To this date there are still intriguing open problems around which exciting research is actively going on.
6.1
The equivalence relation E0
Definition 6.1.1 The equivalence relation E0 is the relation of eventual agreement on 2ω , that is, it is defined by xE0 y ⇐⇒ ∃m ∀n ≥ m x(n) = y(n). We also consider the eventual agreement relation on ω ω , denoted by E0 (ω). Proposition 6.1.2 E0 ∼B E0 (ω). Proof. The identity embedding from 2ω into ω ω is a reduction from E0 to E0 (ω). To define a reduction f to witness E0 (ω) ≤B E0 , fix a computable bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω. Given x ∈ ω ω , let f (x) ∈ 2ω be defined by f (x)(n, k) = the (k + 1)-th least significant digit of the binary expansion of x(n).
133 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
134
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
f is actually continuous, even computable. To see that it is a desired reduction, assume that xE0 (ω)y. Suppose x(n) = y(n) for n ≥ m. Then for all n ≥ m and k ∈ ω, f (x)(n, k) = f (y)(n, k). For n < m, since the binary expansions of x(n) and y(n) are of finite lengths, there is kn such that for all k ≥ kn , f (x)(n, k) = 0 = f (y)(n, k). Thus for any n, k ∈ ω, if f (x)(n, k) = f (y)(n, k) we must have that n < m and k < kn , and there are only finitely many such pairs n, k. This shows that f (x)E0 f (y). Conversely, if x E0 y, then the set A = {n ∈ ω : x(n) = y(n)} is infinite. For each n ∈ A, let kn be such that the (kn + 1)-th least significant digits of binary expansions of x(n) and y(n) differ. Then we have that f (x)(n, kn ) = f (y)(n, kn ) for all n ∈ A. This means that f (x) and f (y) are not E0 (ω)equivalent. Definition 6.1.3 The Vitali equivalence relation Ev is the equivalence relation on R defined by xEv y ⇐⇒ x − y ∈ Q. The terminology is motivated by the theorem of Vitali in real analysis that any transversal of Ev is not Lebesgue measurable. Proposition 6.1.4 E0 ∼B Ev . Proof.
We first show that Ev ≤B E0 . Given x ∈ R, express x as x = a0 +
a2 an a1 + + ··· + + ··· 2! 3! (n + 1)!
where a0 = x and for n > 0, an ∈ {0, 1, . . . , n}. Note that such an expression is uniquely determined. In fact, one can inductively define that an = (x − a0 −
an−1 a1 − ···− )(n + 1)!. 2! n!
This allows us to define a function f : R → ω ω by f (x)(n) = an . It is clear that f is Borel (but not continuous). To see that f is a reduction, let x, y ∈ R. First assume that xEv y. Without loss of generality assume x > y and let k for some k ∈ ω. r = x − y. Let m ∈ ω be the least such that r = (m + 1)! Then for all n > m, f (x)(n) = f (y)(n) from the definition of f . Conversely, assume f (x)E0 f (y). Then the expressions for x and y differ by only finitely many terms, and it is clear that x − y is rational. Thus we have shown that Ev ≤B E0 (ω). But since E0 (ω) ∼B E0 , we have that Ev ≤B E0 .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
135
To show the converse, that E0 ≤B Ev , we follow the same idea. Let x ∈ 2ω be given. We define g(x) = x(0) +
x(1) x(2) x(n) + + ··· + + ··· . 2! 3! (n + 1)!
The series is absolutely convergent, and thus g(x) is well-defined. It follows from the above argument that xE0 y iff g(x)− g(y) ∈ Q. Therefore g is a Borel reduction from E0 to Ev . Note that every E0 -equivalence class is countable. In fact, E0 can be viewed as an orbit equivalence relation of a countable group action, where the acting group is Z<ω 2 , the direct sum of infinitely many copies of the two-element group Z2 . For this reason we also refer to the E0 -equivalence classes as E0 -orbits. Also note that every E0 -orbit is dense. It follows that every E0 -orbit is not Gδ . In fact, a dense Gδ orbit would be comeager, whereas every E0 -orbit is countable, and therefore meager. These obvious facts distinguish E0 from all smooth equivalence relations. In the following we give two proofs of the nonsmoothness of E0 . Definition 6.1.5 Let X be a standard Borel space and E an equivalence relation on X. A σ-finite nonzero Borel measure μ on X is (E−)ergodic if for any E-invariant Borel set A ⊆ X, either μ(A) = 0 or μ(X − A) = 0. The measure μ is (E−)nonatomic if μ(C) = 0 for any E-equivalence class C. Proposition 6.1.6 Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space. If there is an E-nonatomic, E-ergodic measure on X, then E is not smooth. Proof. Let μ be E-nonatomic and E-ergodic. Assume E is smooth, and {Sn }n∈ω a countable Borel generating family for E. Since each Sn is Einvariant, either μ(Sn ) = 0 or μ(X − Sn ) = 0. Consider the set C = {X − Sn : μ(Sn ) = 0} ∩ {Sn : μ(X − Sn ) = 0}. Then μ(X − C) = 0. But C is an equivalence class, hence μ(C) = 0. It follows that μ(X) = 0, a contradiction. Proposition 6.1.7 The usual product measure on 2ω is E0 -nonatomic and E0 -ergodic. Hence E0 is not smooth.
Proof. Let μ be the product measure on 2ω . Since μ is atomless, that is, μ({x}) = 0 for any x ∈ 2ω , and every E0 -orbit is countable, μ is E0 -nonatomic.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
136
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
To see that μ is also E0 -ergodic, let A ⊆ 2ω be an E0 -invariant Borel set. Suppose μ(A) > 0. Let > 0. Then there exists a basic open set Ns such that μ(A ∩ Ns )/μ(Ns ) > 1 − . We claim then that for any t ∈ 2<ω with lh(t) = lh(s), μ(A ∩ Nt )/μ(Nt ) > 1 − . In fact, let ϕs,t : 2ω → 2ω be given by ⎧ if s ⊆ x and t ⊆ x, ⎨ x, ϕs,t (x) = t y, if x = s y, ⎩ s y, if x = t y. Then ϕs,t (Ns ) = Nt and ϕs,t (A ∩ Ns ) = A ∩ Nt , and moreover ϕs,t preserves the measure μ. It follows that μ(A) > 1 − for any > 0, and therefore indeed μ(A) = 1. Definition 6.1.8 Let X be a Polish space and E an equivalence relation on X. We say that E is generically ergodic if every E-invariant Borel set is either meager or comeager. Proposition 6.1.9 Let G be a group of homeomorphisms on a Polish space X. Then the following are equivalent: (i) EG is generically ergodic; (ii) Every nonempty EG -invariant open set is dense; (iii) There is an invariant dense Gδ set Y ⊆ X all of whose orbits are dense in X; (iv) There exists a dense orbit; (v) Every invariant set with the Baire property is meager or comeager. Proof. The implications (i)⇒(ii), (iii)⇒(iv), and (v)⇒(i) are obvious. The implication (iv)⇒(v) follows from Exercise 3.3.2. It remains to show (ii)⇒(iii). Let {Un }n∈ω be a countable base for the topology of X. Every saturation [Un ]G is EG -invariant open, and therefore dense. Let Y = n [Un ]G . Then Y is an EG -invariant dense Gδ set. If x ∈ Y , then [x]G ⊆ [Un ]G and therefore [x]G ∩ Un = ∅. Thus every orbit in Y is dense. Now we have an analog of Proposition 6.1.6 for generically ergodic equivalence relations, whose proof we leave as an exercise (Exercise 6.1.4). Proposition 6.1.10 Let E be an equivalence relation on a Polish space X. If E is generically ergodic and has no comeager orbits, then E is not smooth.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
137
Exercise 6.1.1 Define the tail equivalence relation Et on 2ω by xEt y ⇐⇒ ∃n∃m∀k ( x(n + k) = y(m + k) ). Show that Et is not smooth. Exercise 6.1.2 Show that the Lebesgue measure on R is Ev -nonatomic and Ev -ergodic. Exercise 6.1.3 Show that if E0 ≤B E then there is an E-nonatomic, Eergodic measure. Exercise 6.1.4 Prove Proposition 6.1.10. Exercise 6.1.5 Show that both E0 and Ev are generically ergodic. Exercise 6.1.6 Let X, Y be Polish spaces and G, H be groups of homeoX morphisms on X, Y respectively. Show that if EG is generically ergodic and X Y Z EG ≤c EH then there is a closed invariant subspace Z of Y so that EH is generically ergodic. Exercise 6.1.7 Let G be a countably infinite group acting by shift on 2G . Let EG be the induced orbit equivalence relation. Show that EG is generically ergodic.
6.2
Orbit equivalence relations embedding E0
In this section we give a construction of an embedding of E0 into a given equivalence relation. In particular we will derive the original Glimm–Effros dichotomy theorems. Most theorems about E0 -embeddability require that the equivalence relation is dense and meager. However, we first note that more needs to be assumed. Take the example of the following equivalence relation E on R: xEy ⇐⇒ x = y ∨ (x, y ∈ Q). Then E is dense and meager as a subset of R2 , but E is smooth. The following theorem assumes a condition weaker than a continuous action of a Polish group. Theorem 6.2.1 (Becker–Kechris) Let X be a Polish space and G a group of homeomorphisms of X. Suppose EG is meager and that there is a dense orbit. Then E0 c EG .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
138
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof. Let D be a dense orbit and {Wn }n∈ω be a decreasing sequence of dense open subsets of X 2 with EG ∩ n Wn = ∅. Without loss of generality assume that W0 ∩ {(x, x) : x ∈ X} = ∅. We construct a sequence {Us }s∈2<ω of open sets and elements gs,t ∈ G for s, t ∈ 2<ω and lh(s) = lh(t), such that, for all s, t, u ∈ 2<ω with lh(s) = lh(t) = lh(u): (a) U∅ = X; diam(Us ) < 2−lh(s) ; Us 0 , Us 1 ⊆ Us ; Us 0 ∩ Us 1 = ∅; (b) If lh(s) = lh(t) = n and s(n − 1) = t(n − 1), then Us × Ut ⊆ Wn ; −1 (c) gs,t · Us = Ut ; gs,s = 1G ; gt,s = gs,t ; gs,u = gt,u gs,t ;
(d) If n ≤ lh(s) = lh(t) is the largest with s(n − 1) = t(n − 1), then gs,t = gsn,tn . Granting the construction, we may continuously embed E0 into E G as follows. For x ∈ 2ω , we let f (x) be the unique element of the singleton n Uxn . Then f is a continuous embedding of 2ω into X. We claim that f is also a reduction from E0 into EG . Suppose first x E 0 y. Then for infinitely many n, x(n − 1) = y(n − 1). By (c), Uxn × Uyn ⊆ Wn for infinitely many n, and therefore (f (x), f (y)) ∈ n Wn ⊆ X 2 − EG . On the other hand, suppose xE0 y and n is the largest such that x(n − 1) = y(n − 1). Let g = gxn,yn . Then by (d) gxm,ym = g for any m ≥ n. Since g ·Uxm = Uym for all m ≥ n, we have that g · f (x) = f (y), and thus f (x)EG f (y). The construction is by induction on lh(s). We start with lh(s) = 1. At this stage we need to find disjoint open sets U0 , U1 and g0,1 ∈ G such that diam(U0 ), diam(U1 ) < 1/2, g0,1 · U0 = U1 , and U0 × U1 ⊆ W1 . To do this we first let V0 , V1 ⊆ X be open sets such that V0 × V1 ⊆ W1 . Without loss of generality we may assume diam(V0 ), diam(V1 ) < 1/2. By the density of D we can find x0 ∈ D ∩ V0 and x1 ∈ D ∩ V1 . Let g0,1 be an arbitrary g ∈ G such that g ·x0 = x1 . Let now U0 = g −1 (g ·V0 ∩V1 ) and U1 = g ·U0 . Since U0 ⊆ V0 and U1 ⊆ V1 , we have the required properties. In the inductive step assume Us and gs,t have been defined for all s, t with lh(s) = lh(t) ≤ n. We need to define Us i and gs i,t j for all s, t with lh(s) = lh(t) = n and i, j ∈ {0, 1}. First note that it is required by the condition (d) that gs i,t i = gs,t for all s, t with lh(s) = lh(t) = n and i ∈ {0, 1}. Therefore in view of (c) all gs i,t j will be determined once we have defined g0 0,0 1 , where 0 here stands for the element s with lh(s) = n and s(k) = 0 for all k < n. Similarly, all Us i will be determined once we have defined U0 0 . As in the base step we start with choosing disjoint open sets V0 0 and V0 1 , both of diameter < 2−n−1 , whose closures are contained in U0 , and so that V0 0 × V0 1 ⊆ Wn+1 . The last requirement can be fulfilled since Wn+1 is dense open. For any other s with lh(s) = n, we can then let Vs 0 = g0,s · V0 0 and Vs 1 = g0,s · V0 1 . Note that Vs 0 and Vs 1 are disjoint, open, and their closures are contained in Us . By shrinking we may assume also that each of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
139
them has diameter < 2−n−1 . Note that in the shrinking process we always maintain that g0,s · V0 i = Vs i . We next go through a finite number of steps to shrink the sets Vs i so as to guarantee that Vs 0 × Vt 1 ⊆ Wn+1 . Again in this shrinking process we always maintain that g0,s ·V0i = Vs i . To illustrate the argument we consider V0 0 and V0 1 . Since Wn+1 is dense open, it meets the set V0 0 × V0 1 . Thus we could shrink both of them so as to guarantee that V0 0 × V0 1 ⊆ Wn+1 . Remember this could result in other sets being shrunken too. In general, as we go through all possible pairs Vs 0 and Vt 1 , each of the sets in the collection could be shrunken, but the requirements fulfilled in the earlier process are maintained. Thus at the end of this shrinking process, we obtained open sets satisfying the properties prescribed by (a) and (b). Now by the density of D we may find x0 0 ∈ V0 0 and x0 1 ∈ V0 1 . Let g0 0,0 1 be an arbitrary g ∈ G such that g · x0 0 = x0 1 . Finally let U0 0 = g −1 (g · V0 0 ∩ V0 1 ). As remarked above, all other sets Us i and elements gs i,t j are determined. This finishes the proof of the theorem. Corollary 6.2.2 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Suppose there is no Gδ X orbit. Then E0 c EG . Proof. Let x ∈ X be arbitrary and consider Y = [x]G . Then Y is a Polish Y X G-space and EG c EG via the identity embedding. In Y there is obviously a dense orbit. Since there is no Gδ orbit in X, the same is true for Y . It follows from Effros’ theorem that every orbit is meager in itself, and in Y is analytic, it has the Baire property. particular meager in Y . Since EG Y Y By the Kuratowski–Ulam theorem EG is meager. Thus E0 c EG and so X E0 c EG . The corollary is very useful since it explicitly relates the descriptive complexity of orbits to the complexity of the entire equivalence relation. It is usually easier to investigate the complexity of a particular orbit. For instance, in a Baire space a dense Fσ set with a dense complement is not Gδ , since otherwise both the set and its complement would be dense Gδ , hence having a nonempty intersection. Using this it is easy to show that E0 and Ev have no Gδ orbits. The following theorem establishes a strong dichotomy if the Polish action meets some strong requirement. From it we can deduce the original Glimm– Effros dichotomy theorems.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
140
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 6.2.3 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Suppose every Gδ orbit is X . In particular, either also Fσ . Then either every orbit is Gδ or else E0 c EG X X EG is smooth or else E0 c EG . X Proof. Suppose E0 c EG . We show that every orbit is Gδ . Let x ∈ X. Consider Y = {y ∈ X : [y]G = [x]G }.
It is easy to see that Y is invariant. We also note that Y is Gδ . To see this, let U be a countable base for the topology of X. Then ∅)∧ y ∈ Y ⇐⇒ ∀U ∈ U ( U ∩ [x]G = ∅ ⇒ U ∩ [y]G = ∀U ∈ U ( U ∩ [y]G = ∅ ⇒ U ∩ [x]G = ∅) ∅ ⇒ y ∈ [U ]G )∧ ⇐⇒ ∀U ∈ U ( U ∩ [x]G = ∀U ∈ U ( U ∩ [x]G = ∅ ⇒ y ∈ [U ]G ). Since [U ]G is an open set, the first condition is Gδ and the second is closed. It follows that Y is Polish, and in fact a Polish G-space with the inherited action Y X Y c EG via the identity embedding, we have that E0 c EG . of G. Since EG Now by Corollary 6.2.2 there is a Gδ orbit in Y . Let [y]G ⊆ Y be Gδ . It is also true that every orbit of Y is dense. Hence Y cannot contain more than one orbit. In fact, by our assumption Y − [y]G is also Gδ , hence if it were nonempty then it would be dense Gδ and meeting [y]G , a contradiction. It follows that Y = [x]G , and hence [x]G is Gδ . X X Finally by Exercise 5.4.8 if every orbit of EG is Gδ then EG is smooth. Corollary 6.2.4 (Effros) X is Fσ . Then Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Suppose EG X X either EG is smooth or else E0 c EG .
Proof. Since the equivalence relation is Fσ every orbit is Fσ too; in particular, every Gδ orbit is also Fσ . Corollary 6.2.4 is the original Glimm–Effros dichotomy theorem, proved by Effros, strengthening earlier work of Glimm for locally compact Polish group actions (see Exercise 6.2.2). Exercise 6.2.1 Consider the following equivalence relation E on Rω : xEy ⇐⇒ x − y ∈ 1 ⇐⇒
∞ n=0
Show that E0 c E.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
|x(n) − y(n)| < ∞.
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
141
Exercise 6.2.2 (Glimm) Let G be a locally compact Polish group and X a X X is smooth or else E0 c EG . Polish G-space. Then either EG Exercise 6.2.3 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Define an equivalence relation F on X by xF y ⇐⇒ [x]G = [y]G . X ⊆ F. (a) Verify that F is an equivalence relation and show that EG
(b) Show that F is Gδ . X (c) Show that xF y ⇐⇒ for all EG -invariant open (or closed) sets C, x ∈ C iff y ∈ C.
6.3
The Harrington–Kechris–Louveau theorem
In this section we prove the Glimm–Effros dichotomy theorem for Borel equivalence relations [64]. This is again a theorem of classical character for which the only known proof uses effectively descriptive set theory. Theorem 6.3.1 (Harrington–Kechris–Louveau) Let E be a Borel equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then either E is smooth or else E0 c E. The real theorem being proved is the following effective version of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy. Theorem 6.3.1 follows immediately by relativization. Theorem 6.3.2 Let E be a Δ11 equivalence relation on ω ω . Then either there is a Δ11 generating family for E or else E0 c E. The rest of this section is devoted to a proof of Theorem 6.3.2. We leave further remarks and corollaries to the next section. First we state an effective version of Lemma 5.4.6. The proof is left as an exercise (Exercise 6.3.1). Lemma 6.3.3 Let E be a Σ11 equivalence relation on ω ω . Let A, B be disjoint Σ11 E-invariant sets. Then there is a Δ11 E-invariant set C with A ⊆ C and B ∩ C = ∅. Next for any Σ11 equivalence relation E on ω ω we define a derived equivalence relation E ∗ by xE ∗ y ⇐⇒ for all Δ11 E-invariant sets C, x ∈ C iff y ∈ C. Then the following lemma collects some basic properties of E ∗ .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
142
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Lemma 6.3.4 E ∗ ⊇ E is a Σ11 equivalence relation with a Δ11 generating family. Proof. It follows straightforward from the definition of E ∗ that E ⊆ E ∗ , E ∗ is an equivalence relation, and that E ∗ has a Δ11 generating family, that is, the family of all Δ11 E-invariant sets. We show that E ∗ is Σ11 . Using the coding in Theorem 1.7.4 we have xE ∗ y ⇐⇒ ∀n { ∃w∃z (w ∈ Pn− ∧ z ∈ Pn+ ∧ wEz ) ∨ [ ( x ∈ Pn+ ⇒ y ∈ Pn− ) ∧ ( y ∈ Pn+ ⇒ x ∈ Pn− ) ]} . Thus E ∗ is Σ11 . To consider further properties of E ∗ we take into account the Gandy– Harrington topologies. Let τ be the Gandy–Harrington topology on ω ω . Let τ 2 = τ ×τ be the product topology on (ω ω )2 and τ2 be the Gandy–Harrington topology on (ω ω )2 . Then τ 2 ⊆ τ2 . Lemma 6.3.5 E ∗ is Gδ in τ 2 . Proof.
Let C be the (countable) family of all Δ11 E-invariant sets. Then E∗ =
{(C × C) ∪ [(ω ω − C) × (ω ω − C)]}.
C∈C
Since (ω ω , τ ) is a second countable Baire space, it follows that E ∗ is Baire. Lemma 6.3.6 E ∗ is the closure of E in τ 2 . Proof. We first show that E is dense in E ∗ . For this we show that, for any Σ11 A, B ⊆ ω ω , if (A × B) ∩ E = ∅, then (A × B) ∩ E ∗ = ∅. Assume A, B are Σ11 sets with (A × B) ∩ E = ∅. Then [A]E ∩ [B]E = ∅. Since both [A]E and [B]E are Σ11 , by Lemma 6.3.3 there is a Δ11 E-invariant set C with A ⊆ C and B ∩ C = ∅. Now for any x ∈ A and y ∈ B, x ∈ C but y ∈ C, hence x E ∗ y. This means (A × B) ∩ E ∗ = ∅ as required. Next we show that E ∗ is closed in τ 2 . For this let (x, y) ∈ E ∗ , then there is a Δ11 E-invariant set C with x ∈ C and y ∈ C. Let A = C and B = ω ω − C. Then both A and B are Σ11 sets, and (A × B) ∩ E ∗ = ∅. This shows that (ω ω )2 − E ∗ is open in τ 2 , and therefore E ∗ is closed.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
143
If E ∗ = E then E has a Δ11 generating family and the first alternative of the conclusion of Theorem 6.3.2 is obtained. From now on we assume E ∗ = E. Consider the set X = {x ∈ ω ω : [x]E ∗ = [x]E }. Then X is nonempty. If in addition E is Δ11 then X is Σ11 , since x ∈ X ⇐⇒ ∃y ( yE ∗ x ∧ y E x ). From now on we also assume that E is Δ11 . We are now ready to take category arguments into account. Lemma 6.3.7 If A, B ⊆ X are nonempty Σ11 sets such that E is comeager in (A × B) ∩ E ∗ , then (A × A) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E. Proof. Consider Y = {(x, y, z) ∈ A × A × B : xE ∗ yE ∗ z} with the τ2 × τ topology. Similar to Lemma 6.3.5 we have that {(C × C × C) ∪ [(ω ω − C) × (ω ω − C) × (ω ω − C)]}, Y = (A × A × B) ∩ C∈C
where C is the countable family of all Δ11 E-invariant sets. Thus Y is Gδ in τ 2 × τ as well as in τ2 × τ . Let Y1 = {(x, y, z) ∈ Y : xEz} and Y2 = {(x, y, z) ∈ Y : yEz}. Since E is comeager in (A × B) ∩ E ∗ , both Y1 and Y2 are comeager in Y . Now suppose (A × A) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E. Consider Y3 = {(x, y, z) ∈ Y : x E y}. Then Y3 is nonempty. Since E is Δ11 , Y3 is Σ11 and open in τ2 × τ . It follows that Y1 ∩ Y2 ∩ Y3 = ∅. But if (x, y, z) ∈ Y1 ∩ Y2 ∩ Y3 , then xEz, yEz, and xE y, a contradiction. Lemma 6.3.8 E is dense and meager in X 2 ∩ E ∗ in τ 2 . Proof. Since X 2 is Σ11 , and thus open in τ 2 , the density is immediate from Lemma 6.3.6. Assume toward a contradiction that E is nonmeager in X 2 ∩E ∗ . Then there exist nonempty Σ11 sets A, B ⊆ X such that E is comeager in (A × B) ∩ E ∗ . By the preceding lemma we have that (A × A) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E. Therefore in fact ([A]E × [A]E ) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E. We claim that [A]E = [A]E ∗ . To see this, assume that [A]E = [A]E ∗ . Then the set Z = {x ∈ [A]E ∗ : ∃y ∈ y )} is nonempty, Σ11 , and (Z×[A]E )∩E ∗ = ∅. By the density [A]E ( xE ∗ y ∧ x E of E we have that (Z × [A]E ) ∩ E = ∅. But if z ∈ Z, x ∈ [A]E , and xEz then y; since (x, y) ∈ ([A]E × [A]E ) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E, there is y ∈ [A]E with zE ∗ y and z E we have xEy, a contradiction. Finally we claim that for any x ∈ A, [x]E = [x]E ∗ , a contradiction to the assumption that x ∈ X. So let x ∈ A and yE ∗ x. Then y ∈ [A]E ∗ = [A]E , and hence (x, y) ∈ ([A]E × [A]E ) ∩ E ∗ ⊆ E. This means that xEy and y ∈ [x]E .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
144
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
We are finally ready to embed E0 into E. Let us comment on the main ideas before giving the construction itself. As usual we will construct a sequence {Us }s∈2<ω of open sets and define the embedding from 2ω by letting f (z) to be the unique element of the singleton n Uzn . However, since we are working with the Gandy–Harrington topology, the strong Choquet property is used to guarantee the nonemptiness of the intersection n Uzn in place of complete metrizability. For this we need to play the strong Choquet game and let Us be coming from a winning strategy for Player II. Thus for each s ∈ 2<ω we need to find xs and Vs as Player I’s move. To make sure we are creating a reduction of E0 into E a scheme similar to the proof of Theorem 6.2.1 is used. To ensure that z E 0 y ⇒ f (z) E f (y) we ask that Us × Ut be contained in some dense open set avoiding the meager relation E if s, t have the same length but their last entries differ. For the other implication, namely zE0 y ⇒ f (z)Ef (y), the difficulty now is that no group action is present to provide the uniform linkage we had in the proof of Theorem 6.2.1. The alternative is also making use of the strong Choquet property, this time on the space of pairs, to guarantee that appropriate linkage exists among the elements xs . When zE0 y, the pairs (xzn , xyn ) will converge to a unique linked pair, forcing that f (z)Ef (y). To deal with the combinatorics associated with the linkage of elements xs , we introduce the following notation. For s, t ∈ 2<ω with lh(s) = lh(t) and k ∈ ω, define a relation Rk by sRk t ⇐⇒ ∀i < k s(i) = t(i) = 0 ∧ s(k) = t(k) ∧ ∀k < i < lh(s) s(i) = t(i). Note that if k = k then Rk ∩ Rk = ∅. If sRk t then (s u)Rk (t u) for any u ∈ 2<ω . Also if sRk t and k < n < lh(s) then (s n) Rk (t n). Let also R = k Rk . The following lemma collects some other basic properties of the relation R. The proof is an easy induction on n ∈ ω, which we leave as an exercise (Exercise 6.3.3). Lemma 6.3.9 For each n ∈ ω the following are true:
(i) R ∩ (2n × 2n ) ⊆ k
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
145
Proof. Fix winning strategies for Player II in the strong Choquet games played on (X, τ ) and ((X × X) ∩ E, τ2 ) respectively. Since E is meager in (X × X) ∩ E ∗ in τ 2 we can find a decreasing sequence of dense open subsets of (X × X) ∩ E ∗ in τ 2 such that E ∩ n Wn = ∅. Without loss of generality we may assume that W0 ∩ {(x, x) : x ∈ X} = ∅. We define sequences {xs }s∈2<ω of elements of X, {Vs }s∈2<ω , {Us }s∈2<ω of τ -open subsets of X, and {Fs,t }sRt , {Es,t }sRt of τ2 -open subsets of (X ×X)∩E such that, for any s, t ∈ 2<ω with lh(s) = lh(t), the following requirements are fulfilled: (i) V∅ = U∅ = X; (ii) The following is a play in the strong Choquet game on X according to Player II’s winning strategy: I
xs1 , Vs1
II
···
xs2 , Vs2 Us1
xs , Vs ···
Us2
Us
In particular, xs ∈ Us ⊆ Vs ; (iii) diam(Vs ) ≤ 2−lh(s) (in the usual topology of ω ω ); (iv) If lh(s) = lh(t) = n and s(n − 1) = t(n − 1) then Vs × Vt ⊆ Wn ; (v) If lh(s) = lh(t) = n and sRk t then the following is a play in the strong Choquet game on (X ×X)∩E according to Player II’s winning strategy: I
···
(xsk , xtk ), Fsk,tk
II
Esk,tk
(xs , xt ), Fs,t ···
Es,t
(vi) diam(Fs,t ) ≤ 2−lh(s) for sRt (in the usual topology of (ω ω )2 ). The construction is by induction on lh(s). We start with lh(s) = 1. At this stage we need Σ11 sets V0 , V1 ⊆ X of diameter ≤ 1/2 such that V0 × V1 ⊆ W1 and elements x0 ∈ V0 , x1 ∈ V1 so that (x0 , x1 ) ∈ E. Since W1 is dense open in (X × X) ∩ E ∗ in τ 2 such V0 , V1 exist; and since E is dense in (X × X) ∩ E ∗ , E ∩ (V0 × V1 ) = ∅. Let F0,1 be any Σ11 subset of (X × X) ∩ E containing (x0 , x1 ) and of diameter < 1/2. The sets U0 , U1 and E0,1 are obtained by playing the strong Choquet games. This finishes the construction for lh(s) = 1. In the inductive step assume all xs , Vs , Us , Fs,t , and Es,t have been defined for lh(s) ≤ n and sRt. We need to define xs i , Vs i , Fs i,t i for lh(s) = n, sRt, and i ∈ {0, 1}, as well as F0 0,0 1 . Once these are defined the sets Us i , Es i,t i , and E0 0,0 1 are obtained by playing the strong Choquet games.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
146
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
To satisfy the requirements we need at least to maintain, for all s, t with lh(s) = lh(t) = n and sRt, that xs 0 , xs 1 ∈ Us , xt 0 , xt 1 ∈ Ut , and (xs 0 , xt 0 ), (xs 1 , xt 1 ) ∈ Es,t . We consider the set of all such tuples Y = {((ys 0 )s∈2n , (ys 1 )s∈2n ) : ∀s, t ∈ 2n [ys i ∈ Us ∧ (ys i , yt i ) ∈ E ∗ ∧ (sRt ⇒ (ys i , yt i ) ∈ Es,t )], i = 0, 1}. n
n
As a subset of X 2 × X 2 the set Y is obviously of the form Z × Z for n n some Z ⊆ X 2 open in the Gandy–Harrington topology on X 2 . And it is nonempty since (xs )s∈2n ∈ Z and therefore ((xs )s∈2n , (xs )s∈2n ) ∈ Y . To further satisfy requirement (iv) we fix any s0 , t0 ∈ 2n . Since Wn+1 is dense open in (X × X) ∩ E ∗ , the set Ys0 ,t0 = {((ys 0 )s∈2n , (ys 1 )s∈2n ) ∈ Y : (ys 0 , yt 1 ) ∈ Wn+1 } 0
0
is dense open in Y . It follows that the finite intersection s,t∈2n Ys,t is still dense open, and thus there are Σ11 sets Vs 0 , Vt 1 such that Vs 0 × Vt 1 ⊆ Ys,t . s
t
s,t
With possible shrinking we may require that diam(Vs 0 ), diam(Vt 1 ) ≤ 2−lh(s)−1 . Thus (iii) and (iv) are satisfied. Furthermore since E is dense in (X × X) ∩ E ∗ , the set Y = {((ys 0 )s∈2n , (ys 1 )s∈2n ) ∈ Y : (y0 0 , y0 1 ) ∈ E} is dense in Y . Let ((xs 0 )s∈2n , (xs 1 )s∈2n ) be any element of the nonempty intersection Vs 0 × Vt 1 . Y∩ s
t
We have defined the required elements (xu )u∈2n+1 satisfying (ii). Finally for each pair (s, t) with sRt and i ∈ {0, 1} let Fs i,t i be any Σ11 subset of (X × X) ∩ E containing (xs 0 , xt 1 ) and with diameter ≤ 2−lh(s)−1 . Let also F0 0,0 1 be any Σ11 subset of (X × X) ∩ E containing (x0 0 , x0 1 ) and with diameter ≤ 2−lh(s)−1 . We have thus finished the definition of all elements and sets involved, and conditions (i) through (vi) are all satisfied. It follows from (ii) that for any z ∈ 2ω the objects xzn , Vzn , Uzn form a play in the strong Choquet game on X according to Player II’s winning strategy. Thus n Uzn is nonempty, and by (iii), is a singleton. We define f (z) to be this unique element. This defines a continuous embedding of 2ω into X. It remains to verify that f is a reduction from E0 to E. First suppose z E 0 y. Then for infinitely many n, z(n − 1) = y(n − 1), and by (iv), for infinitely many n, Uzn ×Uyn ⊆ Wn . It follows that (f (z), f (y)) ∈ W , and hence (f (z), f (y) ∈ E. n n
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
147
For the other direction we show that for any s, t with lh(s) = lh(t) = n and z ∈ 2ω , f (s 0 z)Ef (t 1 z). This is by induction on n. For n = 0 we note that (0 z k)R1 (1 z k) for any k ∈ ω. Thus the objects (x0 zk , x1 zk ), F0 zk,1 zk , E0 zk,1 zk form a play in the strong Choquet game on (X × X) ∩ E according to Player II’s winning strategy. It follows from (v) and (vi) that k E0 zk,1 zk is a singleton. By our construction this unique pair must be (f (0 z), f (1 z)). Therefore f (0 z)Ef (1 z). For the inductive step when n > 0, consider the elements f (0 0 z) and f (0 1 z). By the inductive hypothesis f (0 0 z)Ef (s 0 z) and f (0 1 z)Ef (t 1 z). Thus it suffices to show that f (0 0 z)Ef (0 1 z). However this is similar to the argument for the case n = 0. For any k ∈ ω let uk = 0 0 z k and vk = 0 1 z k. By our construction the objects (xuk , xvk ), Fuk ,vk , Euk ,vk form a play in the strong Choquet game on (X × X) ∩ E according to Player II’s winning strategy. It follows again from (v) and (vi) that k Euk ,vk is a singleton and its unique element must be (f (0 0 z), f (0 1 z)). Therefore f (0 0 z)Ef (0 1 z). Exercise 6.3.1 Prove Lemma 6.3.3. (Hint: Δ11 is closed under effective countable unions but not arbitrary countable unions.) Exercise 6.3.2 Show that if E is a Σ11 equivalence relation on ω ω then E ∗ is clopen in the Gandy–Harrington topology τ2 . Exercise 6.3.3 Prove Lemma 6.3.9.
6.4
Consequences of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy
In this section we derive some consequences of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy for Borel equivalence relations. The main results of this section are due to Harrington, Kechris, and Louveau [64]. We first recall the following definition. Definition 6.4.1 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces. A subset A ⊆ X is called universally measurable if it is μ-measurable for any σ-finite Borel measure μ on X. A function f : X → Y is universally measurable if it is μ-measurable for any σ-finite Borel measure μ on X. A theorem of Luzin states that every analytic set is universally measurable (see Reference [97] Theorem 21.10). Let σ(Σ11 ) be the σ-algebra generated by the analytic sets. Then it follows that every set in σ(Σ11 ) is universally measurable. If X and Y are standard Borel spaces, then a function f : X → Y
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
148
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
is σ(Σ11 )-measurable if for any Borel set B ⊆ Y , f −1 (B) is a σ(Σ11 ) subset of X. We also recall the following definition. Definition 6.4.2 Let X, Y be sets and P ⊆ X × Y . Let projX (P ) = {x ∈ X : ∃y ∈ Y (x, y) ∈ P }. A uniformization of P is a function f : projX (P ) → Y such that for all x ∈ projX (P ), (x, f (x)) ∈ P . We will use the following theorem known as the Jankov–von Neumann uniformization theorem. Theorem 6.4.3 (Jankov–von Neumann) Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and P ⊆ X × Y an analytic set. Then there is a uniformization of P that is σ(Σ11 )-measurable. For a proof of this theorem see Reference [97] Theorem 18.1. We are now ready to derive some consequences of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy. Theorem 6.4.4 Let X be a standard Borel space and E a Borel equivalence relation on X. Then the following are equivalent: (i) E is smooth; (ii) There is a compatible Polish topology τ on X such that E is closed in (X 2 , τ 2 ); (iii) There is a compatible Polish topology τ on X such that E is Gδ in (X 2 , τ 2 ); (iv) There is a compatible Polish topology τ on X such that every Eequivalence class is Gδ ; (v) There is a countable generating family for E consisting of analytic sets; (vi) There is a countable generating family for E consisting of universally measurable sets; (vii) There is a universally measurable reduction from E to id(2ω ); (viii) E has a σ(Σ11 )-measurable selector; (ix) E has a universally measurable selector.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
149
Proof. The implication (i)⇒(ii) was proved in Corollary 5.4.5. The implications (ii)⇒(iii)⇒(iv), (v)⇒(vi), and (viii)⇒(ix) are obvious. The equivalence between (vi) and (vii) follows from the proof of Proposition 5.4.4. Also (ix)⇒(vi) by a similar argument. We prove the other implications. For (iv)⇒(v), let {Un }n∈ω enumerate a countable base for (X, τ ). We claim that {[Un ]E }n∈ω is a countable generating family for E consisting of analytic sets. It is clear that each [Un ]E is analytic. To see that they form a generating family for E, let x, y ∈ X be such that x ∈ [Un ]E ⇐⇒ y ∈ [Un ]E for all n ∈ ω. Since for any n ∈ ω, [x]E ∩ Un = ∅ ⇐⇒ [x]E ∩ Un = ∅ ⇐⇒ x ∈ [Un ]E , we have that for all n ∈ ω, [x]E ∩ Un = ∅ ⇐⇒ [y]E ∩ Un = ∅, which in turn implies that [x]E = [y]E . Now [x]E , [y]E are both dense Gδ subsets of [x]E , thus [x]E ∩ [y]E = ∅, and therefore in fact xEy. Next we show that (vi)⇒(i) from the Glimm–Effros dichotomy. Let {An }n∈ω be a countable generating family for E where each An is universally measurable. Assume that E is not smooth. Then there is a Borel embedding θ : 2ω → X of E0 into E. It is easy to verify that the family {θ−1 (An )}n∈ω is a generating family for E0 . Note also that each θ−1 (An ) is universally measurable. To see this let μ be a σ-finite Borel measure on 2ω . Then θμ defined by θμ (A) = μ(θ−1 (A)) is a σ-finite Borel measure on X. Since each An is universally measurable, An is θμ -measurable, and hence θ−1 (An ) is μmeasurable. To summarize, we now have a countable separating family for E0 consisting of universally measurable sets. By the proofs of Propositions 6.1.6 and 6.1.7 show that E0 does not admit such families. Finally we show that (i)⇒(viii). For this let ϕ : X → 2ω be a Borel reduction of E to id(2ω ). Consider A = {(z, x) ∈ 2ω × X : z = ϕ(x)}. Then A is Borel, in particular Σ11 , and by the Jankov–von Neumann uniformization theorem, allows a σ(Σ11 )-measurable uniformization. Let ψ : ϕ(X) → X be a σ(Σ11 )-measurable uniformization of A. Then ψ ◦ ϕ is σ(Σ11 )-measurable. But ψ ◦ ϕ is clearly a selector for E. Recall that smooth equivalence relations need not have Borel selectors. In contrast, clauses (viii) and (ix) provide characterizations for smoothness in terms of σ(Σ11 )-measurable and universally measurable selectors. Also for Borel equivalence relations the existence of Borel selectors and of Borel transversals are equivalent (see the remarks preceding Proposition 3.4.6), therefore smooth equivalence relations need not have Borel transversals either. On the flip side we also get characterizations for E0 -embeddability.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
150
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 6.4.5 Let X be a Polish space and E a Borel equivalence relation on X. Then the following are equivalent: (a) E0 c E; (b) E0 ≤B E; (c) There is a universally measurable reduction from E0 to E; (d) There is an E-nonatomic, E-ergodic probability Borel measure on X. Proof. The implications (a)⇒(b)⇒(c) are obvious. To see that (c)⇒(a), suppose there is a universally measurable reduction θ from E0 to E. By the proofs of Propositions 6.1.6 and 6.1.7 we know that there are no countable generating families of E0 consisting of universally measurable sets. However, if (a) fails then by the Glimm–Effros dichotomy we have that E is smooth and thus admitting a countable Borel generating family {An }n∈ω . It follows that {θ−1 (An )}n∈ω is a generating family for E0 consisting of universally measurable sets, a contradiction. A similar argument shows that (d)⇒(a). We finally show that (a)⇒(d). Let μ be the product measure on 2ω and θ : 2ω → X be a continuous embedding of E0 into E. Then the measure θμ defined by θμ (A) = μ(θ−1 (A)) is a probability Borel measure on X. It is E-nonatomic because for any x ∈ X, θμ ([x]E ) = μ(θ−1 ([x]E )) = 0 since θ−1 ([x]E ) is contained in at most one E0 -equivalence class. It is also E-ergodic since for any invariant Borel set A ⊆ X, θ−1 (A) is also invariant Borel. Exercise 6.4.1 Give a direct proof that an equivalence relation E on a Polish space X with every E-equivalence class Gδ admits a σ(Σ11 )-measurable selector. Exercise 6.4.2 Show that a Borel equivalence relation with a Σ11 transversal is smooth. Exercise 6.4.3 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Suppose X is Fσ . Show that the following are equivalent: EG X (1) EG is smooth;
(2) Every orbit is Gδ ; X (3) EG is Gδ ; X . (4) There is a Borel selector for EG
Exercise 6.4.4 Let G be a Polish group and H a Borel subgroup of G. Let E be the coset equivalence relation on G defined by xEy ⇐⇒ xH = yH. Show that E is smooth iff H is closed.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
6.5
151
Actions of cli Polish groups
In this section we prove a theorem of Becker [5] that establishes the Glimm– Effros dichotomy for orbit equivalence relations induced by Borel actions of cli Polish groups. The main theorem of this section is the following. Theorem 6.5.1 (Becker) Let G be a cli Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then there is a Polish topology on X such that the action is continuous and every Gδ orbit is closed. By Theorem 6.2.3, the Glimm–Effros dichotomy follows immediately. Theorem 6.5.2 (Becker) X Let G be a cli Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then either EG is smooth X . or else E0 B EG The rest of the section is devoted to a proof of Theorem 6.5.1. We fix a cli Polish group G and a compatible complete left-invariant metric dG on G. Also fix a countable dense subgroup G0 of G and a countable base U for the topology of G such that U is closed under left-translates by elements of G0 , that is, for g ∈ G0 and U ∈ U, gU ∈ U. Without loss of generality assume that G ∈ U and ∅ ∈ U. For U, V ∈ U, define G0 (U, V ) = {g ∈ G0 : gU ∩ V = ∅}. Then note that G0 (U, V ) is nonempty. Lemma 6.5.3
For any open U ⊆ U , {gU : g ∈ G, gU ∩ V = ∅} ⊆ G0 (U, V )U . In particular, V ⊆ G0 (U, V )U . Proof. Let g ∈ G and h, k ∈ U with gh ∈ V . We need to show that gk ∈ G0 (U, V )U . By the continuity of the group operations there are open sets U0 , U1 , U2 , N such that g ∈ U0 , 1G ∈ N , h ∈ U1 , k ∈ U2 , N U1 ⊆ U , N U2 ⊆ U , and U0 N U1 ⊆ V . Note that gN −1 ∩ U0 is nonempty open. We let g0 ∈ G0 ∩ gN −1 ∩ U0 . Then g0 h ∈ U0 N U1 ⊆ V , and therefore g0 ∈ G0 (U, V ). Also gk = g0 (g0−1 g)k, where (g0−1 g)k ∈ N U2 ⊆ U . Thus gk ∈ G0 (U, V )U . This proves the first half of the lemma. The second half follows since V ⊆ {gU : g ∈ G, gU ∩ V = ∅}. Next we consider the action of G on X and find a Polish topology on X by the method of Section 4.4. Lemma 6.5.4 There is a countable collection B of Borel sets on X such that
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
152
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(i) the topology τ generated by B is Polish, (ii) the action of G on (X, τ ) is continuous, and (iii) for all A, B ∈ B and U, V ∈ U, the set [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G is τ -open. Proof. Let B0 be a countable base for a Polish topology on X generating the given Borel structure. Let A be a countable Boolean algebra of Borel subsets of X with the following closure properties: (a) B0 ⊆ A; (b) For all A ∈ A and U, V ∈ U, G0 (U, V ) · A ∈ A; (c) For all A ∈ A and U ∈ U, A U ∈ A; (d) The topology generated by A is Polish. This can be easily done by the remarks preceding Lemma 4.4.5. Now let τ be the topology on X generated by B = A U . By the lemmas in Section 4.4 (X, τ ) becomes a Polish G-space. To check (iii) note that B ⊆ A, and for any A, B ∈ A and U, V ∈ U, [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G ∈ A U by condition (b) and the fact that A is a Boolean algebra. We fix a countable base B and the Polish topology τ on X with the properties described above, and investigate the Gδ orbits. For this we also fix x ∈ X so that [x]G is Gδ . By Effros’ Theorem 3.2.4 the canonical map g → g · x is open from G onto [x]G . It follows that for any open U ⊆ G, U ·x is a relatively open subset of [x]G . We define for open U ⊆ G, Ω(U ) = {A ⊆ X : A ∈ τ, A ∩ [x]G ⊆ U · x}. It is clear that Ω(U ) is the largest open subset O of X such that O∩[x]G = U ·x. It is also easy to see that U ⊆ V implies Ω(U ) ⊆ Ω(V ), and for any g ∈ G, g · Ω(U ) = Ω(gU ). Note as well that for any sequence (Un ) of open sets in G, n Ω(Un ) ⊆ Ω( n Un ). We also define, for U, V ∈ U, Λ(U, V ) = [Ω(V ) − {Ω(hU ) : h ∈ G0 (U, V )}] G . Then Λ(U, V ) is an invariant Borel subset of X. The main issue is whether it is empty. We first show that it is empty on the orbit [x]G . Lemma 6.5.5 For any U, V ∈ U, Λ(U, V ) ∩ [x]G = ∅. Proof. Assume Λ(U, V ) ∩ [x]G = ∅. Since Λ(U, V ) is invariant, we have x ∈ Λ(U, V ). By definition there is g ∈ G such that g · x ∈ Ω(V ) but for all
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
153
h ∈ G0 (U, V ), g · x ∈ Ω(hU ). From g · x ∈ Ω(V ) we get that g · x ⊆ V · x. Thus we may assume without loss of generality that g ∈ V . But by Lemma 6.5.3 g ∈ G0 (U, V )U . Thus for some h ∈ G0 (U, V ), g ∈ hU , and g · x ∈ hU · x ⊆ Ω(hU ), a contradiction. The following lemma is one of two key lemmas for the proof of Theorem 6.5.1. Lemma 6.5.6 Suppose y ∈ Λ(U, V ). Then there are A, B ∈ B such that [y]G ⊆ [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G and [x]G ∩ [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G = ∅. Proof. Since y ∈ Λ(U, V ) there is a nonmeager set N0 ⊆ G such that for all g ∈ N0 , g · y ∈ Ω(V ) − {Ω(hU ) : h ∈ G0 (U, V )}. Thus for all g ∈ N0 , g ·y ∈ Ω(V ) but for all h ∈ G0 (U, V ), g ·y ∈ Ω(hU ). Since Ω(V ) is open in X and B is a countable base, Ω(V ) = {A : A ∈ B ∧ A ⊆ Ω(V )}. It follows that there is A ∈ B and a nonmeager set N1 ⊆ N0 such that for all g ∈ N1 , g · y ∈ A ⊆ Ω(V ). Let B ∈ B be such that B ⊆ Ω(U ) and B ∩ U · x = ∅. Then B ∩ [x]G ⊆ U · x. It follows that for h ∈ G0 (U, V ), h · B ∩ [x]G ⊆ h · (U · x) = (hU ) · x, and thus h · B ⊆ Ω(hU ). This implies that for all g ∈ N1 , g · y ∈ h · B. We have shown that y ∈ [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G . It remains to show [x]G ∩ [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G = ∅. Assume this is not the case. Then there is k ∈ G such that k · x ∈ A − G0 (U, V ) · B. Since A ⊆ Ω(V ) we may assume without loss of generality that k ∈ V . Since B ⊆ Ω(U ) is open there is an open U ⊆ U such that B ∩ [x]G = U · x. U = ∅ since B ∩ U · x = ∅. Note that G0 (U , V ) ⊆ G0 (U, V ), and hence k · x ∈ G0 (U , V ) · B. However, by Lemma 6.5.3 V ⊆ G0 (U , V )U . Thus k · x ∈ G0 (U , V ) · (U · x) ⊆ G0 (U , V ) · B, a contradiction. Note that so far we have not used the assumption that G is a cli Polish group. The next key lemma is the only place where we essentially use this assumption. Lemma 6.5.7 If y ∈ [x]G − [x]G , then there are U, V ∈ U such that y ∈ Λ(U, V ). Proof. Suppose y ∈ [x]G but assume there are no U, V ∈ U such that y ∈ Λ(U, V ). We construct sequences (Un )n∈ω of elements of U and (gn )n∈ω of elements of G such that, for all n ∈ ω, (i) diam(Un ) < 2−n , (ii) Un ∩ Un+1 = ∅,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
154
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(iii) dG (gn , gn+1 ) < 2−n , (iv) gn · y ∈ Ω(Un ). The construction is by induction on n. To begin with, let U0 = G and g0 = 1G . Since Ω(G) = X we have that g0 · y ∈ Ω(U0 ). In general, suppose Un and gn have been defined to satisfy the requirements. We now define Un+1 ∈ U and gn+1 ∈ G. Let V = Un and U ∈ U such that diam(U ) < 2−(n+1) . Since y ∈ Λ(U, V ) and Λ(U, V ) is invariant, we have that gn · y ∈ Λ(U, V ). Thus there is a comeager set C ⊆ G such that for all g ∈ C, g · (gn · y) ∈ Ω(Un ) − {Ω(hU ) : h ∈ G0 (U, Un )}. Let
W = {g ∈ G : g · (gn · y) ∈ Ω(Un ) ∧ dG (ggn , gn ) < 2−n }.
By (iv) gn · y ∈ Ω(Un ), and since Ω(Un ) is open in X, W is nonempty open. Let g ∈ C ∩ W and gn+1 = ggn . Then dG (gn , gn+1 ) = dG (gn , ggn ) < 2−n . Now gn+1 · y = g · (gn · y) ∈ Ω(Un ) since g ∈ W , so by g ∈ C we obtain an h ∈ G0 (U, Un ) such that gn+1 · y = g · (gn · y) ∈ Ω(hU ). Let Un+1 = hU . Since diam(U ) < 2−(n+1) , the left invariance gives that diam(Un+1 ) = diam(hU ) < 2−(n+1) . Also Un ∩ Un+1 = Un ∩ hU = ∅ since h ∈ G0 (U, Un ). Lastly, gn+1 · y = g · (gn · y) ∈ Ω(hU ) = Ω(Un+1 ). Thus the construction is finished with all the requirements fulfilled. By the construction we have that the sequence (gn ) is dG -Cauchy, and therefore by the completeness of dG there is g∞ ∈ G such that gn → g∞ as n → ∞. Let y∞ = g∞ · y. Let dX be a complete metric on X compatible with τ . Let (Mn )n∈ω be a countable open nbhd base of y∞ with gn · y ∈ Mn . We claim that Un · x ∩ Mn = ∅ for all n ∈ ω. To see this fix an n and let A = Ω(Un ) ∩ Mn . Then A is open and gn · y ∈ A by (iv). Since y ∈ [x]G , we get that gn · y ∈ [x]G and thus A ∩ [x]G = ∅. It follows that A ∩ [x]G = ∅, and therefore Un · x ∩ Mn = ∅. For each n ∈ ω let xn ∈ Un · x ∩ Mn and hn ∈ Un be such that hn · x = xn . By the above construction (hn ) is a dG -Cauchy sequence, and therefore there is h∞ ∈ G such that hn → h∞ as n → ∞. By the continuity of the action we thus have that xn = hn · x → h∞ · x as n → ∞. On the other hand, xn → y∞ as (Mn ) is a nbhd base for y∞ . Thus y∞ = h∞ · x, and y ∈ [x]G . We are now ready to give the proof of Theorem 6.5.1. Proof. Following the notation of this section let x ∈ X be such that [x]G is Gδ . We show that [x]G is closed. Assume that y ∈ [x]G −[x]G . By Lemma 6.5.7 there are U, V ∈ U such that y ∈ Λ(U, V ). And so by Lemma 6.5.6 there are A, B ∈ B such that, letting D = [A − G0 (U, V ) · B] G , we have [y]G ⊆ D and [x]G ∩ D = ∅. By Lemma 6.5.4 D is open, and so y ∈ [x]G , contradicting our assumption.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The Glimm–Effros Dichotomy
155
Becker’s theorem implies earlier results of Sami (for abelian Polish groups [134]; see Exercises 9.5.3 through 9.5.5), Hjorth–Solecki (for nilpotent Polish groups [83]), and Solecki (for Polish groups with two-sided invariant metrics [83]). The following exercise problems follow the notation of this section, where G is an arbitrary Polish group. Exercise 6.5.1 Show that for any g ∈ G and open U ⊆ G, g ·Ω(U ) = Ω(gU ). Exercise 6.5.2 Show that for any A ∈ B, [A]G is clopen. Exercise 6.5.3 Define an equivalence relation ∼ on X by x ∼ y iff [x]G = [y]G . Show that every ∼-equivalence class is closed.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 7 Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
The topic of Borel equivalence relations is so vast that it certainly cannot fit into two chapters of any book. In this and the next chapters we just give an introduction of the topic and leave further explorations of the literature to the interested reader. There are many theoretical results about Borel equivalence relations, and at the same time we have also identified many classification problems and equivalence relations from other fields of mathematics that turn out to be Borel equivalence relations on standard Borel spaces. In this chapter we will discuss countable Borel equivalence relations. For reasons that will become clear the study of countable Borel equivalence relations have become intertwined with the study of countable group theory and ergodic theory. Thus most of the important results about countable Borel equivalence relations cannot be proved using set theoretic or general topological tools alone. Our objective in this chapter is to provide a self-contained inroad into the subject.
7.1
Generalities of countable Borel equivalence relations
Definition 7.1.1 Let X be a standard Borel space. An equivalence relation E on X is called finite if every E-equivalence class is finite. E is called countable if every E-equivalence class is countable. Any finite Borel equivalence relation is smooth (see Exercise 7.1.1). The following theorem of Luzin–Novikov on Borel uniformizations will be useful in proving theorems about countable Borel equivalence relations. The proof can be found in Reference [97] Theorem 18.10. Theorem 7.1.2 (Luzin–Novikov) Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and let P ⊆ X × Y be Borel. Suppose every section Px = {y ∈ Y : (x, y) ∈ P } is countable. Then projX (P ) = {x ∈ X : ∃y (x, y) ∈ P } is Borel, and P has a Borel uniformization, that is, there is a Borel function f : projX (P ) → Y such that (x, f (x)) ∈ P for any x ∈ projX (P ).
157 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
158
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Moreover, P can be written as n Pn where each Pn is the graph of some Borel function fn : An → Y for An Borel, that is, Pn = {(x, fn (x)) : x ∈ An }. This uniformization theorem greatly simplifies the study of reductions among countable Borel equivalence relations, as the following lemma shows. Lemma 7.1.3 Let E be a countable Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X, Y a standard Borel space, and f : X → Y a Borel function such that f (x) = f (y) implies xEy. Then f (X) is Borel in Y and there is a Borel function g : f (X) → X such that f ◦ g = id. Proof. Consider P = {(z, x) ∈ Y ×X : f (x) = z}. Then P is a Borel subset of Y × X with each Pz countable. By the Luzin–Novikov uniformization theorem f (X) = projY (P ) is Borel. Let g : f (X) → X be a Borel uniformization function. Then f ◦ g = id. The following is another application of the Luzin–Novikov uniformization theorem. The theorem states that all countable Borel equivalence relations are orbit equivalence relations of countable group actions. Theorem 7.1.4 (Feldman–Moore) Let E be a countable Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Then there is a countable group G and a Borel action of G on X such that X . E = EG Proof. Consider E as a Borel subset of X × X. Since E is countable, each section Ex is
countable. By the Luzin–Novikov uniformization theorem we can write E as n Pn where each Pn is the graph of a Borel function fn : An → X for An Borel. Without loss of generality we may assume that Pn ∩ Pm = ∅ for n = m. Let Δ = {(x, x) : x ∈ X}. First note that X − Δ can be partitioned into countably many sets of the form A × B, where A, B are disjoint Borel subsets of X (see Exercise 7.1.3). We write X − Δ = k Rk , where {Rk }k∈ω is such a partition. Next for n, m, k ∈ ω we let En,m,k = {(x, y) ∈ E : (x, y) ∈ Pn , (y, x) ∈ Pm , x = y, (x, y) ∈ Rk }. Then {En,m,k } is a partition of E − Δ. And since each Pn is the graph of a Borel function, so is each En,m,k . We let hn,m,k : An,m,k → Bn,m,k be a Borel isomorphism between Borel subsets An,m,k and Bn,m,k such that En,m,k = {(x, hn,m,k (x)) : x ∈ An,m,k }. Define a Borel automorphism gn,m,k of X by ⎧ ⎨ hn,m,k (x), if x ∈ An,m,k , (x), if x ∈ Bn,m,k , gn,m,k (x) = h−1 ⎩ n,m,k x, otherwise.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
159
Let G be the group of Borel automorphisms generated by gn,m,k for n, m, k ∈ ω. Then xEy ⇐⇒ ∃n, m, k (gn,m,k (x) = y) ∨ (x = y) ⇐⇒ ∃g ∈ G(g · x = y). X Thus E = EG .
The following lemma is another basic and useful result about countable Borel equivalence relations. It is often referred to as the marker lemma. Lemma 7.1.5 (Slaman–Steel) Let E be a countable Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Let A = {x ∈ X : [x]E is finite} and B = X − A. Then there are Borel sets B ⊇ S0 ⊇ S1 ⊇ S2 ⊇ . . . such that [Sn ]E = B for all n, and n Sn = ∅. Proof. Without loss of generality we may assume that X = 2ω . Let G be X . Enumerate a countable group acting on X in a Borel manner with E = EG G as {gn }n∈ω . For any E-equivalence class C, let C be the closure of C and xC be the lexicographically least element of C. Then map y → x[y]E is Borel, since for any s ∈ 2<ω , x[y]E ∈ Ns ⇐⇒ ∃n ( gn · y ∈ Ns ) ∧ ∀s
(i) ω ω − Δ = {Ns × Nt : sRt}. (ii) If sRt and s Rt but (s, t) = (s , t ), then (Ns × Nt ) ∩ (Ns × Nt ) = ∅.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
160
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 7.1.4 Show that the sets Sn defined in the proof of Lemma 7.1.5 are as required. Exercise 7.1.5 Show that every countable Borel equivalence relation is idealistic. Exercise 7.1.6 Show that the following are equivalent for a countable Borel equivalence relation E: (i) E is smooth; (ii) E has a Borel transversal; (iii) E has a Borel selector. Exercise 7.1.7 Show that for every countable Borel equivalence relation E
there exist finite equivalence relations En such that E = n En . Exercise 7.1.8 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and E, F countable Borel equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. Show that if E ≤B F then there is an F -invariant Borel subset B of Y such that E ∼B F B.
7.2
Hyperfinite equivalence relations
Definition 7.2.1 Let X be a standard Borel space. A Borel equivalence relation E on X is hyperfinite if there are finite Borel equivalence relations En , n ∈ ω, with En ⊆ En+1 for all n, such that E = n En . By definition every hyperfinite equivalence relation is a countable Borel equivalence relation. Note that the equivalence relation E0 is hyperfinite. In fact, we can define, for n ≥ 1, equivalence relations En on 2ω by xEn y ⇐⇒ ∀m ≥ n x(m) = y(m).
Then each En is apparently Borel and finite, En ⊆ En+1 , and E0 = n≥1 En . The theorems proved in this section will show that E0 is a typical hyperfinite equivalence relation in a strong sense. The following proposition collects some basic closure properties of hyperfinite equivalence relations. Proposition 7.2.2 Let E and F be countable Borel equivalence relations on standard Borel spaces X and Y , respectively. Then the following hold:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
161
(1) If X = Y , F is hyperfinite and E ⊆ F , then E is hyperfinite. (2) If E is hyperfinite and A ⊆ X is Borel, then E A is hyperfinite. (3) If A ⊆ X is Borel, [A]E = X, and E A is hyperfinite, then E is hyperfinite. (4) If E ≤B F and F is hyperfinite, then E is hyperfinite. (5) If both E and F are hyperfinite, then E × F is hyperfinite. Proof. Properties (1), (2) and (5) follow easily
from the definition. We only show (3) and (4). For (3) suppose E A = n Fn , where Fn are finite Borel X equivalence relations and Fn ⊆ Fn+1 for all n. By Theorem 7.1.4 E = EG for some countable group G acting in a Borel manner on X. Enumerate G by {gm }m∈ω . For each x ∈ X, define m(x) to be the least m such that gm ·x ∈ A. By the assumption [A]E = X, m(x) is well defined for all x ∈ X. We then define xEn y ⇐⇒ ( m(x), m(y) < n ∧ gm(x) · x Fn gm(y) · y ) ∨ x = y.
Then En are finite Borel equivalence relations, En ⊆ En+1 , and E = n En . Thus E is hyperfinite. For (4) we let f : X → Y be a Borel reduction of E to F . Then f (x) = f (y) implies xEy. By Lemma 7.1.3 there is a Borel function g : f (X) → X so that f ◦g = id. Now g is a Borel injection, thus g(f (X)) is Borel. Let A = g(f (X)). Then [A]E = X. Moreover E A is Borel isomorphic (via g −1 ) to F f (X). Therefore by (2) F f (X) is hyperfinite. It follows that E A is hyperfinite and by (3) E is hyperfinite. The following theorem gives various useful characterizations of hyperfiniteness. Especially of interest is the characterization in terms of Borel reducibility to E0 . The theorem was based on earlier work by Weiss and by Slaman–Steel, and appeared in this form in Reference [30]. Theorem 7.2.3 (Dougherty–Jackson–Kechris) Let X be a standard Borel space and E a countable Borel equivalence relation. Then the following are equivalent: (i) E ≤B E0 . (ii) E is hyperfinite.
(iii) E = n En , where En are finite Borel equivalence relations, En ⊆ En+1 , and every En -equivalence class has at most n elements. (iv) There is a Borel assignment C →
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
162
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(v) There is a Borel automorphism T of X such that xEy Z T n (x) = y.
⇐⇒ ∃n ∈
(vi) There is a Borel action of the additive group Z on X such that E = EZX . Proof. The implication (i)⇒(ii) follows immediately from Proposition 7.2.2 (4). The implication (iii)⇒(ii) and the equivalence of (iv), (v), and (vi) are obvious. We show the other implications. (ii)⇒(iii): Let E = n Fn , where Fn are finite Borel equivalence relations and Fn ⊆ Fn+1 . Without loss of generality we may assume F1 = id(X). We define a sequence of finite Borel equivalence relations En , n ≥ 1, such that En ⊆ En+1 and each En -equivalence class has at most n elements. Define E1 = id(X) = F1 . For n > 1, inductively define the following sequence of sets: Xn = {x ∈ X : [x]Fn has at most n elements}, Xn−1 = {x ∈ Xn : [x]Fn−1 has at most n elements}, · · · · · · Xi = {x ∈ i<j≤n Xj : [x]Fi has at most n elements}, ······ X2 = {x ∈ Xn ∪ · · · ∪ X3 : [x]F2 has at most n elements}, X1 = X −
1<j≤n
Xj .
Note that the definition of X1 can be formulated in the same manner as those of the other sets. Since F1 ⊆ F2 ⊆ · · · ⊆ Fn , each Xi is Fj -invariant if j ≤ i. Let En = (Fn Xn ) ∪ (Fn−1 Xn−1 ) ∪ · · · ∪ (F2 X2 ) ∪ (F1 X1 ). Then En is a finite Borel equivalence relation with each En -equivalence class containing at most n elements. To see that En ⊆ En+1 let Yn+1 , Yn , . . . , Y2 , Y1 be the sequence of sets defined in the definition of En+1 . Suppose xEn y. Then for some i ≤ n, x, y ∈ Xi and xFi y. Since Xi ⊆ Yn+1 ∪ Yn ∪ · · · ∪ Yi and each of Yn+1 , Yn , . . . , Yi is Fi -invariant, there is j ≥ i such that x, y ∈ Yj and xFj y, and thus xEn+1 y. This shows that En ⊆ En+1 . It is easy to see that E = n En .
(ii)⇒(iv): Let E = n En where En are finite Borel equivalence relations and En ⊆ En+1 . Fix a Borel linear order < on X. We define
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
163
It follows from this construction that if C is an En -equivalence class and D is an En+1 -equivalence class with C ⊆ D, then
from the property that Sn ⊇ Sn+1 , and E X2 = n En since n Sn = ∅. (vi)⇒(i): This would make the above proof of (iv)⇒(ii) appear redundant, but in fact we are going to give a proof based on the above one. First by Theorem 3.3.4 the orbit equivalence relation induced by the Z-action on 2ω×Z is a universal equivalence relation for all Z-orbit equivalence relations. Denote this equivalence relation by EZ . It is thus sufficient to show that EZ ≤B E0 . For convenience we use the variation of E0 on the Baire space ω ω and continue to denote EZ by E. By Exercise 7.2.1 it again suffices to find a Borel partition {Xn }n∈ω so that E Xn ≤B E0 for all n ∈ ω. We repeat the above proof of (iv)⇒(ii) to define the invariant Borel sets X0 , X1 , and X2 . It suffices to show that E X2 ≤B E0 . And we also have the finite equivalence relations En defined. Now for each x ∈ X2 and n ∈ ω we let πn (x) = {g ∈ Z : g · xEn x}. We note that πn (x) is a finite set of consecutive integers and for xEn y, πn (x) · x = πn (y) · y. Let m = |πn (x)| and gn (x) = inf πn (x). Then define an n × m matrix Mn (x) = (ai,j )i
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
164
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
have that Mn (x) = Mn (y). Moreover, Mn−1 (x) is a submatrix of Mn (x), and its relative position in Mn (x) can be determined by gn−1 (x) − gn (x). It is also true that if xEn−1 y then Mn−1 (x) = Mn−1 (y), Mn (x) = Mn (y), and gn−1 (x) − gn (x) = gn−1 (y) − gn (y). Let cn (x) be an integer coding the matrix Mn,m (x) and the integer gn−1 (x) − gn (x). Then we have that if xEn−1 y, then rn (x) = rn (y). We claim that xEy iff (cn (x))E0 (cn (y)). If xEy then for some n we have that xEn y for all n > n. By the construction we have that πn (x) · x = πn (y) · y and eventually cn (x) = cn (y). Thus (cn (x))E0 (cn (y)). Conversely, from the sequence (cn (x)) we can determine x ∈ 2ω×Z up to a shift by an element of Z. This is because, from the information of the sequence Mn (x) and gn−1 (x) − gn (x) we may recover x if g0 (x) is given. Thus if (cn (x)) = (cn (y)) then x and y are in the same orbit of the Z-action, and so xEy. Example 7.2.4 Let X be a standard Borel space and let Z act on X Z by (n · x)(m) = x(m − n). Then the orbit equivalence relation is hyperfinite. In view of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy, we have the following immediate corollary of the theorem. Corollary 7.2.5 Let X be a standard Borel space and E a hyperfinite equivalence relation on X. Then either E is smooth or else E ∼B E0 . Thus E0 is a typical nonsmooth hyperfinite equivalence relation and in fact the unique one up to Borel bireducibility. The theorem also motivates the following definitions. Definition 7.2.6 Let X be a standard Borel space. An equivalence relation E is essentially hyperfinite if E ≤B E0 . E is essentially countable if there is a countable Borel equivalence relation F such that E ≤B F . However, no good characterizations of essential hyperfiniteness are known. Exercise 7.2.1 Let E be a countable Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Suppose {Xn }n∈ω is a partition of X into disjoint Borel sets and E Xn ≤B E0 for all n ∈ ω. Show that E ≤B E0 . Exercise 7.2.2 (Jackson) Let E, F be countable Borel equivalence relations on a standard Borel space X. Suppose E ⊆ F , E is hyperfinite, and every F -equivalence class contains only finitely many E-equivalence classes. Show that F is hyperfinite.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
7.3
165
Universal countable Borel equivalence relations
In this section we investigate countable Borel equivalence relations that are most complicated in the Borel reducibility hierarchy. Such equivalence relations are called universal countable Borel equivalence relations. All results in this section are due to Dougherty, Jackson, and Kechris [30]. By the Feldman–Moore theorem (Theorem 7.1.4) every countable Borel equivalence relation is the orbit equivalence relation of a Borel action of a countable group. If G is a fixed countable group, then among all Borel actions of G one is identified as universal by Theorem 3.3.4. The action is the shift action of G on the power of the Effros Borel space F (G)ω . Here, however, G has the discrete topology, and hence every subset of G is closed. It is thus equivalent to consider the shift action of G on the space (2G )ω or 2G×ω defined by (g · f )(h, n) = f (g −1 h, n) for g ∈ G, f ∈ 2G×ω , h ∈ G, and n ∈ ω. Note that this action is continuous. We have the following immediate corollary. Proposition 7.3.1 Let G be a countable group and Let X be the Polish G-space 2G×ω . Then X is a universal G-orbit equivalence X is a universal Borel G-space and EG relation. Also by Theorem 3.5.2 and a trivial analog of it for quotient groups we have the following extension result. Proposition 7.3.2 Xi for i = 1, 2. If Let G1 , G2 be countable groups, Xi = 2Gi ×ω , and Ei = EG i G1 ≤w G2 , then E1 B E2 . Thus the Borel complexity of the orbit equivalence relations of the shift actions reflect the complexity of the structures of the acting groups. It turns out that this connection between the group structures and the dynamics they produce is much stronger than we would suspect. This strong bondage is now refered to as the rigidity or superrigidity of the groups. It is therefore not surprising that ergodic theory, especially the superrigidity theory, is playing a central role in the study of countable Borel equivalence relations nowadays. Here we only provide an inroad to the study by focusing on the universal countable Borel equivalence relations. For 1 < n < ω let Fn be the free group with n generators. Let Fω be the free group with countably infinitely many generators. It is an easy fact of group theory that Fω is a surjectively universal countable group, that is, every countable group is a quotient group of Fω . Also Fω can be embedded as a subgroup of F2 . This implies that each of Fn , for 1 < n ≤ ω, is a
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
166
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
weakly universal countable group. Therefore we have the following examples of universal countable Borel equivalence relations. Proposition 7.3.3 Let 1 < n ≤ ω, X = 2Fn ×ω , and E = EFXn . Then E is a universal countable Borel equivalence relation. In search for a simpler representation of the universal countable Borel equivalence relation, we prove the following sharper results. Proposition 7.3.4 Let G1 , G2 be countable groups and Y a Polish space. For i = 1, 2 let Xi = Xi . If G1 ≤w G2 then E1 B E2 . Y Gi with the shift action of Gi and Ei = EG i Proof. X2 by
First suppose G1 ≤ G2 . Let y0 ∈ Y . Define an embedding ϕ : X1 → ϕ(f )(g) =
f (g), if g ∈ G1 , if g ∈ G1 . y0 ,
Then for g1 ∈ G1 , ϕ(g1 · f ) = g1 · ϕ(f ). Thus f E1 f implies ϕ(f )E2 ϕ(f ). Conversely, suppose g ·ϕ(f ) = ϕ(f ) for some g ∈ G2 . If g ∈ G1 then g ·f = f . Otherwise it must be the case that both f and f take constant value of y0 , and thus f = f . Next suppose G1 is a quotient of G2 , and let π : G2 → G1 be an onto homomorphism. Then define ψ : X1 → X2 by ψ(f )(g) = f (π(g)). Then for any g2 ∈ G2 , g2 ·ψ(f ) = ψ(π(g2 )·f ). It follows easily that E1 B E2 . The general case G1 ≤w G2 is a composition of the above cases considered, and we are done by the transitivity of B . In several steps we will build up a reduction of the shift action of F2 on 2F2 ×ω to simply its shift action on 2F2 . Proposition 7.3.5 X Let G be a countable group, X = 2G×ω , and E = EG . Let Y = 3G×Z with the shift action of G × Z and let F be the orbit equivalence relation. Then E B F . Proof. Fix a bijection of ω with Z−{0}. We can then view X as 2G×(Z−{0}) since they are Borel isomorphic as Borel G-spaces. Define an embedding ϕ : 2G×(Z−{0}) → Y by f (h, n), if n = 0, ϕ(f )(h, n) = 2, if n = 0.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
167
Then for any g ∈ G, ϕ(g · f ) = (g, 0) · ϕ(f ). Conversely, if ϕ(f ) = (g, m) · ϕ(f ), then m = 0 and f = g · f . This is because, suppose m = 0, then ϕ(f )(h, 0) = 2 for all h ∈ G and therefore ϕ(f )(h, m) = ((g, m)·ϕ(f ))(h, m) = ϕ(f )(g −1 h, 0) = 2 for all h ∈ G, but this is a contradiction since ϕ(f )(h, m) = f (h, m) ∈ {0, 1} by definition. Proposition 7.3.6 X Let G be a countable group, X = 3G , and E = EG . Let F be the orbit equivalence relation of the shift action of G × Z2 on 2G×Z2 . Then E B F . Proof. by
View 0 as encoded by 00, 1 by 01, and 2 by 11. Define ϕ : X → 2G×Z2 ϕ(f )(h, i) =
0, if f (h) = 0 or if f (h) = 1 and i = 0, 1, if f (h) = 1 and i = 1 or if f (h) = 2.
Then for any g ∈ G, ϕ(g · f ) = (g, 0) · ϕ(f ). Conversely, if ϕ(f ) = (g, i)ϕ(f ), then we claim that ϕ(f ) = (g, 0) · ϕ(f ) and f = g · f . Suppose ϕ(f ) = (g, 1) · ϕ(f ), then ϕ(f ) = (1G , 1) · ϕ(g · f ), and thus without loss of generality we may assume ϕ(f ) = (1G , 1) · ϕ(f ). It is a property of the coding used that if ϕ(f )(h, 0) = 1 then ϕ(f )(h, 1) = 1 as well. Thus by our assumption if ϕ(f )(h, 1) = ϕ(f )(h, 0) = 1 then ϕ(f )(h, 0) = ϕ(f )(h, 1) = 1. Similarly we also have that if ϕ(f )(h, 1) = 0 then ϕ(f )(h, 0) = 0. It follows that for any h ∈ G, ϕ(f )(h, 0) = ϕ(f )(h, 1) = ϕ(f )(h, 0) = ϕ(f )(h, 1). So f = f . Notation 7.3.7 Let E∞ denote the orbit equivalence relation induced by the shift action of F2 on 2F2 . Theorem 7.3.8 E∞ is a universal countable Borel equivalence relation. Proof. By Proposition 7.3.3 the orbit equivalence relation of F2 shift action on 2F2 ×ω is already a universal countable Borel equivalence relation. By Proposition 7.3.5 it is Borel embeddable into orbit equivalence relation of the shift action of F2 × Z on 3F2 ×Z , and by Proposition 7.3.6 the latter orbit equivalence relation is in turn Borel embeddable into that of the shift action of F2 × Z × Z2 on 2F2 ×Z×Z2 . The group F2 × Z × Z2 is a quotient of Fω , and thus by Proposition 7.3.4, the last equivalence relation is Borel embeddable into that of the shift action of Fω on 2Fω . This shows that the shift action of Fω on 2Fω is a universal countable Borel equivalence relation. Now since Fω is a subgroup of F2 , by Proposition 7.3.4 again E∞ is also universal. In the next section we will show that E0
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
168
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
complicated (see Reference [1] by Adams and Kechris). Exercise 7.3.1 Give a direct proof of Proposition 7.3.1. Exercise 7.3.2 Prove Proposition 7.3.2. Exercise 7.3.3 Show that for any n ≥ 2 the shift action of Fn on 2Fn gives rise to a universal countable Borel equivalence relation. Consider the shift action of Fn on 2Fn . Let Fn be the free part of this action, that is, Fn = {x ∈ 2Fn : ∀g ∈ Fn ( g = 1G ⇒ g · x = x ) }. Exercise 7.3.4 Show that Fn is an invariant dense Gδ subset of 2Fn . Exercise 7.3.5 Let μn be the usual product measure on 2Fn . Show that μn (Fn ) = 1. Exercise 7.3.6 Let En be the orbit equivalence relation on Fn of the induced Fn action. Show that En B E2 for all n ≥ 2.
7.4
Amenable groups and amenable equivalence relations
In this section we show that the universal countable Borel equivalence relation E∞ defined in the preceding section is not hyperfinite. To do this we discuss the concept of amenability for countable groups and their orbit equivalence relations. The study of amenable groups and amenable equivalence relations is interesting in its own right and is a well-established subject in ergodic theory. We first give the definitions. Definition 7.4.1 Let X be a set. A finitely additive probability measure on X is a map μ : P (X) → [0, 1], where P (X) = {A : A ⊆ X} is the power set of X, such that μ(∅) = 0, μ(X) = 1, and μ(A ∪ B) = μ(A) + μ(B) if A ∩ B = ∅. If G is a group, a finitely additive probability measure μ on G is leftinvariant if for all g ∈ G and A ⊆ G, μ(gA) = μ(A). A countable group G is amenable if there is a left-invariant finitely additive probability measure μ on G.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
169
Definition 7.4.2 A countable group G satisfies the Reiter condition if for all > 0 and g1 , . . . , gn ∈ G there is f : G → R≥0 such that g∈G f (g) = 1 and for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n, g∈G |f (g) − f (gi−1 g)| < . G satisfies the Følner condition if for all > 0 and g1 , . . . , gn ∈ G there is a finite F ⊆ G such that for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n, |gi F F | < |F |. It is known that the Reiter condition and the Følner condition are equivalent to amenability for countable groups. Here, to keep our exposition selfcontained, we only prove the following weaker theorem. Theorem 7.4.3 Let G be a countable group. If G satisfies the Reiter condition then it also satisfies the Følner condition. If G satisfies the Følner condition then it is amenable. Proof. First we assume that G satisfies the Reitercondition. Let > 0 and g1 , . . . , gn ∈ G. Let f : G → R≥0 be such that g∈G f (g) = 1 and for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n, g∈G |f (g) − f (gi−1 g)| < /n. For each 0 < r ≤ 1 we let Fr = {g ∈ G : f (g) ≥ r} and χr be the characteristic function of Fr . Since 1 g∈G f (g) = 1 the set Fr is finite for any r > 0. Note that f (g) = 0 χr (g)dr, |Fr | = g∈G χr (g), and |Fr gi Fr | = |Fr gi−1 Fr | = g∈G |χr (g)− χr (gi−1 g)| for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n. Then for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n, ! 1 ! 1 |Fr gi Fr |dr = |χr (g) − χr (gi−1 g)|dr 0
=
0 g∈G
! g∈G
<
1
0
|χr (g) − χr (gi−1 g)|dr =
|f (g) − f (gi−1 g)|
g∈G
! ! 1 1 = f (g) = χr (g)dr = χr (g)dr n n n n 0 0 g∈G
=
n
!
It follows that
1
g∈G
g∈G
|Fr |dr.
0
! 0
n 1 i=1
! |Fr gi Fr |dr < 0
1
|Fr |dr,
n and thus there is 0 < r ≤ 1 such that i=1 |Fr gi Fr | < |Fr |. This Fr witnesses the Følner condition for G. Now for the second part of the theorem assume that G satisfies the Følner condition. Enumerate G as g0 , g1 , . . . , gn , . . . and for each n ∈ ω let Fn ⊆ G be
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
170
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
a finite subset of G such that |Fn gi Fn | < 2−n |Fn |. Let U be a nonprincipal ultrafilter on ω. For A ⊆ G, define μ(A) = lim
n∈U
|A ∩ Fn | . |Fn |
Then μ is a finitely additive probability measure on G. It remains to check that μ is left-invariant. For this let g ∈ G and A ⊆ G. Then | |gA ∩ Fn | − |A ∩ Fn | | |Fn | " " " |A ∩ g −1 Fn | − |A ∩ Fn | " = lim n∈U |Fn | " −1 " "g Fn Fn " ≤ lim = 0. n∈U |Fn |
|μ(gA) − μ(A)| = lim
n∈U
Thus G is amenable. It is easy to see that Z satisfies the Reiter condition. In fact for any integer N > 1 let fN : Z → R≥0 be defined as fN (n) =
1/N, if 0 < n ≤ N , 0, otherwise.
Then for any finite collection of elements of Z one of the functions fN witnesses the Reiter condition. It follows that Z is amenable. Proposition 7.4.4 F2 is not amenable. Proof. Assume that μ is a left-invariant finitely additive probability measure on F2 . Let a and b be the generators of F2 . For each s ∈ {a, b, a−1 , b−1 } let A(s) be the set of all elements of F2 whose reduced form starts with s. Then A(a), A(b), A(a−1 ), A(b−1 ) form a partition of F2 . Also we have that A(a) = a(A(b) ∪ A(b−1 ) ∪ A(a)). Since μ is left-invariant, we have that μ(A(a)) = μ(A(b) ∪ A(b−1 ) ∪ A(a)) = μ(A(b)) + μ(A(b−1 )) + μ(A(a)). It follows that μ(A(b)) = μ(A(b−1 )) = 0. Similarly we also obtain that μ(A(a)) = μ(A(a−1 )) = 0. But then μ(F2 ) = 0, a contradiction. We now turn to equivalence relations. The following definition of amenable equivalence relations is inspired by the Reiter condition.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
171
Definition 7.4.5 Let X be a standard Borel space, μ a probability Borel measure on X, and E a countable equivalence relation. We say that (X, E, μ) is amenable, or E is μ-amenable, if there is a sequence of Borel functions ϕn : E → R≥0 such that (a) for any x ∈ X,
yEx
ϕn (x, y) = 1, and
(b) there is a Borel E-invariant set A ⊆ X with μ(A) = 1 such that for all (x, x ) ∈ E ∩ (A × A),
|ϕn (x, y) − ϕn (x , y)| → 0 as n → ∞.
yEx
Proposition 7.4.6 Let G be a countable group, X a Borel G-space, and μ a Borel probability X measure on X. If G satisfies the Reiter condition, then EG is μ-amenable. Proof. Enumerate . . . and for each n ≥ 1 let fn : G → G as g0 , g1 , . . . , gn , R≥0 be such that g∈G f (g) = 1 and g∈G |f (g) − f (gi−1 g)| < 1/n for all i < n. Then for x, y ∈ X let ϕn (x, y) = fn (g). g·y=x
Then for every x ∈ X, yEx ϕn (x, y) = g∈G fn (g) = 1. If xEx and x = h · x , then for any yEx, fn (g) − fn (g ) = fn (g) − fn (h−1 g), ϕn (x, y) − ϕn (x , y) = g·y=x
and
g ·y=x
|ϕn (x, y) − ϕn (x , y)| ≤
yEx
g·y=x
|fn (g) − fn (h−1 g)| → 0
g∈G
X is μ-amenable. as n → ∞. Thus EG
In particular, every hyperfinite equivalence relation is μ-amenable for any Borel probability measure μ. We will show below that the amenability of an orbit equivalence relation can be pulled back to conclude the amenability of the group. For this we need the notion of G-invariance for measures, as follows.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
172
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 7.4.7 Let G be a countable group, X a Borel G-space, and μ a Borel probability measure on X. We say that μ is G-invariant if for all g ∈ G and Borel S ⊆ X, μ(S) = μ(g · S). Theorem 7.4.8 Let G be a countable group, X a Borel G-space, and μ a Borel probability X is measure on X. Suppose the action is free and μ is G-invariant. If EG μ-amenable, then G is amenable. Proof. It suffices to show that G satisfies the Reiter condition. Let ϕn be X . Define Borel functions witnessing the μ-amenability of EG ! fn (g) = ϕn (x, g · x)dμ(x). Then g∈G fn (g) = g∈G ϕn (x, g · x)dμ(x) = 1. In addition, for every h ∈ G, by the assumptions we have |fn (g) − fn (h−1 g)| g∈G ! ! = | ϕn (x, g · x)dμ(x) − ϕn (x, h−1 g · x)dμ(x)| g∈G ! ! = | ϕn (x, g · x)dμ(x) − ϕn (h · x, g · x)dμ(x)| g∈G ! ≤ |ϕn (x, g · x) − ϕ(h · x, g · x)|dμ(x) g∈G ! = |ϕn (x, g · x) − ϕn (h · x, g · x)|dμ(x) ! g∈G = |ϕn (x, y) − ϕn (h · x, y)|dμ(x) → 0 yEx
as > 0 and g1 , . . . , gm ∈ G, then for large enough n we have n → ∞. Now if −1 |f (g) − f (g g)| < for all 1 ≤ i ≤ m. This shows that G satisfies n n i g∈G the Reiter condition, and is therefore amenable. The usual product measure on 2G is a canonical example of a G-invariant measure (Exercise 7.4.5). To apply the above theorem we check below that its free part has full measure. Lemma 7.4.9 Let G be a countably infinite group, X = 2G with the shift action of G, and μ the usual product measure on X. Let F be the free part of X. Then μ(F ) = 1.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
173
Proof. We show that for any g ∈ G, the set {x ∈ 2G : g · x = x} has measure 0. Consider two cases. Case 1: g is of infinite order, that is, for any n = m ∈ Z, g n = g m . In this case note that if g · x = x then for all n ∈ Z, we have x(g 2n ) = x(g 2n+1 ). Thus # $ μ ({x : g · x = x}) ≤ μ {x : ∀n ∈ Z x(g 2n ) = x(g 2n+1 )} =
n∈Z
# $ 1 = 0. μ {x : x(g 2n ) = x(g 2n+1 )} = 2 n∈Z
Case 2: g has finite order, that is, for some n ∈ Z, g n = 1G . In this case let H = g ≤ G. Then H is a finite subgroup of G. Since G is infinite, there are infinitely many right-cosets of H in G. Let g0 , g1 , . . . be chosen from infinitely many distinct cosets of H in G. Note that if g · x = x then for all n ∈ ω, we have x(gn ) = x(ggn ). Moreover, for distinct n, m ∈ ω, {gn , ggn } ∩ {gm , ggm } = ∅. Thus similar to Case 1 we have μ ({x : g · x = x}) ≤ μ ({x : ∀n ∈ ω x(gn ) = x(ggn )}) =
μ ({x : x(gn ) = x(ggn )}) =
n∈ω
1 = 0. 2
n∈Z
We are finally ready to prove the main theorem of this section. Theorem 7.4.10 E∞ is not hyperfinite. In particular, E0
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
174
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 7.4.4 Prove that if G and H both satisfy the Reiter condition then so does G × H. Exercise 7.4.5 Let G be a countable group, X = 2G with the shift action of G, and μ the usual product measure on X. Show that μ is G-invariant. Exercise 7.4.6 Let F2 be the free part of 2F2 with the shift action of F2 . Let E∞T denote the equivalence relation E∞ restricted to F2 . Show that E∞T is not hyperfinite.
7.5
Actions of locally compact Polish groups
In this section we prove a theorem of Kechris [92] that any orbit equivalence relation of an action of a locally compact Polish group is essentially countable, that is, Borel reducible to a countable Borel equivalence relation. We will use the following theorem, which is a generalization of the Luzin–Novikov uniformization theorem (Theorem 7.1.2) to sets with Kσ sections. Recall that a subset of topological space is Kσ if it is a union of countably many compact sets. Theorem 7.5.1 (Arsenin–Kunugui) Let Y be a Polish space, X a standard Borel space, and P ⊆ X × Y Borel. Suppose each section Px is Kσ . Then projX (P ) is Borel and P has a Borel uniformization. A proof can be found in Reference [97] Theorem 35.46. Also recall that a complete section of an equivalence relation E on X is a subset Y of X which meets every E-equivalence class. We say that a complete section Y is countable if Y ∩ [x]E is countable for every x ∈ X. Theorem 7.5.2 (Kechris) Let G be a locally compact Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then there X . is a Borel countable complete section of EG Proof. In view of Theorem 4.4.6 we may assume X is a Polish G-space without loss of generality. Let d be a compatible metric on X. Let K0 be a compact nbhd of 1G and K a compact symmetric nbhd (that is, K = K −1 ) of 1G with K 2 ⊆ K0 . Let N = Int(K). Consider the following relation defined on X: R(x, y) ⇐⇒ ∃g ∈ K (g · x = y).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
175
R is symmetric and reflexive, but not necessarily an equivalence relation on X. However, we will construct a sequence of Borel sets Xn ⊆ X with X = n Xn such that R Xn is an equivalence relation. For > 0 put A = {x ∈ X : ∀g ∈ K0 ( d(x, g · x) ≤ ⇒ g ∈ N Gx ) }. Recall that Gx is the stabilizer of x. We check that each A is Borel. Note that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃g P (x, g), where P (x, g) ⇐⇒ g ∈ K0 − N Gx and d(x, g · x) ≤ . By the Arsenin–Kunugui uniformization theorem it suffices to show that P is Borel and that each section Px is Kσ . It is clear that every section Px is Kσ since G as a locally compact Polish group is Kσ and each Px is closed in G. To see that P is Borel, note that the conditions g ∈ K0 and d(x, g · x) ≤ are closed. Hence it is enough to see that g ∈ N Gx is a Borel condition. For this we note that g ∈ N Gx ⇐⇒ ∃h ∈ Gx ∃k ∈ N ( g = hk ) ⇐⇒ ∃h∃k Q(g, x, h, k), where Q(g, x, h, k) ⇐⇒ h · x = x ∧ k ∈ N ∧ g = hk. Q is obviously Borel, with sections Qg,x Fσ in G × G and hence Kσ . Thus again by the Arsenin–Kunugui theorem we have that g ∈ N Gx is Borel, which in turn implies that A is Borel.
Next we claim that X = n≥1 A1/n . Toward a contradiction assume x ∈ A1/n for any n ≥ 1. We obtain a sequence gn ∈ K0 such that d(x, gn ·x) ≤ 1/n but gn ∈ N Gx . By compactness of K0 there is an accumulation point g∞ ∈ K0 of gn . Then g∞ · x = x but g∞ ∈ N Gx since N Gx is open. This is a contradiction since 1G ∈ N . Next we note that if B ⊆ A has diameter ≤ then R B is an equivalence relation. If suffices to check that R B is transitive. For this let x, y, z ∈ B with R(x, y) and R(y, z). So there are g, h ∈ K with g · x = y and h · y = z. Since K 2 ⊆ K0 , hg ∈ K0 and d(x, hg · x) = d(x, z) ≤ diam(B) ≤ . Thus hg ∈ N Gx . This means that there is k ∈ N ⊆ K with z = k · x, and hence R(x, z). For each n ≥ 1 let {Bn,m : m ∈ ω} be a countable open cover of X with diam(Bn,m ) ≤ 1/n. Then the collection {A1/n ∩ Bn,m : n ≥ 1, m ∈ ω} is a countable Borel cover of X so that the restriction of R on each set is an equivalence relation. Let Xn enumerate this collection of Borel sets.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
176
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
We claim that R Xn is smooth. To see this note that R is closed in X ×X. Let τ be a Polish topology on X extending the topology induced by d so that Xn is clopen in (X, τ ). Then R is still closed in τ × τ . Now R Xn is a closed equivalence relation on the Polish space (Xn , τ Xn ), therefore it is smooth. X By Proposition 5.4.10 EG is idealistic, that is, there is a Borel map C → IC X assigning to each E -equivalence class C a σ-ideal IC so that C ∈ IC G
. Now X since X = n Xn , for each EG equivalence class C we also have C = n (C ∩ Xn ). It follows that there is an n ∈ ω such that C ∩ Xn ∈ IC . Let n(C) be the least such n for the class C. Put Y0 = [x]G ∩ Xn([x]G ) . x∈X
Then Y0 is Borel since for C = [x]G , x ∈ Y0 ⇐⇒ ∃n [ ∀m < n ( C ∩ Xm ∈ IC ) ∧ C ∩ Xn ∈ IC ∧ x ∈ Xn ]. X It is clear that Y0 is a complete section for EG . Let Y0,n = Y0 ∩ Xn . Then {Y0,n : n ∈ ω} is a partition of Y0 . Since R Xn is a smooth equivalence relation, it follows that R Y0,n is also a smooth equivalence relation, and X therefore so is R Y0 . It is clear that each EG Y0 equivalence class in Y0 contains only countably many R Y0 -classes. Define Y ⊆ Y0 by
x ∈ Y ⇐⇒ x ∈ Y0 ∧ [x]RY0 ∈ I[x]G . X . We still have that R Y is Then again Y is a Borel complete section of EG smooth. Now R Y is idealistic, witnessed by the assignment
[x]RY −→ I[x]G [x]RY . By Theorem 5.4.11 R Y has a Borel selector as well as a Borel transversal. X , A is a complete Let A be a Borel transversal of R Y on Y . Since R ⊆ EG X X section of EG . Each EG Y class in Y contains only countably many R Y X , as required. classes. Thus A is a Borel countable complete section for EG Corollary 7.5.3 X Let G be a locally compact Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then EG X is essentially countable, that is, EG ≤B E∞ . X Proof. Let A ⊆ X be a Borel countable complete section of EG . Let X F = EG A. Then F is a countable Borel equivalence relation on the standard Borel space A. By Theorem 7.1.2 there is a Borel function f : X → A X X x for all x ∈ X. Then f witnesses that EG ≤B F . so that f (x)EG
Exercise 7.5.1 Show that the following are equivalent for a Borel equivalence relation E:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Countable Borel Equivalence Relations
177
(a) E is essentially countable; (b) there is a Borel countable complete section of E;
(c) E = n En where each En is smooth and idealistic;
(d) E = n En where each En has a Borel selector. Exercise 7.5.2 Let n ≥ 1. Consider the space F (Rn ) of all closed subsets of Rn . If A, B ∈ F (Rn ) we say that A is congruent to B, denoted A ∼ B, if there is an isometry from A onto B. Show that the congruence relation on F (Rn ) is essentially countable.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 8 Borel Equivalence Relations
In this chapter we continue our introduction of Borel equivalence relations. The primary classification here is orbit equivalence relations versus equivalence relations not reducible to orbit equivalence relations. Again we only give a self-contained account of the basic facts. The more interested reader should go beyond this book and find a vast literature about the subject. Along with many theorems there are also a large number of open problems. Many of the problems are fundamental, the answers of which might potentially redefine the subject.
8.1
Hypersmooth equivalence relations
The concept of a hypersmooth equivalence relation is a natural generalization of hyperfiniteness. Definition 8.1.1 Let X be a standard Borel space. An equivalence relation E on X is hypersmooth if E = n En , where En are smooth equivalence relations and En ⊆ En+1 for all n. Similar to the equivalence relation E0 we define a canonical hypersmooth equivalence relation E1 . Definition 8.1.2 The equivalence relation E1 is defined on 2ω×ω as xE1 y ⇐⇒ ∃m ∀n ≥ m ∀k x(n, k) = y(n, k). It is easy to check that E1 is hypersmooth. We can also consider the eventual agreement for sequences of actual real numbers. Let E1 (R) denote the equivalence relation on Rω defined by (xn )E1 (yn ) ⇐⇒ ∃m ∀n ≥ m xn = yn . It is easy to see that E1 (R) is also hypersmooth and that E1 ∼B E1 (R). For notational simplicity we also write x = (xn ) for x ∈ 2ω×ω and xn ∈ 2ω , where x(n, k) = xn (k) for all n, k ∈ ω.
179 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
180
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
We have the following closure properties for hypersmooth equivalence relations. The proof is left to the reader (Exercise 8.1.1). Proposition 8.1.3 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and E, F equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. Then the following are true: (1) If F is hypersmooth and E ≤B F , then E is hypersmooth. (2) If E is hypersmooth and A ⊆ X is Borel, then E A is hypersmooth. (3) If E and F are hypersmooth, then so is E × F . The following characterization of hypersmoothness is analogous to the one on hyperfiniteness. Proposition 8.1.4 Let X be a standard Borel space and E an equivalence relation on X. Then the following are equivalent: (i) E is hypersmooth. (ii) E ≤B E1 . (iii) E B E1 . Proof. By Proposition 8.1.3 (1) we have that (iii)⇒(ii)⇒(i). It suffices to
show (i)⇒(iii). For this let E be hypersmooth. Let E = n Fn where Fn is smooth and Fn ⊆ Fn+1 for all n ∈ ω. Without loss of generality assume that F0 = id(X). Let fn : X → 2ω witness that Fn ≤B id(2ω ). Then in particular f0 is a Borel injection from X into 2ω . Define f : X → 2ω×ω by f (x)(n, k) = fn (x)(k). Then f is a Borel injection and xEy ⇐⇒ f (x)E1 f (y), as required. Hyperfinite equivalence relations are of course hypersmooth. Conversely, we have the following theorem. Theorem 8.1.5 (Dougherty–Jackson–Kechris) Let X be a standard Borel space and E a countable Borel equivalence relation on X. If E is hypersmooth, then it is hyperfinite.
Proof. Let E = n Fn , where each Fn is smooth, Fn ⊆ Fn+1 for all n ∈ ω. Without loss of generality assume F0 = id(X). Each Fn is a countable equivalence relation. Hence by the Feldman–Moore Theorem 7.1.4 there are countX . By Proposiable groups Gn with Borel actions on X so that Fn = EG n tion 5.4.10 and Theorem 5.4.11 there are Borel selectors sn for Fn , that is,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
181
sn (x)Fn x and sn (x) = sn (y) for all x, y ∈ X with xEn y. Fix an enumeration for Gn as {gn,k }k∈ω . We define a sequence of relations Rn as follows: xRn y ⇐⇒ ∃m ≤ n ( xFm y∧ ∃k0 , . . . , km ≤ n [x = g0,k0 s0 g1,k1 s1 . . . gm,km sm (x)]∧ ∃l0 , . . . , lm ≤ n [y = g0,l0 s0 g1,l1 s1 . . . gm,lm sm (y)]). Then Rn ⊆ Fn and Rn ⊆ Rn+1 . We claim that E = n Rn . Suppose xEy. Then there is m ∈ ω such that xFm y. For every j ≤ m, there is gj,kj ∈ G with x = gj,kj sj (x). Similarly, for each j ≤ m there is gj,lj ∈ G with y = gj,lj sj (y). Then we have that x = g0,j0 s0 g1,j1 s1 . . . gm,km sm (x) and y = g0,l0 s0 g1,l1 s1 . . . gm,lm sm (y). Let n = max{m, k0 , k1 , . . . , km , l0 , . . . , lm }. Then xRn y. Next we check that Rn is an equivalence relation. Clearly Rn is reflexive and symmetric. We only show its transitivity. For this let xRn yRn z. Let m, k0 , . . . , km , l0 , . . . , lm ≤ n witness that xRn y and, without loss of generality, let p ≤ m and h0 , . . . , hp ≤ n be such that yEp z and g0,h0 s0 g1,h1 s1 . . . gp,hp sp (z) = z. If m = p then there is nothing to prove. We assume p < m. Then we have that xFm yFp z and thus xFm z. Note that sm (y) = sm (z) since yFp z and p < m. Let v = gp+1,lp+1 sp+1 . . . gm,lm sm (y) = gp+1,lp+1 sp+1 . . . gm,lm sm (z). Then y = g0,l0 s0 g1,l1 s1 . . . gp,lp sp (v) and hence vFp y. Since yFp z it follows that vFp z, and thus sp (v) = sp (z). Therefore z = g0,h0 s0 g1,h1 s1 . . . gp,hp sp (z) = g0,h0 s0 g1,h1 s1 . . . gp,hp sp (v) = g0,h0 s0 g1,h1 s1 . . . gp,hp sp gp+1,lp+1 sp+1 . . . gm,lm sm (y) = g0,h0 s0 g1,h1 s1 . . . gp,hp sp gp+1,lp+1 sp+1 . . . gm,lm sm (z). This shows that xRn z, and thus Rn is an equivalence relation. Finally note that Rn is finite, since sm (x) = sm (y) for any yFm x. We have thus obtained
an increasing sequence of finite Borel equivalence relations Rn with E = n Rn , and therefore E is hyperfinite. In the rest of this section we analyze the equivalence relation E1 and show that it is not essentially countable. This implies in particular that it is not essentially hyperfinite, and hence E0
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
182
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Theorem 8.1.6 (Kechris–Louveau) Let X be a standard Borel space, F a countable Borel equivalence relation on X, and f : 2ω×ω → X a Borel map such that xE1 y ⇒ f (x)F f (y). Then there are x, y ∈ 2ω×ω such that (a) for n = m, xn = xm and yn = ym , (b) for n, m ∈ ω, xn = ym , and (c) f (x) = f (y). In particular, E1 ≤B F . Proof. Let C = n Un ⊆ 2ω×ω where Un ⊇ Un+1 are dense open such that f C is continuous. We construct sequences (ln ), (kn ), (pn ), (qn ), (xn ), (yn ) such that the following conditions are met: (i) ln , kn ∈ ω, ln < ln+1 , kn < kn+1 for all n ∈ ω; (ii) pn , qn ∈ 2ln ×kn ; (iii) Npn , Nqn ⊆ Un , where Ns = {x ∈ 2ω×ω : s ⊆ x} for any s ∈ 2l×k with l, k ∈ ω; (iv) xn , yn ∈ 2ln ×ω with pn ⊆ xn ⊆ xn+1 , qn ⊆ yn ⊆ yn+1 ; for i = j < ln , (xn )i = (xn )j , (yn )i = (yn )j ; for any i, j < ln , (xn )i = (xn )j ; (v) ∀∗ z ∈ 2ω×ω (xn z ∈ C ∧ yn z ∈ C); (vi) ∃∗ z ∈ 2ω×ω f (xn z) = f (yn z).
Granting this construction, we can let x = n xn and y = n yn . Then x and y satisfy conditions (a) and (b) of the theorem, and by (iii) x, y ∈ C. Let zn ∈ 2ω×ω be such that xn zn , yn zn ∈ C and f (xn zn ) = f (yn zn ). Such zn exists by (v) and (vi). Then xn zn → x and yn zn → y as n → ∞, and by the continuity of f on C we get that f (x) = f (y). To show that the construction is possible, we need to use the following claim. Claim. Let p ∈ 2l×k and ϕ : D → X, where D ⊆ Np is comeager in Np , such that for x, y ∈ D, xE1 y ⇒ ϕ(x)F ϕ(y). Then there is p ≥ p and r both in 2<ω×<ω such that ∀∗ u ∈ Np ∀∗ v ∈ Np ∀∗ z ∈ Nr ϕ(u z) = ϕ(v z). To prove the claim, consider a family of functions defined as follows. For x ∈ 2ω×ω define ψx : 2l×ω → X by letting ψx (u) = ϕ(u x) wherever ϕ is defined. For a comeager set of x in 2ω×ω , ψx is well defined on a comeager set of u in Np . Since for u, v ∈ 2l×ω , ux E1 v x for any x ∈ 2ω×ω , we also get that ψx (u) = ϕ(u x)F ϕ(v x) = ψx (v).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
183
Therefore, whenever ψx is defined, its range is a countable set. Thus there are px ⊇ p in 2l×<ω such that ψx is constant on a comeager subset of Npx in 2l×ω . A similar argument shows that there is r ∈ 2<ω×<ω such that for a comeager set of x in Nr the map x → px is constant. Let p be this constant value of px for comeager many x ∈ Nr . Thus ∀∗ x ∈ Nr ∀∗ u ∈ Np ∀∗ v ∈ Np ϕ(u x) = ϕ(v x). The claim follows by the Kuratowski–Ulam theorem. We now turn to the construction by induction on n. Assume that ln , kn , pn , qn , xn , and yn have been constructed to satisfy (i) through (vi). By (v) and (vi) there is r ∈ 2<ω×<ω such that $ # ∀∗ z ∈ Nr xn z, yn z ∈ C ∧ f (xn z) = f (yn z) .
Without loss of generality assume r ∈ 2l ×k for some l > 0 and k > kn . Also by extending we may assume that if we let s = xn (ln × k ) r then ∗ l ×ω ∗ ω×ω ∀ z∈2 Ns ⊆ Un+1 . Then it follows that ∀ u ∈ Nr ∩ 2 f (xn u z) = f (yn u z). Now define ϕ(x) = f (xn x) = f (yn x) for x = u z where u ∈ Nr and z ∈ 2ω×ω . Then on a comeager set of Nr ϕ is well defined. It certainly satisfies that xE1 y ⇒ ϕ(x)F ϕ(y) since f satisfies it. Thus by the above claim we can find extensions r ⊇ r such that ∀∗ u ∈ Nr ∀∗ v ∈ Nr ∀∗ z ∈ 2ω×ω : f (xn u z) = f (yn v z). Now it is easy to extend r to pn+1 and qn+1 so that for any u ⊇ pn+1 and v ⊇ qn+1 , condition (iv) holds for u, v. Let xn+1 ⊇ pn+1 and yn+1 ⊇ qn+1 be witnesses in the appropriate comeager set. Then (v) and (vi) are satisfied. This completes the construction as well as the proof of the theorem. Kechris and Louveau [102] have shown a dichotomy theorem that any hypersmooth equivalence relation is either essentially hyperfinite or else Borel bireducible with E1 . The proof uses the Gandy–Harrington topology as in the proof of the Glimm–Effros dichotomy theorem. This penetrating theorem completely determines the Borel reducibility structure of hypersmooth equivalence relations. A by-product of their proof is that E1 is not Borel reducible to any idealistic Borel equivalence relation. A further result of theirs states X (even if it that E1 is not Borel reducible to any orbit equivalence relation EG is non-Borel). These results suggest the possibility that idealistic equivalence relations coincide with the orbit equivalence relations. We will give a proof of this last result, that E1 is not Borel reducible to any orbit equivalence relation, later in Section 10.6 (Theorem 10.6.1) as an application of the techniques developed in Chapter 10.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
184
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Exercise 8.1.1 Prove Proposition 8.1.3. Exercise 8.1.2 Recall that the tail equivalence relation Et on 2ω is defined by xEt y ⇐⇒ ∃n∃m∀k ( x(n + k) = y(m + k) ). Show that Et is hyperfinite but not smooth. Thus E ∼B E0 . Exercise 8.1.3 Show that a hypersmooth equivalence relation is essentially countable iff it is idealistic. (Hint: Use Exercise 7.5.1.)
8.2
Borel orbit equivalence relations
In Section 3.4 we already analyzed some conditions guaranteeing Borelness of orbit equivalence relations. For instance, if a Borel action of a Polish group is free then the orbit equivalence relation is Borel. We now give some more characterizations of Borelness of orbit equivalence relations. Recall the following notation about group actions. Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. For x ∈ X the stabilizer of x is the closed subgroup Gx = {g ∈ G : g · x = x}. For x, y ∈ X we denote Gx,y = {g ∈ G : g · x = y}. Then Gx,y is a left coset of Gx since for any g, h ∈ Gx,y , h−1 g ∈ Gx . We view Gx and Gx,y as elements of the Effros Borel space F (G) of all closed subsets of G. Theorem 8.2.1 (Becker–Kechris) Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Then the following are equivalent: X (i) EG is Borel.
(ii) The map x → Gx from X into F (G) is Borel. (iii) The map (x, y) → Gx,y from X × X into F (G) is Borel.
X y Proof. We show that (i)⇒(ii)⇒(iii)⇒(i). (iii)⇒(i) is obvious since xEG iff Gx,y = ∅. We next show (ii)⇒(iii). For this let U ⊆ G be nonempty open. Then
Gx,y ∩ U = ∅ ⇐⇒ ∃g ∈ G (g · x = y ∧ Gx ∩ g −1 U = ∅) ⇐⇒ Gx,y = ∅ ∧ ∀g ∈ G (g · x = y ⇒ Gx ∩ g −1 U = ∅)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
185
The computation shows that the condition is both Σ11 and Π11 , and is therefore Borel. X It remains to show (i)⇒(ii). For this we assume EG is Borel. We use the X ⊆ X × X, to obtain uniform version of Theorem 4.4.6, Exercise 4.4.4, for EG a Borel set B ⊆ X ×X ×ω with the following properties. For y ∈ X and n ∈ ω let By,n = {x ∈ X : (x, y, n) ∈ B} and let σy be the topology generated by the countable collection {By,n : n ∈ ω}. Then for each y ∈ X, By,0 = [y]G , and (X, σy ) is a Polish G-space. We may assume that {By,n : n ∈ ω} is a countable base for σy . We are now ready to show that the map x → Gx from X into F (G) is Borel. For this we fix a countable base U = {Um } of nonempty open sets for −1 Uk : the topology of G. It is easy to see that the countable collection {Um m, k ∈ ω} is still a base for the topology of G. Moreover, −1 Uk = ∅ ⇐⇒ Um Gx ∩ Uk = ∅. Gx ∩ Um
Thus, in order to finish the proof, it suffices to show that for any nonempty open U, V ⊆ G, the set {x ∈ X : U Gx ∩ V = ∅} is Borel. For this we claim that Um V → x ∈ Bx,n ). U Gx ∩ V = ∅ ⇐⇒ ∃m ∀n (Um ⊆ U ∧ x ∈ Bx,n
Suppose U Gx ∩ V = ∅ and let g0 ∈ Gx and h0 ∈ U with h0 g0 ∈ V . Let Um ⊆ U with h0 ∈ Um and Um g0 ⊆ V . Now for any A ⊆ X, x ∈ A Um ⇐⇒ ∃∗ h ∈ Um (h · x ∈ A) ⇐⇒ ∃∗ h ∈ Um g0 ⊆ V (h · x ∈ A) =⇒ x ∈ A V . Thus the direction (⇒) follows with A = Bn,x for any n ∈ ω. For the direction (⇐) assume U Gx ∩V = ∅. Then U ·x∩V ·x = ∅. Consider the topology σx on X. (X, σx ) is a Polish G-space and [x]G is σx -open. By Effros’ Theorem 3.2.4 the map gGx → g · x is a homeomorphism from G/Gx onto [x]G . It follows that U · x = U Gx · x is σx -open. Since {Bx,n : n ∈ ω} is a countable base for V σx , there exists n ∈ ω such that x ∈ Bx,n ⊆ U · x. It follows that x ∈ Bn,x . This completes the proof of the claim. The following is another useful characterization of Borelness of orbit equivalence relations. Theorem 8.2.2 (Sami) X Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then EG is Borel iff there 0 is α < ω1 such that every G-orbit is Πα . X X Proof. If EG is Borel then there is α < ω1 such that EG is a Π0α subset of X X × X. Then every G-orbit is a section of EG , and hence is Π0α . Conversely,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
186
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
consider for any α < ω1 the equivalence relation Eα defined by xEα y ⇐⇒ for all Π0α invariant subsets A ⊆ X, x ∈ A iff y ∈ A. X If every G-orbit is Π0α then Eα = EG . Hence it suffices to show that Eα is 1 Π1 for all α < ω1 . For this we use the fact that there is a Π0α subset U of ω ω × X which is universal for Π0α subsets of X (see Exercise 1.5.6). Consider the action of G on ω ω × X defined by
g · (z, x) = (z, g · x). Then the action is still continuous. Now let T = U ∗G ⊆ ω ω × X. Then for any z ∈ ω ω and x ∈ X, x ∈ Tz ⇐⇒ ∀∗ g ∈ G g ·(z, x) ∈ U ⇐⇒ ∀∗ g ∈ G g ·x ∈ Uz ⇐⇒ x ∈ (Uz )∗G . We claim that {Tz : z ∈ ω ω } consists of all Π0α invariant subsets of X. Since Tz = (Uz )∗G and Uz ∈ Π0α , Tz is Π0α invariant. Conversely, if A is Π0α invariant, then there is z ∈ ω ω with Uz = A, and furthermore, Tz = (Uz )∗G = A∗G = A. This finishes the proof of the claim. We thus have that xEα y ⇐⇒ ∀z ∈ ω ω (x ∈ Tz ↔ y ∈ Tz ), and hence Eα is Π11 . The assumption of a Polish group action is crucial in the theorem. It is easy to construct non-Borel equivalence relations with all equivalence classes closed (see Exercise 7.1.2). We give some examples of Borel orbit equivalence relations. By Corollary 7.5.3 any locally compact Polish group action generates an essentially countable equivalence relation, and thus a Borel one. In particular, the following scheme will yield many examples of Borel orbit equivalence relations with potentially distinct complexity in the Borel reducibility hierarchy. Consider an arbitrary uncountable Polish group H. Let G be an arbitrary countable subgroup of H. Then the coset equivalence relation H/G is a countable equivalence relation. Note that G is regarded to have the discrete topology, rather than the subspace topology inherited from H. However, the Borel structures on G generated by these topologies are the same. The following concept is an abstraction of this circumstance. Definition 8.2.3 Let H be a Polish group. A Polishable subgroup G of H is a Borel subgroup of H which admits a Polish topology τ generating the Borel structure on G inherited from that of H, and such that (G, τ ) is a topological group. If H is a Polish group and G is a Polishable subgroup of H, then the translation action of G on H is continuous and the coset equivalence relation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
187
H/G is obviously a Borel orbit equivalence relation. The seemingly technical requirement of Polishability is actually fulfilled by many examples other than countable subgroups. For example, the classical Banach spaces p (1 ≤ p < ∞) and c0 are Polishable subgroups of the additive group Rω . The Borel reducibility relation among these examples of Borel orbit equivalence relations are extremely complicated. In fact many questions about them remain open. We will discuss them again in the next few sections and the rest of the book. Exercise 8.2.1 Let G be a Polish group. Let S(G) be the set of all closed subgroups of G and C(G) be the set of all (left) cosets of closed subgroups of G. Show that both S(G) and C(G) are Borel subsets of F (G), and hence are standard Borel spaces. Exercise 8.2.2 (Dixmier) Show that for any Polish group G there is a Borel set T ⊆ S(G) × G such that for any H ∈ S(G), TH is a transversal for the left cosets of H. Exercise 8.2.3 Let G be a Polish group and X a Borel G-space. Show that X EG is Borel iff there is a Borel function g : X × X → G such that for all X xEG y, g(x, y) · x = y. Exercise 8.2.4 Show that p (1 ≤ p < ∞) and c0 are Polishable subgroups of Rω .
8.3
A jump operator for Borel equivalence relations
In this section we discuss an operation that will increase the Borel complexity of any nontrivial Borel equivalence relation. Definition 8.3.1 Let E be a Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. The Friedman–Stanley jump (or simply jump) of E, denoted by E + , is the equivalence relation on X ω defined by (xn )E + (yn ) ⇐⇒ {[xn ]E : n ∈ ω} = {[yn ]E : n ∈ ω}. E + is obviously an equivalence relation. To see that it is Borel, just note that (xn )E + (yn ) ⇐⇒ ∀n∃m(xn Eym ) ∧ ∀m∃n(xn Eym ). Thus in general if E is Σ0α for α < ω1 , then E + is Π0α+1 . It is easy to see that E ≤B E + for any equivalence relation E. We will show later in this
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
188
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
section that E
Let C ⊆ 2ω × ω ω be Π01 such that x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ C.
Let π : 2ω × ω ω → 2ω be the projection to the first coordinate. Then for any z ∈ C, π(z) ∈ A, and in particular, π(z) ∈ LO. Assume toward a contradiction that the described Δ11 set B exists. Then for any u, v ∈ C, if π(u) ∈ WO and π(v) ∈ WO then (π(u), π(v)) ∈ B, and if π(u) ∈ WO and π(v) ∈ WO then (π(u), π(v)) ∈ B. For each Π11 set P we consider a game GP as follows. First let C P ⊆ ω ω ×ω ω be Π01 such that x ∈ P ⇐⇒ ∃y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ C P .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
189
Then let T P be a tree on ω × ω such that [T P ] = C P . For each x ∈ ω ω , let TxP be the tree on ω defined by s ∈ TxP ⇐⇒ (x lh(s), s) ∈ T P . Then we have that x ∈ P ⇐⇒ ∀y ∈ ω ω (x, y) ∈ [T P ] ⇐⇒ TxP is well-founded. The game GP is now played as follows: I n II
a1 , u1 , ϕ1 a2 , u2 , ϕ2
where (i) n ∈ ω, ∈ {0, 1}, a1 , a2 ∈ 2ω ; (ii) if = 0 then n ∈ a1 but n ∈ a2 ; if = 1 then n ∈ a2 but n ∈ a1 ; (iii) u1 , u2 ∈ C (thus π(u1 ), π(u2 ) ∈ A ⊆ LO); (iv) for i = 1, 2, ϕi : TaPi → ω is strictly (reverse) order-preserving: if s, t ∈ TaPi and s t then ϕi (t) <π(ui ) ϕi (s). Then elements a1 , u1 , ϕ1 , a2 , u2 , ϕ2 are regarded as coded by subsets of ω and are understood to be played alternatively by the two players just as in the standard game. Then Player I wins the play iff (π(u1 ), π(u2 )) ∈ B. For each fixed Π11 set P the above game can be equivalently played on ω as a standard game where the payoff set is Borel. Thus by Borel determinacy the game GP is determined. We make some observations about the game GP where P is a singleton. For this we fix an arbitrary Π11 singleton a and replace all notation with superscript P by superscript a. We claim that Player II has a winning strategy in the game Ga . Since Ga is determined, it is enough to show that Player I does not have a winning strategy in Ga . Toward a contradiction assume he does. Consider the following play of the game. At the beginning Player I chooses n ∈ ω. Let Player II play according to whether n ∈ a. If n ∈ a let = 1; otherwise let = 0. Then let Player II play a2 = a. Now Taa is well-founded, hence there exist well-ordering x of ω and strictly order-preserving map ϕ : Taa → ω with ϕ(t) <x ϕ(s) for all s t in Taa . Let u2 ∈ C be such that π(u2 ) = x and ϕ2 = ϕ. Then the rules (i) through (iv) of the game are obeyed. Let Player I play according to his winning strategy. Then (i) through (iv) hold and (π(u1 ), π(u2 )) ∈ B. Since π(u2 ) ∈ WO the separation property of B requires that π(u1 ) ∈ WO. Thus we have that ϕ1 : Taa1 → ω is a strictly order-preserving map from Taa1 into a well-order coded by π(u1 ). This implies that Taa1 is well-founded, and thus a1 ∈ {a} and in fact a1 = a = a2 . However, by (ii) n ∈ a2 iff n ∈ a1 , and thus a1 = a2 , a contradiction.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
190
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Let σ be a winning strategy of Player II in Ga . σ is coded by a real in ω . Let σ ∗ : ω → {0, 1} be such that σ ∗ (n) = iff Player II responses with according to σ when Player I’s first move is n. Apparently σ ∗ is recursive in σ. We note that σ ∗ (n) = 1 iff n ∈ a. To see this suppose n ∈ a but σ ∗ (n) = 0. Then let Player I plays a1 = a (note that (ii) is satisfied), u1 ∈ C with π(u1 ) ∈ WO, ϕ1 : Taa → ω strictly order-preserving into <π(u1 ) , where the choice of u1 and ϕ1 are similar to the argument in the preceding paragraph. Then since Player II wins we have (π(u1 ), π(u2 )) ∈ B, and by the separation property of B this requires that π(u2 ) ∈ WO. By the above argument again we have that a2 = a, a contradiction to (ii). The argument for the situation n ∈ a but σ ∗ (n) = 1 is similar. Finally note that for all Π11 sets P the payoff set for the game GP is Δ11 , hence Σ0α for some α < ω1 . Since there are only countably many Π11 sets there exists β < ω1 such that all payoff sets are Σ0β . Let U ⊆ ω × ω ω be universal for all Σ0β subsets of ω ω . Consider the set Q of all τ ∈ (ω ω )ω such that for any k ∈ ω, τ (k) ∈ ω ω is a winning strategy for either Player I or Player II in the game GUk . Then Q is nonempty Π11 . By Theorem 1.7.7 Q contains a Π11 singleton τ0 . We arrive at a final contradiction to Corollary 1.7.8 by showing that every Π11 singleton is recursive in τ0 . Let a be an arbitrary Π11 singleton. Let k ∈ ω be such that Uk is the payoff set of the game Ga . Then τ0 (k) is a winning strategy for Player II in Ga . Therefore n ∈ a iff τ0 (k)∗ (n) = 1. This shows that a is recursive in τ0 (k)∗ , which is in turn recursive in τ0 , and hence a is recursive in τ0 . ω
Recall that D ⊆ ω ω is Π11 -complete if D is Π11 and for all Π11 sets P ⊆ ω ω there is a continuous function f : ω ω → ω ω such that f −1 (D) = P . The set WO is Π11 -complete, and it is easy to see that a set D is Π11 -complete iff there is a continuous function f : LO → ω ω such that f −1 (D) = WO. With these concepts the above theorem can be generalized and relativized. Theorem 8.3.4 Let D ⊆ ω ω be Π11 -complete and A ⊆ ω ω be Σ11 with D ⊆ A. Then there is no Borel set B ⊆ ω ω ×ω ω such that D×(A−D) ⊆ B and (A−D)×D∩B = ∅. Proof. First note that the proof of the previous theorem can be relativized. Let f : LO → ω ω be continuous such that f −1 (D) = WO. Let A = f −1 (A). Then A ⊆ LO is Σ11 and WO ⊆ A since D ⊆ A. Assume that there is a Borel set B with the separation property. Let B = {(u, v) ∈ LO × LO : (f (u), f (v)) ∈ B}. Then B is Borel in LO × LO, and WO × (A − WO) ⊆ B and (A − WO) × WO ∩ B = ∅. Let x ∈ ω ω be such that A ∈ Σ11 (x) and B ∈ Δ11 (x). This contradicts the previous theorem relativized to x. We are now ready to give Harrington’s proof of Friedman’s Borel diagonalization theorem for Borel equivalence relations.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
191
Theorem 8.3.5 (Friedman) Let E be a Borel equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Then there is no Borel function F : X ω → X such that, for all x = (xn ) and y = (yn ) in X ω , (a) if xE + y then F (x)EF (y), and (b) (F (x), xn ) ∈ E for all n ∈ ω.
Proof. Assume that the Borel function F exists with properties (a) and (b). Without loss of generality we may assume that X = ω ω . Let z0 ∈ ω ω be an arbitrarily fixed element. Let A ⊆ 2ω × (ω ω )ω be the set of all elements u = (x, f ) where x ∈ LO and f : ω → ω ω such that, for all n ∈ ω, (i) if n is <x -least then f (n) = z0 ; and (ii) if n is not <x -least, then letting m0 , m1 , . . . enumerate the set {m ∈ ω : m <x n} in the increasing order of natural numbers (possibly with repetitions), we have that f (n) = F (f (m0 ), f (m1 ), . . . ). Because of property (a) we can write f (n) = F (f {m : m <x n}) without specifying the order in which the elements are enumerated. Note that A is Borel. Let π : 2ω × (ω ω )ω → 2ω be the projection to the first coordinate. Then WO ⊆ π(A) since for any x ∈ WO a function f satisfying (i) and (ii) can be defined by a transfinite induction on the ordinal length of <x . Define D ⊆ A by (x, f ) ∈ D ⇐⇒ (x, f ) ∈ A ∧ x ∈ WO. Then it is clear that D is a Π11 -complete subset of 2ω × (ω ω )ω . We are going to apply Theorem 8.3.4 to the sets D and A, regarding the underlying space as a homeomorphic copy of ω ω . For any u = (x, f ) and v = (y, g) in A, we define a binary relation Ru,v ⊆ ω × ω by nRu,v m ⇐⇒ f (n)Eg(m). Because of property (b) we have that if nRu,v m1 and nRu,v m2 then m1 = m2 . Similarly, if n1 Ru,v m and n2 Ru,v m then n1 = n2 . Thus Ru,v is in fact a partial bijection between two subsets of ω. Let ϕu,v denote the partial bijection given by Ru,v . Define Iu,v ⊆ dom(ϕu,v ) and Ju,v ⊆ range(ϕu,v ) by letting n ∈ Iu,v ⇐⇒ {k : k ≤x n} ⊆ dom(ϕu,v ) ∧ ϕu,v ({k : k ≤x n}) = {l : l ≤y ϕu,v (n)} ∧ ∀k, k ≤x n (k <x k → ϕu,v (k)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
192
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Ju,v = ω). Note that B is Borel. We will arrive at a contradiction by checking that D × (A − D) ⊆ B and (A − D) × D ∩ B = ∅. For this let u = (x, f ) and v = (y, g) be in A. First suppose x ∈ WO and y ∈ WO. If Iu,v = ω, then since (Iu,v , <x ) is a well-order and ϕu,v is order-preserving, we get that (Ju,v ,
Proof. It suffices to show that E + ≤B E. Assume toward a contradiction that f : X ω → X is a Borel reduction from E + to E. We will consider the space (X ω )ω and the equivalence relation (E + )+ on it. For notational clarity we denote a typical element of X ω by x = (xn ), where each xn ∈ X, and a typical element of (X ω )ω by x = (xk ), where xk ∈ X ω . We will also omit the subscripts when we denote the equivalence class of an element. This will not cause any confusion. Let C = {x = (xn ) ∈ X ω : ∀n, m xn = xm }. Thus elements of C are constant sequences in X ω . We note that there is x ∈ C such that f (x) = x0 . Otherwise we would have that f (C) = X. This implies that, for every y ∈ X ω , there is some x ∈ C with f (x) = f (y), and thus xE + y since f is a reduction, and in fact yn Ex0 for all n. It follows that there is only one E-equivalence class on X, contradicting our assumption. We fix a z ∈ C with f (z) = z0 . For each x = (xk ) ∈ (X ω )ω let F (x) ∈ X ω be a canonical enumeration (possibly with repetitions) of the set {f (z), f (xk ) : ∀n [f (xk )] = [xkn ]}. Note that F : (X ω )ω → X ω is Borel. We claim that F is invariant, that is, if x(E + )+ y then F (x)E + F (y). For this suppose x(E + )+ y. Let k be such that [f (xk )] = [xkn ] for all n. Let l be such that xk E + y l . Since f is a reduction [f (y l )] = [f (xk )] whereas {[xkn ] : n ∈ ω} = {[ynl ] : n ∈ ω}. Hence [f (y l )] = [ynl ] for all n. By symmetry we have that F (x)E + F (y). Next we claim that for any x, (F (x), xk ) ∈ E + for all k. Assume that for some x and k, F (x)E + xk . Let A = {z, xp : ∀n [f (xp )] = [xpn ]}. We consider two cases. Case 1: there is y ∈ A with f (xk )Ef (y). Then in fact xk E + y,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
193
[f (xk )] = [f (y)], and {[yn ] : n ∈ ω} = {[xkn ] : n ∈ ω}. This implies that [f (xk )] = [xkn ] for all n, and therefore xk ∈ A. However since F (x)E + xk , [f (xk )] ∈ {[f (y)] : y ∈ A} = {[xkn ] : n ∈ ω}, a contradiction. Case 2: there is no y ∈ A with f (xk )Ef (y). In particular xk ∈ A. Thus for some n, [f (xk )] = [xkn ]. Again by F (x)E + xk it follows that [f (xk )] ∈ {[f (y)] : y ∈ A}, contradicting our case assumption. We have thus constructed a Borel diagonalizer of E + , contradicting Theorem 8.3.5. Exercise 8.3.1 Show that E ≤B E + for any equivalence relation E on a standard Borel space X. Exercise 8.3.2 Show that if E ≤B F then E + ≤B F + . Exercise 8.3.3 Let =+ denote id(ω ω )+ . Show that E∞ ≤B =+ and in fact + ∼B =+ . E∞ Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Define an equivalence relation E ∗ on X ω by xE ∗ y ⇐⇒ xE + y ∧ ∀z ∈ X |{n ∈ ω : xn = z}| = |{n ∈ ω : yn = z}|. Exercise 8.3.4 Show that E ∗ ∼B E + . Exercise 8.3.5 Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Show that X ∗ ) is the orbit equivalence relation induced by an action of G × S∞ on (EG ω X , where S∞ is the infinite permutation group.
8.4
Examples of Fσ equivalence relations
Recall from Theorem 6.4.4 that every Gδ equivalence relation is smooth. Thus from the point of view of descriptive complexity the simplest kind of Borel equivalence relations are Fσ ones. However, this is not to say that the Borel complexity of these equivalence relations in the Borel reducibility hierarchy is easy to describe. In this section we give an overview of some canonical examples of Fσ equivalence relations. We have introduced at least three concrete nonsmooth Fσ equivalence relations: E0 , E∞ , and E1 . Of course, any countable Borel equivalence relation is Fσ . Consider the following additional examples arising from classical Banach spaces.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
194
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Recall that for a real number 1 ≤ p < ∞, ∞ ω p p = x = (xn ) ∈ R : |xn | < ∞ , n=0
and
∞ =
x = (xn ) ∈ R
ω
: sup |xn | < ∞ . n∈ω
All of them are Fσ subgroups of the additive group Rω . Thus for 1 ≤ p ≤ ∞ the coset equivalence relation Rω /p defined by x Rω/p y ⇐⇒ x − y ∈ p is an Fσ equivalence relation on the Polish space Rω . For notational simplicity we also denote the equivalence relation by p . We first note that the equivalence relations p all have nontrivial Borel complexity. Lemma 8.4.1 For any 1 ≤ p ≤ ∞, E0 ≤B p . Proof. We use Theorem 6.2.1. For this note that each p is a group of homeomorphisms on Rω . It is also easy to see that p is dense, and thus the equivalence relation has a dense orbit. It remains to show that the equivalence relation is meager. By Kuratowski–Ulam it suffices to show that every orbit is meager. Since each orbit is a homeomorphic copy of p , it suffices to show that p is meager in Rω . We do this for p = ∞ first. For each N ∈ ω let AN = {x ∈ Rω : supn |xn | ≤ N }. Then AN is closed in Rω and ∞ = N ∈ω AN . We claim that AN is nowhere dense. Otherwise there is a basic open U ⊆ Rω with U ⊆ AN . Without loss of generality assume U = (a0 , b0 ) × (a1 , b1 ) × . . . (an , bn ) × Rω . Consider V ⊆ U defined by V = (a0 , b0 ) × (a1 , b1 ) × . . . (an , bn ) × (N, N + 1) × Rω . Then V ⊆ AN . However, for any x ∈ V we have that |xn+1 | > N and therefore supn |xn | > N , contradicting x ∈ AN . A similar argument shows that p is also meager for 1 ≤ p < ∞. Our next goal is to show that ∞ is the most complex among these equivalence relations. In fact, we show that ∞ is universal among all Kσ equivalence relations on Polish spaces. Recall that a subset of a topological space is Kσ if it is the union of countably many compact sets. If X is a Polish space, E a Kσ equivalence relation on X, and Δ = {(x, x) : x ∈ X}, then Δ is a closed subset of E which is homeomorphic to X, and it follows that X is Kσ .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
195
Theorem 8.4.2 (Rosendal) Let E be a Kσ equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then E ≤B ∞ .
Proof.
Let (Xn ) be an increasing sequence of compact subsets of X with X = n Xn . Let Δ = {(x, x) : x ∈ X}. Let (Fn ) be an increasing sequence of compact subsets of X × X with E = n Fn . Without loss of generality we may assume Δ ∩ Xn2 ⊆ Fn . Define an increasing sequence (Rn ) of compact relations by induction as follows. Let R0 = F0 ∩ X02 . Assuming Rn has been defined, let Rn+1 = Rn ∪ (Rn ◦ Rn ) ∪ (Fn ∩ Xn2 ).
It is easy to see that each Rn is compact and that E = n Rn . Let {Um }m∈ω be a countable base for the topology of X. Fix a bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω such that for all n, m ∈ ω, n, m ≥ n. We define a function ϕ : X → Rω by k, if k ≤ n is the least such that ∃y ∈ Um (x, y) ∈ Rk , ϕ(x)(n, m) = n, if ∀y ∈ Um (x, y) ∈ Rn . Note that ϕ is a Borel map. To see this it suffices to check that for any m, n ∈ ω, the set {x ∈ X : ∃y ∈ Um (x, y) ∈ Rn } is Borel. We have that ∃y ∈ Um (x, y) ∈ Rn ⇐⇒ ∃l(Ul ⊆ Um ∧ ∃y ∈ Ul ∩ Xn (x, y) ∈ Rn ). The set {x : ∃y ∈ Ul ∩ Xn (x, y) ∈ Rn } is compact, and thus the desired set is in fact Fσ . We claim that ϕ is Borel reduction from E to ∞ . Suppose x, y ∈ X and xEy. Fix the least n0 ∈ ω with (x, y) ∈ Rn0 and (y, x) ∈ Rn0 . Then for any z ∈ X and k ∈ ω, if (x, z) ∈ Rk then (y, z) ∈ Rn0 ◦ Rk ⊆ Rmax{n0 ,k}+1 , and by symmetry, if (y, z) ∈ Rk then (y, z) ∈ Rmax{n0 ,k}+1 . It follows that if ϕ(x)(n, m) = k < n, then ϕ(y)(n, m) ≤ max{n0 , k} + 1, and therefore |ϕ(x) − ϕ(y)| ≤ n0 + 1. By symmetry if ϕ(x)(n, m) < n then |ϕ(x)(n, m) − ϕ(y)(n, m)| ≤ n0 +1. If both ϕ(x)(n, m) = n = ϕ(y)(n, m), then trivially |ϕ(x)(n, m)−ϕ(y)(n, m)| ≤ n0 +1. We have shown that ϕ(x)−ϕ(y) ∈ ∞ . Conversely, suppose ϕ(x) − ϕ(y) ∈ ∞ . Let k be large enough such that y ∈ Xk and |ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N )| ≤ k for all N . Fix an arbitrary m with y ∈ Um . Since Δ ∩ Xk2 ⊆ Fk , (y, y) ∈ Rk+1 and then ϕ(y)(2k + 2, m) ≤ k + 1. It follows that ϕ(x)(2k + 2, m) ≤ 2k + 1, and thus there is z ∈ Um with (x, z) ∈ Rk+1 . We have shown that, for any m with y ∈ Um there is z ∈ Um with (x, z) ∈ Rk+1 . Thus we have a sequence (zm ) with zm → y and (x, zm ) ∈ Rk+1 . Since Rk+1 is compact, we have that (x, y) ∈ Rk+1 , and therefore (x, y) ∈ E. It is easy to see that all of the equivalence relations E0 , E∞ , E1 , and p (1 ≤ p ≤ ∞) are Kσ (see Exercise 8.4.3). From this we immediately get that
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
196
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
all of them are Borel reducible to ∞ . It is not known if ∞ is universal among all Fσ equivalence relations. Before closing this section we mention some results without proofs. Dougherty and Hjorth [29] have shown that the Borel reducibility order
∞
1/p |xn |
p
.
n=0
This makes the equivalence relation p an orbit equivalence relation of a Polish group action. In particular, all p (1 ≤ p < ∞) are idealistic. Since E1 is not Borel reducible to any orbit equivalence relations (Theorem 10.6.1), E1 ≤B p for 1 ≤ p < ∞. On the other hand we just showed that E1 ≤B ∞ , and so the equivalence relation ∞ is not an orbit equivalence relation of a Polish group action. This implies that topological group ∞ is not a Polishable subgroup of Rω , which can also be seen directly (see Lemma 9.3.3). For now we note that, with the usual norm x∞ = sup |xn |, n∈ω
the space ∞ is not separable. Exercise 8.4.1 Show that for any 1 ≤ p ≤ ∞, p is an Fσ subset of Rω . Exercise 8.4.2 Show that p is meager in Rω for 1 ≤ p < ∞. Exercise 8.4.3 Show that all equivalence relations E0 , E∞ , E1 , and p (1 ≤ p ≤ ∞) are Kσ .
8.5
Examples of Π03 equivalence relations
We define the power operator on equivalence relations. Definition 8.5.1 Let E be an equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. The power of E is the equivalence relation E ω on X ω defined by xE ω y ⇐⇒ ∀n ∈ ω xn Eyn .
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
197
Apparently E ≤B E ω and E ω ≤B F ω if E ≤B F . However, (E ω )ω ∼B E ω . Thus the power operator is not a jump operator. If E is Π0α for α < ω1 , then E ω is also Π0α . Thus the powers of all Fσ equivalence relations we considered in the last section are examples of Π03 equivalence relations, among which E0ω has the simplest Borel complexity. It is easy to see that if E is an orbit equivalence relation induced by an action of a Polish group G, then E ω is induced by an action of Gω . We show that E0ω is not Borel reducible to any Σ03 equivalence relation. It follows that the powers of all other equivalence relations have the same property. Theorem 8.5.2 Let E be a Σ03 equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then E0ω ≤B E. Proof. Assume toward a contradiction that f : (2ω )ω → X is a Borel reduction of E0ω to E. Since f is Borel, and hence Baire measurable, there is a comeager set C ⊆ (2ω )ω such that f C is continuous. Without loss of generality we may assume C is Gδ . Then E0ω ∩ C 2 is Σ03 , since (x, y) ∈ E0ω ∩ C 2 ⇐⇒ x, y ∈ C ∧ (f (x), f (y)) ∈ E. To arrive at a contradiction it suffices to establish the following claim: For every dense Gδ set C ⊆ (2ω )ω , E0ω ∩ C 2 is Π03 -complete. Fix any bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω. Let B = {x ∈ 2ω : ∀i ∃j ∀k ≥ j x(i, k) = 1}. Then B is Π03 -complete. To see this, let A ⊆ 2ω be Π03 , say A= Ai,j,k , i
j
k
where each Ai,j,k is clopen. Define ρ : 2ω → 2ω as follows. Given x ∈ 2ω , for each i, k ∈ ω let ax,i,k ∈ ω be the least integer j ≤ k, if one exists, such that ∀k ≤ k (x ∈ Ai,j,k ). Let 1, if ax,i,k and ax,i,k−1 are both defined and are equal, ρ(x)(i, k) = 0, otherwise. It is easy to see that ρ is continuous and x ∈ A ⇐⇒ ρ(x) ∈ B. This shows that B is Π03 -complete. Write C = n Dn where each Dn is open dense in (2ω )ω . We next define two continuous functions π1 , π2 : 2ω → 2ω×ω so that x → (π1 (x), π2 (x)) reduces the set B to E0ω C 2 . For this we define two sequences (us )s∈2<ω , (vs )s∈2<ω and a function p : ω → ω so that the following hold: (i) for any n ∈ ω, if n = i, k then i, p(n) + k < p(n + 1);
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
198
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
(ii) for any n ∈ ω and lh(s) = n, us , vs ∈ 2p(n)×p(n) ; (iii) for s ⊆ t, us ⊆ ut and vs ⊆ vt ; (iv) if lh(s) = n then Nus , Nvs ⊆ Dn ; (v) for any n ∈ ω, if s(n) = 1 then us (j, l) = vs (j, l) for all (j, l) ∈ p(n + 1) × p(n + 1) − p(n) × p(n); (vi) for n = i, k, if s(n) = 0 then us (i, p(n) + k) = vs (i, p(n) + k) and us (j, l) = vs (j, l) for (j, l) ∈ p(n + 1) × p(n + 1) − p(n) × p(n) − {(i, p(n) + k)}. It follows easily from
the density of Dn that
such sequences can be constructed. We let π1 (x) = n uxn and π2 (x) = n vxn . Clearly π1 , π2 are continuous. By (iv) π1 (x), π2 (x) ∈ C for any x ∈ 2ω . If x ∈ B, then for each i let k(i) be such that ∀k ≥ k(i) x(i, k) = 1. Fix i ∈ ω. For any n ≥ i, k(i), if x(n) = 1 then by (v) for any p(n) ≤ j < p(n + 1) we have π1 (x)(i, j) = π2 (x)(i, j); if x(n) = 0 then n = i , k for some i = i, since otherwise k ≥ k(i) and we have x(i, k) = 1 by assumption. In this latter case by (vi) we still have that π1 (x)(i, j) = π2 (x)(i, j) if i < p(n + 1) and p(n) ≤ j < p(n + 1). Thus π1 (x)(i, k) = π2 (x)(i, k) for all k ≥ k0 . This shows that π1 (x) E0ω π2 (x). If x ∈ / B, then for some i we have that x(i, k) = 0 for infinitely many k. Fix such an i. Then π1 (x)(i, p(i, k) + k) = π2 (x)(i, p(i, k) + k) for infinitely many k. This shows that (π1 (x), π2 (x)) ∈ E0ω . We introduce some other Π03 equivalence relations. First consider the classical Banach space c0 = {x ∈ Rω : lim |xn | = 0} n
with the norm · ∞ . c0 is a subgroup of Rω . We consider the coset ω equivalence relation R /c0 defined by Π03
x Rω/c0 y ⇐⇒ x − y ∈ c0 and still denote it by c0 . Then the equivalence relation c0 is Π03 . Lemma 8.5.3 E0ω ≤B c0 . Proof. Let ·, · : ω × ω → ω be a bijection such that n, m ≤ n , m if n ≤ n and m ≤ m . Define ϕ : 2ω×ω → Rω by ϕ(x)(n, m) = 2−n x(n, m). Clearly ϕ is a Borel function. We check that it is a reduction from E0ω to c0 . Let xE0ω y, that is, ∀n∃m(n)∀m ≥ m(n) x(n, m) = y(n, m). Let > 0. Fix
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Borel Equivalence Relations
199
n0 large enough such that 2−n0 < . Let m0 = max{m(i) : i < n0 }. We show that for all N ≥ n0 , m0 , |ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N )| < . Let N ≥ n0 , m0 . Say N = n, m. If n ≥ n0 then |ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N )| ≤ 2−n ≤ 2−n0 < . If n < n0 then m ≥ m(n) since N = n, m ≥ n0 , m0 ≥ n, m0 ≥ n, m(n). Thus x(n, m) = y(n, m) and ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N ) = 0. This shows that limN ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N ) = 0 and so ϕ(x) − ϕ(y) ∈ c0 . Conversely let (x, y) ∈ E0ω . Fix n such that (xn , yn ) ∈ E0 , that is, x(n, m) = y(n, m) for infinitely many m. Then |ϕ(x)(n, m) − ϕ(y)(n, m)| = 2−n for infinitely many m, and thus limN [ϕ(x)(N ) − ϕ(y)(N )] = 0. This shows that ϕ(x) − ϕ(y) ∈ c0 . Another class of examples of Π03 equivalence relations are the Friedman– Stanley jumps of Fσ equivalence relations. Among these the simplest is the jump of the identity relation on a Polish space, for instance, id(2ω )+ . For notational simplicity we denote this equivalence relation by =+ . Lemma 8.5.4 E0ω ≤B =+ . Proof. It is easy to see that E0+ ∼B =+ (see Exercise 8.3.3). Thus it suffices to show that E0ω ≤ E0+ . Fix a bijection ·, · : ω × ω → ω. Let τ : 2ω → 2ω be defined by z(j), if i = 0, τ (z)(i, j) = 1, otherwise. For each n ∈ ω define a function ϕn : 2ω → 2ω by τ (z)(j), if i = n, ϕn (z)(i, j) = 0, otherwise. Then for each n ∈ ω and z1 , z2 ∈ 2ω , we have that z1 E0 z2 iff ϕn (z1 )E0 ϕn (z2 ). Moreover, for n1 = n2 and any z1 , z2 ∈ 2ω , (ϕn1 (z1 ), ϕn2 (z2 )) ∈ E0 since for infinitely many m, ϕn1 (z1 )(n1 , m) = τ (z1 )(m) = 1, but for all m, ϕn2 (z2 )(n1 , m) = 0. We then define ρ : (2ω )ω → (2ω )ω by letting (ρ(x))n = ϕn (xn ). Suppose xE0ω y. Then for all n ∈ ω, xn Eyn , and therefore ϕn (xn )E0 ϕn (yn ). It follows that {[ϕn (xn )]E0 : n ∈ ω} = {[ϕn (yn )]E0 : n ∈ ω}, and thus ρ(x)E0+ ρ(y). Conversely, suppose (x, y) ∈ E0ω . Let n be such that (xn , yn ) ∈ E0 . Then (ϕn (xn ), ϕm (y)) ∈ E0 for all m ∈ ω. Thus [ϕn (xn )]E0 ∈ {[ϕn (yn )]E0 : n ∈ ω} and (ρ(x), ρ(y)) ∈ E0+ . The last equivalence relation we consider in this section is measure equivalence. Let M be the space of Borel probability measures on 2ω . Every μ ∈ M
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
200
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
is completely determined by the sequence (μ(Ns ))s∈2<ω . Hence M can be viewed as a subspace of [0, 1]ω , and therefore is a Polish space. For μ, ν ∈ M , we say that μ is absolutely continuous with respect to ν, denoted μ ν, if for any Borel set A ⊆ 2ω , ν(A) = 0 ⇒ μ(A) = 0. Two measures μ and ν are equivalent if both μ ν and ν μ. We use ≡m to denote the measure equivalence relation. It is easy to see that μ ν ⇐⇒ ∀ > 0∃δ > 0 ∀ basic open U (ν(U ) < δ ⇒ μ(U ) < ). It follows that is a Π03 relation and ≡m is a Π03 equivalence relation. Lemma 8.5.5 =+ ≤B ≡m . Proof. We give an informal sketch of the proof. The exact details of the definitions are left to the reader. Intuitively we will assign to each countable subset S of 2ω a Borel probability measure μS so that S = S iff μS ≡m μS . This is easy to do: let μS be any Borel probability measure supported on S. Then for any Borel set A ⊆ 2ω , μ(A) = 0 iff A ∩ S = ∅ iff ν(A) = 0. There are many important facts omitted in our discussion so far. Before closing this section we mention some known facts without proof. The Spectral Theorem in functional analysis essentially established that the measure equivalence relation is Borel bireducible to the orbit equivalence relation of the conjugacy action of the unitary group on itself. In particular this establishes that the measure equivalence is Borel bireducible with an orbit equivalence relation of a Polish group action. This implies (by Theorem 10.6.1) that E1 is not reducible to any of the equivalence relations we discussed in this section. Kakutani studied the measure equivalence relation on product measures. He essentially showed that 2 ≤B ≡m (see Reference [104]). It follows from Theorem 8.4.3 that p ≤B ≡m if 1 ≤ p ≤ 2. It is not known if p ≤B ≡m for any p > 2. Hjorth and Kechris [78] proved a dichotomy theorem that for any E ≤ E0ω , either E ∼B E0ω or E is hyperfinite. Exercise 8.5.1 Let C ⊆ Rω be comeager. Show that c0 ∩C 2 is Π03 -complete. Exercise 8.5.2 Show that (c0 )ω ∼B c0 . Exercise 8.5.3 Give an example of an equivalence relation E such that E +
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 9 Analytic Equivalence Relations
The study of general analytic equivalence relations is a very important and yet challenging subject. In this chapter we will discuss general dichotomy theorems for analytic equivalence relations, universal analytic equivalence relations, and other examples of analytic but non-Borel equivalence relations. Orbit equivalence relations of Polish group actions are in general analytic, and often non-Borel, and therefore provide many interesting examples and opportunities of applications of general theorems. The Borel reducibility hierarchy for analytic equivalence relations is more complicated than the one for Borel equivalence relations.
9.1
The Burgess trichotomy theorem
The Silver dichotomy theorem for Π11 equivalence relations fails for Σ11 equivalence relations. For an example, consider the equivalence relation Eω1 defined on the standard Borel space LO by xEω1 y ⇐⇒ (x ∈ WO ∧ y ∈ WO) ∨ ∃ϕ : (ω, <x ) ∼ = (ω,
202
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
countably many equivalence classes it is in fact Borel and smooth. Thus having ω1 many equivalence classes is typical of all counterexamples of the Silver dichotomy for Σ11 equivalence relations. To prove the Burgess trichotomy theorem we need to show another theorem of Burguess representing every Σ11 equivalence relation as a intersection of ω1 many Borel equivalence relations. We need also recall some basic notions about ordinals. The notation ω1 is used to represent the least uncountable ordinal as well as the set of all countable ordinals. We also use it to denote the least uncountable cardinal number. The space ω1 of all countable ordinals is endowed with the order topology, where subbasic open sets are of the form {α < ω1 : α < α0 } and {α < ω1 : α > α0 } for α0 < ω1 . A subset C of ω1 is closed if C is closed in the order topology of ω1 , and C is a club if it is closed and unbounded above. The intersection of countably many clubs in ω1 is still a club in ω1 . If f : ω1 → ω1 is a continuous function satisfying f (α) ≥ α for all α < ω1 , then there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that f (α) = α for all α ∈ C. The following lemma is an immediate corollary of the boundedness principle Theorem 1.6.10. Lemma 9.1.1 Let X be a standard Borel space and f1 , . . . , fn , g1 , . . . , gm : X → LO be Borel −1 functions. Suppose f1−1 (WO) ∩ · · · ∩ fn−1 (WO) ⊆ g1−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm (WO). Then there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, −1 (WOα ). f1−1 (WOα ) ∩ · · · ∩ fn−1 (WOα ) ⊆ g1−1 (WOα ) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
Proof. We define a continuous function α → β(α) as follows. For each α < ω1 , let β(α) be the least β ≥ α such that −1 (WOβ ). f1−1 (WOα ) ∩ · · · ∩ fn−1 (WOα ) ⊆ g1−1 (WOβ ) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
To see that this β(α) is well defined, note that by our assumption −1 (WO). f1−1 (WOα ) ∩ · · · ∩ fn−1 (WOα ) ⊆ g1−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
Let A denote the set on the left-hand side. Then A is a Borel subset of X. It −1 (WO)) is Σ11 . Since follows that A − (g2−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm −1 (WO)) ⊆ g1−1 (WO), A − (g2−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
we have that −1 (WO))) ⊆ WO. g1 (A − (g2−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
The set on the left-hand side is Σ11 . Hence by the boundedness principle there is some β1 ≥ α such that −1 (WO)) ⊆ g1−1 (WOβ1 ). A − (g2−1 (WO) ∪ · · · ∪ gm
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
203
Repeating the argument for g2 , . . . , gm , we obtain β2 , . . . , βm ≥ α similarly. Let β = max{β1 , . . . , βm }. Then we have that A ⊆ g1−1 (WOβ ) ∪ · · · ∪ −1 gm (WOβ ). This shows that β(α) is well defined. It is easy to see that α → β(α) is continuous. We can thus get a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, β(α) = α. Theorem 9.1.2 (Burgess) Let E be a Σ11 equivalence relation on a standard Borel X. Then there are Borel equivalence relations Eα on X for α < ω1 such that E = α<ω1 Eα .
Proof. Let f : X 2 → LO be a Borel function such that X 2 − E = f −1 (WO). 2 −1 For α < ω1 let A α = X −f (WOα ). Then each Aα is a Borel binary relation on X and E = α<ω1 Aα . We claim that there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, Aα is an equivalence relation. Clearly the theorem follows from this claim. It is easy to see that every Aα is reflexive. To prove the claim we first show that there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, Aα is symmetric. For this let f1 (x, y) = f (x, y) and g1 (x, y) = f (y, x) for all (x, y) ∈ X 2 . Then since E is symmetric, f1−1 (WO) = X 2 − E = g1−1 (WO). By applying Lemma 9.1.1 for both f1−1 (WO) ⊆ g1−1 (WO) and g1−1 (WO) ⊆ f1−1 (WO), we get a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, f1−1 (WOα ) = g1−1 (WOα ). It follows that Aα is symmetric for all α ∈ C. Next we show that there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, Aα is transitive. The claim then follows since the intersection of two clubs is still a club. For this define f1 , g1 , g2 : X 3 → LO by f1 (x, y, z) = f (x, z), g1 (x, y, z) = f (x, y), and g2 (x, y, z) = f (y, z). Then for any (x, y, z) ∈ X 3 , (x, y, z) ∈ f1−1 (WO) ⇐⇒ (x, z) ∈ E =⇒ (x, y) ∈ E ∨ (y, z) ∈ E ⇐⇒ (x, y, z) ∈ g1−1 (WO) ∪ g2−1 (WO). This means that f1−1 (WO) ⊆ g1−1 (WO) ∪ g2−1 (WO). Thus by Lemma 9.1.1 there is a club C ⊆ ω1 such that for all α ∈ C, f1−1 (WOα ) ⊆ g1−1 (WOα ) ∪ g2−1 (WOα ). It follows that for α ∈ C, Aα is transitive, since if (x, y), (y, z) ∈ Aα then (x, y, z) ∈ g1−1 (WOα )∪g2−1 (WOα ) and therefore (x, y, z) ∈ f1−1 (WOα ) and so (x, z) ∈ Aα . Recall from Definition 5.4.3 that a collection S of subsets of a standard Borel space X generates the equivalence relation xEy ⇐⇒ ∀S ∈ S (x ∈ S ↔ y ∈ S).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
204
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 9.1.3 An equivalence relation E on a standard Borel space X is ω1 -smooth if E is generated by a set S of ω1 many Borel subsets of X. Theorem 9.1.4 Let E be an ω1 -smooth equivalence relation on a Polish space X. Then either E has ≤ ω1 many equivalence classes or else E has perfectly many classes. Proof. We fix a complete metric for X for the entire proof. Let Bα , α < ω1 , witness that E is ω1 -smooth. Since both Bα and X − Bα are Suslin, we have sequences (Csα,0 )s∈ω<ω , (Csα,1 )s∈ω<ω of closed sets with diam(Csα,i ) < 2−lh(s) for i = 0, 1 and all α < ω1 , such that α,0 α,1 Bα = Cxn , and X − Bα = Cxn . x∈ω ω n∈ω
x∈ω ω n∈ω
As usual we may assume that Ctα,i ⊆ Csα,i if s ⊆ t. For s ∈ ω <ω we let α,i Bsα,i = Cxn . x∈ω ω ,s⊆x n∈ω
Then Bsα,i ⊆ Csα,i . Assume that E has more than ω1 many equivalence classes. Let Z ⊆ X be a set of ω2 pairwise E-inequivalent elements. By induction on n ∈ ω, and for each s ∈ 2n , we construct a set Ds , an ordinal αs < ω1 , and σ(s, m) ∈ ω n for m < n so that the following conditions are satisfied: (i) σ(s, m) ⊆ σ(t, m) if s ⊆ t and m < lh(s); αsm ,s(m) for n > 0; (ii) Ds = m
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
m
t∈ω n+1
Analytic Equivalence Relations
205
which is a finite union of sets of the form α ,s(m) sm Bσ(s,m) ∩ Btαs ,0 k m m
for km ∈ ω and t ∈ ω n+1 . At least one of these sets contains ω2 many elements of Z. Thus there exists km for m < n and t ∈ ω n+1 such that if we define σ(s 0, m) = σ(s, m) km for m < n and σ(s 0, n) = t, then the corresponding Ds 0 contains ω2 many elements of Z. It is clear that all of (i) through (iii) are satisfied. The definitions of σ(s 1, m) for m ≤ n is similar by considering the set (Z ∩ Ds ) − Bαs . This finishes our construction. Now the sequence (Ds )s∈2ω gives rise to a Suslin set A= Dxn x∈2ω n∈ω
via the Suslin operation. Since diam(Ds ) < 2−lh(s) we get that for any x ∈ 2ω , the set n∈ω Dxn is a singleton, say with element zx . Moreover, if x(m) = 0, then by our construction, for any n > m, α
,0
x(m+1) . Dxn ⊆ Cσ(xn,m)
It follows from (i) that αx(m+1) ,0 zx ∈ Dxn ⊆ Cσ(xn,m) ⊆ Bαx(m+1) . n>m
n>m
Thus zx ∈ Bαx(m+1) . Similarly, if y(m) = 1, then zy ∈ Bαy(m+1) . These imply that if x, y ∈ 2ω with x = y, then there is α < ω1 such that either x ∈ Bα and y ∈ Bα , or x ∈ Bα and y ∈ Bα . In either case we have that x and y are E-inequivalent. Thus we have produced a Suslin set A of E-inequivalent elements containing uncountably many elements. By the perfect set theorem (Theorem 1.6.6) A contains a perfect set of E-inequivalent elements. Theorem 9.1.5 (Burgess) Let E be a Σ11 equivalence relation on a standard Borel space X. Then E has either perfectly many, countably many, or ω1 many equivalence classes.
Proof. By Theorem 9.1.2 E can be written as the intersection of ω1 many Borel equivalence relations. Let Eα , α < ω1 , be Borel equivalence relations such that E = α<ω1 Eα . Each Eα has either countably many or perfectly many equivalence classes by the Silver dichotomy theorem. If any of Eα has perfectly many equivalence classes, then so does E. So assume each Eα has only countably many equivalence classes, and let them be enumerated as Cα,n for n ∈ ω. Then we have that xEy ⇐⇒ ∀α∀n (x ∈ Cα,n ↔ y ∈ Cα,n ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
206
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
This means that E is ω1 -smooth, and hence by Theorem 9.1.4, E has ≤ ω1 many equivalence classes. It follows that E has either perfectly many, countably many, or ω1 many equivalence classes. Exercise 9.1.1 Write Eω1 as an intersection of ω1 many Borel equivalence relations. Exercise 9.1.2 Recall that a quasiorder is a reflexive and transitive relation. Show that any Σ11 quasiorder on a standard Borel space X is the intersection of ω1 many Borel quasiorders. Exercise 9.1.3 Let X be a standard Borel space and E ⊆ F equivalence relations on X, where E is Σ11 and F is Π11 . Show that there is a Borel equivalence relation R such that E ⊆ R ⊆ F . Exercise 9.1.4 Let X be a standard Borel space and E = α<ω1 Eα , where Eα are Σ11 equivalence relations on X. Show that E has either perfectly many, countably many, or ω1 many equivalence classes. Exercise 9.1.5 Let X be a standard Borel space and E = α<ω1 Eα , where Eα are Π11 equivalence relations on X. Show that E has either perfectly many, countably many, or ω1 many equivalence classes. Exercise 9.1.6 For a standard Borel space X and a collection S of subsets of X, let E(S) denote the equivalence relation generated by S. Show the following corollary of the proof of Theorem 9.1.4: If S is a set of ω1 many Borel subsets of a standard Borel space X, then either E(S) has ≤ ω1 many equivalence classes or there is a countable T ⊆ S such that E(T ) has perfectly many equivalence classes.
9.2
Definable reductions among analytic equivalence relations
In this section we discuss definable reductions among Σ11 equivalence relations. We start with a discussion of Borel reducibility and show that it is sometimes inadequate to capture the intuitive reductions among general Σ11 equivalence relations. We will then introduce a more general notion of definable reducibility. The downside, however, of considering this broader notion is that a significant amount of metamathematics is needed to prove statements about it. Since these metamathematical techniques are beyond the scope of this book, we will only mention some results without proving them. On the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
207
other hand, we will introduce the very useful notion of Ulm classifiability and also briefly discuss universal analytic equivalence relations. Recall that the conclusion of the Silver dichotomy can be reformulated in terms of Borel reducibility as either E ≤B id(ω) or id(2ω ) ≤B E. For the Burgess trichotomy theorem, these Borel reducibility statements still correspond to the cases when E has either countably many or perfectly many equivalence classes. However, when E has ω1 many equivalence classes, there is no obvious way to characterize E in the Borel reducibility hierarchy. We elaborate some more below. Consider the equivalence relation Fω1 defined on 2ω by CK(x)
xFω1 y ⇐⇒ ω1
CK(y)
= ω1
.
CK(x)
Since {ω1 : x ∈ 2ω } is unbounded in ω1 , clearly Fω1 has ω1 many equivalence classes. Lemma 9.2.1 Fω1 is Σ11 equivalence relation with every equivalence class Borel. Proof.
CK(x)
Note that ω1
CK(y)
≤ ω1
iff
∀m∃n ({m}x ∈ WO → ∃ϕ : (ω, {m}x ) ∼ = (ω, {n}y ) ) , which implies that Fω1 is Σ11 . Now fix x ∈ 2ω and m, n ∈ ω with {m}x ∈ WO. Then we also have that (ω, {m}x ) ∼ = (ω, {n}y ) iff (a) {n}y ∈ WO, (b) for all strictly order-preserving ϕ from (ω, {n}y ) into (ω, {m}x ), ϕ is onto, and (c) for all strictly order-preserving ψ from (ω, {m}x) into (ω, {n}y ), ψ is onto. Thus if we let Bm,n = {y : (ω, {m}x ) ∼ = (ω, {n}y )}, then Bm,n is Δ11 , in x particular Borel, when {m} ∈ WO. Now
CK(x) CK(y) = y : ω1 = ω1 Bm,n , {m}x ∈WO n
hence the Fω1 -equivalence class of x is Borel. Now Fω1 is indeed a Σ11 equivalence relation and apparently has ω1 many equivalence classes. However, if we compare it to Eω1 defined in the preceding section via Borel reducibility, they turn out to be incomparable.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
208
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Lemma 9.2.2 Eω1 ≤B Fω1 and Fω1 ≤B Eω1 . Proof. Note that if x ∈ WO then the Eω1 -equivalence class of x is not Borel. Now every Fω1 -equivalence class is Borel, which implies that any equivalence relation Borel reducible to Fω1 has the same property. Thus Eω1 ≤B Fω1 . On the other hand, assume f : 2ω → LO is a Borel reduction from Fω1 to Eω1 . There is at most one Fω1 -equivalence class C such that f (C) ⊆ LO − WO. Since C is Borel, it follows that f (2ω −C) is Σ11 in LO. Since f (2ω −C) ⊆ WO, by the boundedness principle there is α < ω1 such that f (2ω − C) ⊆ WOα . This is a contradiction to the assumption that f is a reduction since Eω1 WOα has only countably many equivalence classes. Nevertheless on an intuitive level we should be able to define a reduction from Fω1 to Eω1 , that is, given x ∈ 2ω to define Φ(x) ∈ WO so that its order CK(x) type is ω1 . A straightforward strategy to achieve this is the following. Consider the countable set {e ∈ ω : {e}x ∈ WO} and enumerate it as {en : n ∈ ω}. Then define ⎧ if n < m, ⎨ 1, if m < n, Φ(x)(n, k, m, l) = 0, ⎩ {en }(k, l), if m = n. It is easy to see that Φ is as required. From the discussions above Φ is not a Borel function. To allow reductions like Φ we need to consider classes of functions larger than that of Borel functions. This takes us to the realm of the projective hierarchy, and one natural class of functions to use is that of Δ12 functions. One can check that Φ is Δ12 . Two basic issues arise with the consideration of Δ12 reductions. The first is that the usual axioms of set theory no longer seem sufficient to determine the answers of many questions. Thus for many results axioms beyond ZFC are assumed and it is not clear that they can be removed from the assumptions. The second, a more subtle, issue is that, even for results which turn out to be provable within ZFC, the proof techniques go beyond the classical or effective descriptive set theory we have developed and been using in this book. The most powerful method employed in these proofs is that of forcing. Because of these issues we will not prove any result involving Δ12 reductions, even if some of the proofs are classical. Instead, we will mention some results without proof so as to provide the reader a brief overview of the subject. One of the common axioms beyond ZFC used in the results about Δ12 reductions is Σ11 determinacy. This is the statement that every game GA is determined if the payoff set A ⊆ ω ω is Σ11 . Burgess has shown under Σ11 determinacy that if an analytic equivalence relation E has ≤ ω1 -many equivalence classes, then E is Δ12 reducible to Eω1 . For this reason it is customary to denote Eω1 by id(ω1 ), so that the Burgess trichotomy theorem
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
209
becomes a full analog to the Silver dichotomy. Hjorth and Kechris [76] have considered a generalization of the Glimm– Effros dichotomy for Σ11 equivalence relations. Here the analog of the smooth clause, or the concrete classifiability, is the following notion of Ulm classifiability, inspired by Ulm’s classification of countable abelian p-groups (which we will review more in Section 13.4). For any α < ω let 2α be the space of all transfinite sequences (xβ )β<α where xβ ∈ {0, 1} for all β < α. Elements of 2α code subsets of α. If α < β then we view 2α as a subset of 2β in the natural sense: for any x ∈ 2ω , regard x(ξ) = 0 for all α ≤ ξ < β. Let 2<ω1 be the increasing union of all 2α for α < ω1 . Elements of 2<ω1 are called Ulm invariants, since Ulm used such elements to classify countable abelian p-groups up to isomorphism (see Section 13.4). We provide a way to code Ulm invariants by reals, as follows. Given any (x, y) ∈ WO × 2ω , let α = ot(<x ). For each n ∈ ω with y(n) = 1, let <x,n be the restriction of <x on the set {m ∈ ω : m <x n}, and then let βn = ot(<x,n ). We then associate U (x, y) ∈ 2α by letting it code the set {βn : y(n) = 1}. Consider the equivalence relation EUlm on LO × 2ω defined by (x, y)EUlm (x , y ) if U (x, y) and U (x , y ) code the same set of ordinals. A somewhat tedious but straightforward calculation shows that EUlm is a Σ11 equivalence relation (Exercise 9.2.2). Definition 9.2.3 An equivalence relation E on a standard Borel space X is Ulm classifiable if it is Δ12 reducible to EUlm . The equivalence relation EUlm is customarily denoted by id(2<ω1 ) for the obvious reason that it can be viewed as the identity relation on 2<ω1 . In this notation an equivalence relation E is Ulm classifiable iff E is Δ12 reducible to id(2<ω1 ). Hjorth and Kechris [76] proved under Σ11 determinacy that if E is a Σ11 equivalence relation, then either E is Ulm classifiable or E0 ≤B E. Finally we note that there are equivalence relations universal for all analytic equivalence relations with respect to Borel reducibility. Proposition 9.2.4 There exists a universal Σ11 equivalence relation, that is, a Σ11 equivalence relation E such that for any Σ11 equivalence relation F , F ≤B E. Proof. Let U ⊆ ω ω × (ω ω )2 be a universal set for all Σ11 subsets of (ω ω )2 , that is, for any Σ11 A ⊆ (ω ω )2 there is x ∈ ω ω such that A = Ux . Define U ∗ by letting (x, y, z) ∈ U ∗ ⇐⇒ (x, y, z) ∈ U ∨ (x, z, y) ∈ U. Then U ∗ is still Σ11 . Let ·, · : ω ω × ω ω → ω ω be a homeomorphism. Then define an equivalence relation E on ω ω by x, yEx , y ⇐⇒ x = x ∧ (y = y ∨ (x, y, y ) ∈ U ∗ ∨ ∃y0 = y, y1 , . . . , yn = y ∀i < n (x, yi , yi+1 ) ∈ U ∗ ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
210
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Informally E is a direct sum of transitive closures of Ux∗ for all x ∈ ω ω . It is clear that E is a Σ11 equivalence relation. Suppose F is any Σ11 equivalence relation on ω ω . Then F ⊆ (ω ω )2 and so there is x ∈ ω ω such that F = Ux . We have that Ux∗ = Ux = F is a transitive relation. Define f : ω ω → ω ω by letting f (y) = x, y. Then for any y, y ∈ ω ω , yF y iff (y, y ) ∈ Ux∗ = F iff (x, y, y ) ∈ U ∗ iff x, yEx, y . This shows that, in fact, F c E. Exercise 9.2.1 Show that the reduction Φ defined in this section is σ(Σ11 )measurable. Exercise 9.2.2 Show that EUlm is a Σ11 equivalence relation. Exercise 9.2.3 Show that there is a universal Σ11 equivalence relation.
9.3
Actions of standard Borel groups
Orbit equivalence relations of Polish group actions form an important class of analytic equivalence relations. More generally, one can consider actions in which the acting group is standard Borel and still get that the resulting orbit equivalence relation is analytic. Definition 9.3.1 A standard Borel group is a group G with a standard Borel structure B on G such that the group operations are Borel with respect to B. Borel subgroups of Polish groups are standard Borel groups with their induced Borel structure. In particular, all Polish groups are standard Borel groups with their Borel structure. The converse, as we will see below, is not true. Definition 9.3.2 A standard Borel group G is Polishable if there is a Polish topology τ inducing the Borel structure on G so that (G, τ ) is a topological group, that is, the group operations are continuous with respect to τ . Recall that in Definition 8.2.3 we defined Polishable subgroups of Polish groups. The above definition is a generalization of Definition 8.2.3. By Theorem 2.3.3, and more explicitly by Exercise 2.3.7, the topological group topology witnessing the Polishability of a standard Borel group is unique. Lemma 9.3.3 ∞ is a standard Borel group that is not Polishable.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
211
Proof. ∞ is an Fσ subgroup of the Polish group Rω , hence is a standard Borel group. Assume τ is a Polish group topology on ∞ witnessing its Polishability. For each N ∈ ω define AN = (xn ) ∈ Rω : (xn )∞ = sup |xn | ≤ N . n
Then AN is a compact, hence closed subset of Rω and ∞ = N AN . It follows that AN is a Borel subset of (∞ , τ ), and in particular has the Baire property. By the Baire category theorem there is N ∈ ω such that AN is nonmeager in (∞ , τ ). By Theorem 2.3.2 AN − AN contains a τ -open nbhd of the identity element of ∞ . Note that AN − AN ⊆ A2N , and from the separability of τ there is a countable set C ⊆ ∞ such that (x + A2N ). ∞ = x∈C
Let C = {xn : n ∈ ω}. We construct a y ∈ A5N such that y ∈ xn + A2N for any n ∈ ω, arriving at a contradiction. The construction of y = (yn ) is by diagonalization: 5N, if |(xn )n | ≤ 2N , yn = 0, if |(xn )n | > 2N . It is easy to see that |yn − (xn )n | > 2N , hence y ∈ xn + A2N for any n ∈ ω. There are many examples of non-Polishable standard Borel groups. Another such example can be found in Exercise 9.3.1. Here we mention a third one which is also useful in our discussion later this section. Recall from Section 2.6 that for any metric space (X, d) the Graev metric δ can be defined on the free group F(X) making it a topological group. Moreover if (X, d) is separable then F(X) is separable and its completion F(X) becomes a Polish group. If in addition (X, d) is compact, then by Exercise 2.6.3 F(X) becomes a Kσ subset of F(X). We summarize these simple observations in the following lemma. Lemma 9.3.4 If X is a compact Polish space then there is a Borel structure on F(X) making it a standard Borel group. Proof. Let d be any compatible metric on X and let δ be the Graev metric on F(X). Then F(X) becomes a Borel subgroup of the Polish group F(X) and therefore a standard Borel group. If X is not finite then it has an accumulation point, and from the definition of the Graev metric we can see that δ on F(X) is not complete. In fact by a similar argument as in the proof of Lemma 9.3.3 one can show that F(X) is
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
212
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
not Polishable if X is any uncountable compact Polish space. We leave the details of these proofs to the reader (Exercises 9.3.2 and 9.3.3). We now turn to actions of standard Borel groups. Definition 9.3.5 If G is a standard Borel group, X a standard Borel space and a : G × X → X a Borel action, then we call X a standard Borel G-space. If G is a standard Borel group and X a standard Borel G-space, then the X is obviously Σ11 . The following result of Shelah orbit equivalence relation EG 1 shows that every Σ1 equivalence relation arises this way. Theorem 9.3.6 (Shelah) Let X be a standard Borel space and E a Σ11 equivalence relation on X. Then there is a standard Borel group G and a Borel action of G on X such that X . E = EG Proof. Let τ be a Polish topology on X giving rise to the standard Borel structure. Since E is Σ11 as a subset of (X, τ )2 , there is a closed set F ⊆ (X, τ )2 × ω ω such that xEy ⇐⇒ ∃z ∈ ω ω (x, y, z) ∈ F . As a closed subset of (X, τ )2 × ω ω , F is a Polish space. For each (x, y, z) ∈ F we define a Borel isomorphism π(x,y,z) : X → X by ⎧ ⎨ y, if w = x, π(x,y,z) (w) = x, if w = y, ⎩ u, otherwise. Now let Y be a compact Polish space with the same cardinality as F . For example, if F is uncountable then let Y = 2ω ; if F is countable then let Y be a closed countable subset of 2ω with |F | = |Y |. Then there is a Borel isomorphism ϕ between Y and F . We can therefore associate for any a ∈ Y a Borel isomorphism πϕ(a) . Let G = F(Y ) be the standard Borel group as given in Lemma 9.3.4. Then there is a natural action of G on X induced by a · w = πϕ(a) (w) for a ∈ Y and w ∈ X. It is straightforward to check that this action is Borel X and that E = EG . Exercise 9.3.1 Let T be the multiplicative group of the unit circle {eiθ : 0 ≤ θ < 2π}. Let H = Tω and G = {(xn ) ∈ H : ∃m ∀n ≥ m ( xn = 1 ) }. Show that
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
213
(i) T and H are compact Polish groups; (ii) G is an Fσ subgroup of the Polish group H, hence is a standard Borel group; (iii) G is not Polishable; (iv) E1 is Borel reducible to the coset equivalence relation H/G. Exercise 9.3.2 Let X be a compact Polish space, d a compatible metric on X, and x an accumulation point in X. Show that there is a sequence (yn ) in X with yn → x as n → ∞ such that the following sequence (un ) in F(X) is Cauchy in the Graev metric δ but does not converge in F(X): u0 = e, un+1 = un yn x−1 . Thus δ is not complete on F(X). Exercise 9.3.3 Show that for any uncountable compact Polish space X the standard Borel group F(X) is not Polishable.
9.4
Wild Polish groups
For a general Σ11 equivalence relation the very first attempt to classify it is to decide whether it is Borel or non-Borel. In practice a good place to start is to examine its equivalence classes. Of course, if there is one non-Borel class then we conclude that the equivalence relation is non-Borel. However, for an orbit equivalence relation induced by a Polish group action this strategy will not work since every one of its orbits is Borel. Thus it is somewhat more challenging to decide if an orbit equivalence relation, being Σ11 in general, is Borel or not. In this section we investigate some non-Borel orbit equivalence relations. Theorem 8.2.2 provides a criterion: an orbit equivalence relation on a Polish space is non-Borel iff it has orbits of arbitrarily high complexity. This is useful in some context. For instance, if a locally compact Polish group acts continuously on a Polish space, then every orbit is Fσ and hence the equivalence relation is Borel (in fact Fσ ). However, it is not clear how to directly apply this theorem when the acting group is not locally compact. For instance, one of the simplest nonlocally compact Polish groups is Zω . More work is needed to decide if Zω can induce a non-Borel orbit equivalence relation. In fact, it was a documented question asked by Sami [134] whether any abelian group can induce a non-Borel orbit equivalence relation. This was answered positively by Solecki [140]. We introduce some terminology.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
214
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Definition 9.4.1 A Polish group G is tame if every G-orbit equivalence relation is Borel; it is wild if it is not tame. In this section we present a proof by Solecki that Zω is wild. In fact, Solecki has considered groups of the form n Gn , where Gn are abelian, and has completely determined which of them are tame. Let X be the set of all trees on Z, that is, T ∈ X iff T ⊆ Z<ω is closed <ω under taking initial segments. X is a Borel subset of 2Z , hence is itself a ω standard Borel space. We define an action of Z on X as follows. For T ∈ X and σ ∈ Zω , let σ·T = (σ n) + (T ∩ Zn ). n∈ω
Clearly σ · T ∈ X and the action is Borel. Throughout this section we denote the orbit equivalence relation by E(Zω ), or E for simplicity. Our objective is to show that E is non-Borel. Recall that a tree is well-founded if it does not have any infinite branch, and is ill-founded otherwise. If T1 , T2 ∈ X, we let Φ(T1 , T2 ) = {t ∈ Z<ω : ∀m ≤ lh(t) (t m) + (T1 ∩ Zm ) = T2 ∩ Zm }. Then it is easy to see that Φ(T1 , T2 ) ∈ X, and T1 ET2 iff [Φ(T1 , T2 )] = ∅ iff Φ(T1 , T2 ) is ill-founded. Note that for any n ∈ ω, Φ(T1 , T2 ) ∩ Zn is a coset of a subgroup of Zn . This motivates the following concepts. Definition 9.4.2 Let T ⊆ Z<ω be a tree on Z. T is a coset tree if for all n ∈ ω, T ∩ Zn is a coset of a subgroup of Zn . T is a group tree if for all n ∈ ω, T ∩ Zn is a subgroup of Zn . Note that in general if G is a group and C ⊆ G is nonempty, then C is a left-coset of a subgroup of G iff for all g1 , g2 , g3 ∈ C, g1 g2−1 g3 ∈ C. The same condition also characterizes the right-cosets in G. Thus even without commutativity we may address them simply as cosets. If C is a coset in G and g ∈ C, then g −1 C is a subgroup of G. In fact g −1 C is independent of the choice of g ∈ C, and it is the unique subgroup of G for which C is a left-coset. For an arbitrary C ⊆ G, we define ⎧ −1 ⎨ g C, if C is a nonempty coset in G and g ∈ C, γC = ⎩ ∅, otherwise. Then for any C ⊆ G, γC is a subgroup of G. Now if T is a coset tree on Z, we let γ(T ∩ Zn ). γT = n∈ω
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
215
Then γT is a group tree on Z. Moreover, Φ(γT, T ) = T . When a tree T on Z is well-founded we may speak of its rank, denoted by rk(T ), which is a countable ordinal. Here in order to study ill-founded trees, we define the following more general notion. For any tree T on Z, let define T = {t ∈ T : ∃s ∈ T t s}. Then T ⊆ T . By transfinite induction T α for α < ω1 as follows: T 0 = T, T α+1 = (T α ) , and T λ = α<λ T α , if λ is limit. Since T is countable there is a countable ordinal β < ω1 such that T β = T β+1. Define the height of T , denoted ht(T ), to be the least ordinal β such that T β = T β+1 . For a well-founded tree T the height coincides with the rank of T , and if β = ht(T ) = rk(T ), then T β = ∅. Putting all these concepts together we can now reduce the problem to the construction of well-founded coset trees on Z of arbitrarily high rank. Lemma 9.4.3 If there are well-founded coset trees on Z of arbitrarily high rank then E(Zω ) is non-Borel. Proof. Assume toward a contradiction that E is Borel. Note that Φ is a Borel map from X 2 into X, and (T1 , T2 ) ∈ E ⇐⇒ Φ(T1 , T2 ) is well-founded. Thus Φ(X − E) is a Σ11 set of well-founded trees, and by the boundedness principle for Σ11 sets of well-founded trees (Theorem 1.6.11) there is α < ω1 such that rk(Φ(T1 , T2 )) < α for all (T1 , T2 ) ∈ E. Now if T is any well-founded coset tree with rk(T ) ≥ ω, γT is ill-founded, and since Φ(γT, T ) = T is wellfounded, (γT, T ) ∈ E. It follows that rk(T ) = rk(Φ(γT, T )) < α. This shows that all well-founded coset trees on Z have rank < max{ω, α}, contradicting our assumption. 2
Next we further reduce the problem to the construction of group trees on Z of arbitrarily high height. Note that there are no well-founded group trees of rank ≥ ω, since the element (0, 0, 0, . . . ) is always a branch of such a tree. So we do need to consider the concept of height when dealing with complex group trees. We also need to examine closely the tree nodes in the transfinite pruning process. For this define for any t ∈ T the rank of t in T by the least β such that t ∈ T β , if such β exists, rkT (t) = ω1 , otherwise. For any T ∈ X, if α ≤ ht(T ) is a successor ordinal, then there is t ∈ T with rkT (t) = α. Lemma 9.4.4 Let T be a group tree with ht(T ) > ω. tn ∈ Zn such that for
Then there exist n all n ∈ ω, (tn+1 n) − tn ∈ T , and n tn + (T ∩ Z ) is a well-founded coset tree.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
216
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proof. First we note a general fact about countable groups. If G is a countable group and (Gn ) is a strictly decreasing sequence of subgroups of G, then there exist gn ∈ G such that for all n ∈ ω, gn+1 ∈ gn Gn , and n gn Gn = ∅. To see this, enumerate G as {hn : n ∈ ω} and inductively define gn+1 ∈ G such that gn+1 ∈ gn Gn and hn ∈ gn+1 Gn+1 . Now let T be a group tree with ht(T ) > ω. Let s0 ∈ T be such that rkT (s0 ) = ω + 1. Let k0 = lh(s0 ) + 1. Then there exists a sequence (un )n∈ω such that for all n ∈ ω, lh(un ) = k0 , s ⊆ un , and rkT (un ) < rkT (un+1 ) < ω. Let ln = k0 + rkT (un ) + 1 and πn be the projection of Zln onto the first k0 coordinates. Then πn is a group homomorphism from Zln to Zk0 , and therefore πn (T ∩ Zln ) is a subgroup of T ∩ Zk0 . Note that un ∈ πn (T ∩ Zln ) but un ∈ πm (T ∩ Zlm ) for all m > n. Thus if we let Gn = πn (T ∩ Zln ), then (Gn ) is a strictly decreasing sequence of subgroups of T ∩ Zk0 . By the general fact above we may let vn ∈ T ∩ Zk0 be such that vn+1 ∈ vn + Gn and n (vn + Gn ) = ∅. Next we inductively define a sequence (wn ) such that wn ∈ Zln , πn (wn ) = vn , and (wn+1 ln ) − wn ∈ T . To begin with, let w0 ∈ Zl0 be any extension of v0 . In general, assume wn has been defined to satisfy the inductive hypothesis. Since vn+1 ∈ vn + πn (T ∩ Zln ), there is w ∈ T ∩ Zln such that πn (w) = vn+1 − vn = vn+1 − πn (wn ). Thus vn+1 = πn (w + wn ). Let wn+1 ∈ Zln+1 be any extension of w + wn . Then πn+1 (wn+1 ) = πn (w + wn ) = vn+1 and (wn+1 ln ) − wn = w ∈ T . Finally we define tn ∈ Zn . For any n ∈ ω let m ∈ ω be the least such that n ≤ lm . Then let tn = wm n. We verify that the tn have the required properties. To see that (tn+1 n) − tn ∈ T , it is without loss of generality to assume n = lm for some m ∈ ω. Then tn = wm but tn+1 = wm+1 (n + 1). Therefore, (tn+1 n) − tn = (wm+1 lm ) − wm ∈ T . Now let S = n tn + (T ∩ Zω ). It follows that S is a coset tree. It remains to verify that S is well-founded. We claim that for any s ∈ S ∩ Zk0 , rkS (s) < ω. For this let s ∈ S ∩ Zk0 . Since n vn + πn (T ∩ Zln ) = ∅, we have that s ∈ vn + πn (T ∩ Zln ) for some n ∈ ω. Assume s ∈ S ∩ Zln with s ⊆ s . Then s = πn (s ) ∈ πn (tln )+ πn (T ∩Zln ) = πn (wn )+ πn (T ∩Zln ) = vn + πn (T ∩Zln ), a contradiction. This shows that rkS (s) < ln , and therefore rkS (s) < ω. It follows that rk(S) < ω + k0 , and hence S is well-founded. Lemma 9.4.5 Let T be a group tree, α < ω1 , and tn ∈ Zn satisfy (tn+1 n) − tn ∈ T α . Let S = n tn + (T ∩ Zn ). Then S is a coset tree, and for all β ≤ α, S β = n tn + (T α ∩ Zn ). Proof. It is easy to see that if T is a coset (group) tree then T is a coset (respectively group) tree. It follows that for any β < ω1 , T β is a coset (group)
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
217
tree if T is. We only check that S = n tn + (T ∩ Zn ). The lemma then follows by an easy induction. Let s ∈ S ∩Zn . Then there are t ∈ T ∩Zn , s ∈ S ∩Zn+1 , and t ∈ T ∩Zn+1 such that s = tn + t, s ⊆ s , and s = tn+1 + t . Since (tn+1 n) − tn ∈ T there is also u ∈ T ∩ Zn+1 with (tn+1 n) ⊆ tn ⊆ u. Then t = s−tn = (s n)−tn = (tn+1 n)+(t n)−tn = u n+t n = (u+t ) n.
Since T is a group tree u + t ∈ T , and so S ⊆ n tn + (T ∩Zn ). The converse is obvious. Lemma 9.4.6 For any α < ω1 if there is a group tree of height > α + ω then there is a well-founded coset tree S of rank ≥ α. Proof. Let T be a group tree of height > α + ω. Then T α = ∅. Apply α n that (tn+1 n) − tn ∈ T α Lemma
9.4.4 to αobtainω tn ∈ T ∩ Z for n ∈ ω such and n tn + (T ∩ Z ) is well-founded. Let S = n tn + (T ∩ Zn ). Then by Lemma 9.4.5 S is a coset tree with S α = ∅ well-founded. Thus S is a well-founded coset tree with rk(S) ≥ α. Theorem 9.4.7 (Makkai–Solecki) There are group trees on Z of arbitrarily high height. Proof. Let φ : Z2 → Z be the homomorphism φ(a, b) = a+b. (G 0n ), (G1n ) Let 0 be strictly decreasing sequences of subgroups of Z such that n Gn = n G1n = {0} and φ(G0n × G1n ) = Z for all n ∈ ω. For example, we may take G0n = 2n Z and G1n = 3n Z. By transfinite induction on α < ω1 we define a group tree Tα such that (a) if α = β + 1 is a successor, then (Tα )β ∩ Z = Z and (Tα )a is well-founded if a = 0; (b) if α is a limit, then for any β < α there is n ∈ ω such that G0n × G1n ⊆ (Tα )β ∩ Z2 , and if t ∈ Z2 and t = 0 0, then (Tα )t is well-founded. Granting this construction it is clear that ht(Tα ) ≥ α. Let T0 = {0n : n ∈ ω} and T1 = T0 ∪ Z. If α = β + 1 and β is a successor, let Tα = {∅} ∪ Z ∪ {t(0) t : t ∈ Tβ , lh(t) ≥ 1}. If α = β + 1 and β is a limit, let Tα = the tree generated by {φ(t(0), t(1)) t : t ∈ Tβ , lh(t) ≥ 2}.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
218
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
With these definitions (a) is satisfied. Suppose α is a limit. To satisfy (b) we construct two group trees S0 and S1 and an increasing sequence of successor ordinals βn → α such that (i) G0n ⊆ (S0 )βn and G1n ⊆ (S1 )βn for all n ∈ ω; (ii) (S0 )a and (S1 )a are well-founded if a = 0. If S0 and S1 are defined as above, then let Tα = {t : t {2k : k ∈ ω} ∈ S0 and t {2k + 1 : k ∈ ω} ∈ S1 } . Then it is easy to see that (b) is satisfied. Fix any increasing sequence of successor ordinals βn → α. Apparently the constructions of S0 and S1 are parallel. We only construct S0 and then the construction of S1 will be similar. Note that Tβn have already been constructed to satisfy (a). S0 will be an amalgamation of the Tβn as follows. Let {In }n∈ω be a partition of ω − {0} into infinitely many infinite subsets. For each n ∈ ω define a tree Un by s ∈ Un ⇐⇒ s = ∅ ∨ [ s(0) ∈ G0n ∧ s In ∈ Tβn ∧ ∀i < lh(s)(i = min In ⇒ s(i) = s(0) ∧ i ∈ In ⇒ s(i) = 0) ]. Then Un is a group tree. Let S0 =
Un ∩ Zk . k
n
Then S0 is a group tree by definition. To see that G0n ⊆ (S0 )βn let a ∈ G0n . Let s ∈ Zmin In +1 be such that s(0) = s(min In ) = a and s(i) = 0 for all 0 < i < min In . Then s ∈ Un ⊆ S0 . Since (Tβn )βn −1 ∩ Z = Z, s ∈ (Un )βn −1 ⊆ (S0 )βn −1 . Thus a ∈ (S0 )βn and (i) is satisfied. To show (ii) let a = 0 and toward a contradiction let σ ∈ Zω be an infinite branch of (S0 )a . Then σ(0) = a. Let n ∈ ω be large enough such that a ∈ G0n . We have that σ(min Ii ) = 0 for all i < n. Otherwise if σ(min Ii ) = 0 for i < n, then by our construction of S0 , σ Ii is an infinite branch of Tβi with (σ Ii )(0) = σ(min Ii ) = 0, violating our inductive assumption (a) for Tβi . Let k > max{min Ii : i < n}
and s = σ k ∈ S0 . Then by the definition of S0 we have that s ∈ m Um ∩ Zk . Since Um are group trees we may assume s = sm1 + sm2 + · · · + sml + sml+1 + · · · + smp with m1 < m2 < ml < n ≤ ml+1 < · · · < mp , where smj ∈ Umj for j = 1, . . . , p. It follows that a = sm1 (min Im1 )+· · ·+sml (min Iml )+sml+1 (min Iml+1 )+· · ·+smp (min Imp ). From the above argument we get that smj (min Imj ) = 0 for j = 1, . . . , l. However, smj (min Imj ) ∈ G0n for j = l + 1, . . . , p. Hence a ∈ G0n , a contradiction. This shows that S0 has the required properties.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
219
Corollary 9.4.8 (Solecki) E(Zω ) is non-Borel and Zω is wild. Exercise 9.4.1 Let G be a group and C ⊆ G is nonempty. Show that the following are equivalent: (i) C is a left-coset of some subgroup of G. (ii) C is a right-coset of some subgroup of G. (iii) For all g1 , g2 , g3 ∈ C, g1 g2−1 g3 ∈ C. Exercise 9.4.2 Show that if T is a coset tree then Φ(γT, T ) = T . Give a counterexample where T is not a coset tree. Exercise 9.4.3 Show that if T is a coset tree then (γT ) = γ(T ). Exercise 9.4.4 Let T be a group tree and tn ∈ Zn such that (tn+1 n)−tn ∈ T ∩ Zn . Show that n tn + (T ∩ Zn ) is a coset tree.
9.5
The topological Vaught conjecture
It is not known if the Silver dichotomy holds for orbit equivalence relations of Polish group actions. This is one of the central open problems in the entire invariant descriptive set theory. Proposition 9.5.1 Let G be a Polish group. Then the following statements are equivalent: (a) For any Polish G-space X, either there are countably many orbits or there are perfectly many orbits. (b) For any Polish G-space X and invariant Borel set B ⊆ X, either B contains countably many orbits or B contains perfectly many orbits. (c) For any Borel G-space X, either there are countably many orbits or there are perfectly many orbits.
Proof. The implications (c)⇒(b)⇒(a) are obvious. (a)⇒(c) follows from Theorem 4.4.6. For any Polish group G, the topological Vaught conjecture for G refers to any of the above equivalent statements. We denote it as TVC(G). Then the topological Vaught conjecture is the statement
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
220
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory TVC(G) holds for any Polish group G.
The topological Vaught conjecture was first formulated by Miller. But its counterpart in countable model theory goes back to Vaught. We will elaborate on the connections in Chapter 11. The topological Vaught conjecture for any tame Polish group is true by the Silver dichotomy. In particular, TVC(G) holds for any locally compact Polish group G. Sami [134] proved the topological Vaught conjecture for all abelian Polish groups. Hjorth and Solecki [83] proved it for all nilpotent Polish groups. Solecki [83] proved it for all Polish groups with two-sided invariant metrics. The strongest result up to date is the following theorem of Becker. Theorem 9.5.2 (Becker) TVC(G) holds for all cli Polish groups, that is, Polish groups with complete left-invariant metrics. Proof.
This is a corollary of Theorem 6.5.1.
By Theorem 2.2.11 the class of cli Polish groups is closed under closed subgroups, quotient groups, and group extensions. Also it is easy to see that it is closed under taking countable products. We next consider the abstract closure properties of the class of all Polish groups satisfying the topological Vaught conjecture. Theorem 9.5.3 Let C be the class of Polish groups G for which TVC(G) holds. Then (i) if G ∈ C and H is a closed subgroup of G, then H ∈ C; (ii) if G ∈ C and H is a closed normal subgroup of G, then G/H ∈ C; (iii) if G ∈ C and G is a closed subgroup of H where H/G is countable, then H ∈ C. Proof. For (i) we let X be a Polish H-space. By Theorem 3.5.2 there is a Polish G-space Y such that X is a closed subset of Y and that every G-orbit contains a unique H-orbit. It follows that if Y has only countably many G-orbits then X has only countably many G-orbits. Assume Y has Y perfectly many G-orbits, and let Z ⊆ Y be a perfect set of pairwise EG Y 1 inequivalent elements. Then the relation R = EG (Z × X) is Σ1 and for any Y y ∈ Z there is x ∈ X such that yEG x by Theorem 3.5.2. By the Jankov–von Neumann uniformization theorem R has a σ(Σ11 )-measurable uniformization, that is, there is a σ(Σ11 )-measurable function f : Z → X such that for any y ∈ Z, yRf (y). Since σ(Σ11 )-measurable functions are Baire measurable (by the remarks preceding Proposition 2.3.1), it follows that there is a comeager set C ⊆ Z such that f C is continuous. Without loss of generality assume
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Analytic Equivalence Relations
221
C is Gδ , hence an uncountable Polish space. Then f : C → X is a continuous X Y reduction from id(C) to EH , since for any y1 = y2 ∈ C, (y1 , y2 ) ∈ EG , and Y X thus (f (y1 ), f (y2 )) ∈ EG and therefore (f (y1 ), f (y2 )) ∈ EH . This shows that X has perfectly many G-orbits. (ii) is obvious since every Polish G/H-space is also a G-space. For (iii) we consider a Polish H-space X. X is also a Polish G-space with the restricted action of G, and so either there are only countably many G-orbits or there are perfectly many G-orbits. The assumption implies that every H-orbit contains countably many G-orbits. Thus in the case there are only countably many G-orbits there are only countably many H-orbits as well. In the second X -inequivalent elements. Then case, assume Y ⊆ X is a perfect subset of EG X 1 E = EG Y is a Σ1 equivalence relation on Y with every equivalence class countable. Thus E has the Baire property. By Theorem 5.3.1, and more explicitly Exercise 5.3.1, there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes in Y , X -inequivalent elements in X. which gives a perfect set of EH It follows that the topological Vaught conjecture is equivalent to TVC(G) for any universal Polish group G. By the results of Section 2.5 it is equivalent to TVC(Iso(U)) or to TVC(H(IN )). In the rest of this section we consider a more general notion. Definition 9.5.4 Let X be a standard Borel space and E an equivalence relation on X. The topological Vaught conjecture for (X, E), denoted TVC(X, E), is the statement every invariant Borel subset of X either contains only countably many E-equivalence classes or perfectly many E-equivalence classes. Recall from Section 5.2 that a faithful Borel reduction from an equivalence relation E on X to F on Y is a Borel reduction f : X → Y witnessing E ≤B F and such that for any invariant Borel subset A ⊆ X, [f (A)]F is Borel. The following proposition shows that TVC is closed under faithful Borel reductions. Theorem 9.5.5 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and E, F be Σ11 equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. If E ≤f B F , then TVC(Y, F ) implies TVC(X, E). Proof. Without loss of generality assume that X and Y are Polish spaces. Let f be a faithful Borel reduction from E to F . Let A ⊆ X be invariant Borel. Then [f (A)]F is invariant Borel. Suppose TVC(Y, F ). If [f (A)]F contains only countably many F -classes, then A contains only countably many E-classes. Otherwise, suppose [f (A)]F contains perfectly many F -classes, and let P ⊆ [f (A)]F be a perfect subset of F -inequivalent elements. Consider the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
222
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
set D = {(y, x) ∈ P × X : f (x)F y}. and for all y ∈ P there is x ∈ X with (y, x) ∈ D. By the Then D is Jankov–von Neumann uniformization theorem D has a σ(Σ11 )-measurable uniformization g. Thus g : P → X is Baire measurable and for y1 = y2 ∈ P , (g(y1 ), g(y2 )) ∈ E. Let now C ⊆ P be a dense Gδ subset such that g C is continuous. Then g C : C → X and g(C) is a perfect subset of X with E-inequivalent elements. Σ11
Thus to prove TVC(G) for a Polish group it suffices to consider a Polish G-space to which every other Polish G-space is faithfully Borel reducible. Exercise 9.5.1 Show that if H is a countable group then TVC(G) holds iff TVC(G × H) holds. For any standard Borel space X and equivalence relation E on X the Glimm–Effros dichotomy for (X, E), denoted GED(X, E), is the statement for any invariant Borel subset A ⊆ X, either E A is smooth or E0 c E A. Exercise 9.5.2 Let X, Y be standard Borel spaces and E, F be Σ11 equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. Show that if E ≤f B F , then GED(Y, F ) implies GED(X, E). The following exercise problems outline a proof of the topological Vaught conjecture for abelian Polish groups by Sami. Assume G is an abelian Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Define an equivalence relation E on X by xEy ⇐⇒ Gx = Gy , where Gx = {g ∈ G : g · x = x} is the stabilizer group of x ∈ X. X ⊆ E. Exercise 9.5.3 Show that E is a Π11 equivalence relation and EG Deduce that if there are perfectly many E-equivalence classes then there are perfectly many G-orbits.
Exercise 9.5.4 Assume there are only countably many E-equivalence classes. Show that each E-equivalence class is Borel and that for each E-equivalence X C is Borel. (Hint: Use Theorem 8.2.1.) class C the relation EG Exercise 9.5.5 Show that either there are only countably many G-orbits in X or there are perfectly many G-orbits.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Chapter 10 Turbulent Actions of Polish Groups
In this chapter we turn back to Polish group actions and orbit equivalence relations. The Borel reducibility hierarchy of analytic equivalence relations has taken shape with the results we have established in the previous chapters. However, it is also noticeable that the results were obtained with a variety of machineries ranging from Baire category methods, measure theoretic methods, group theory, and descriptive set theory. There are still many pairs of equivalence relations we have introduced so far but have not mentioned their reducibility relation, either because it is still an open problem or because its known proof goes beyond the limitation of length or scope of this book. It is thus clear that a sweeping method to prove reducibility or, more challengingly, nonreducibility would be much desirable. The greatest success up to date is Hjorth’s theory of turbulence, which we present in this chapter. It will turn out that orbit equivalence relations from turbulent actions are not reducible to any S∞ -orbit equivalence relation. This powerful theorem has many applications in the classification problems of mathematics, and its potential is still being discovered in current research. The results in this entire chapter are due to Hjorth [70], unless otherwise indicated. Expositions of further results of the theory of turbulence can be found in References [70] and [101].
10.1
Homomorphisms and generic ergodicity
In this section we review the Baire category method for showing nonsmoothness of orbit equivalence relations and introduce some new concepts. Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Recall from Section 6.1 X is generically ergodic iff every G-invariant Borel set is either meager that EG X or comeager. We showed in Proposition 6.1.9 that EG is generically ergodic X iff it has a dense orbit, and in Proposition 6.1.10 that if EG is generically X ergodic and has no comeager orbits, then EG is not smooth. The proof of Proposition 6.1.10 (similar to that of Proposition 6.1.6) is by contradiction. We now turn this proof into a positive statement by working a little harder.
223 © 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
224
Invariant Descriptive Set Theory
Proposition 10.1.1 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, and f : X → 2ω a Baire X y. Suppose measurable G-invariant map, that is, f (x) = f (y) whenever xEG X EG is generically ergodic. Then there is a comeager set C ⊆ X on which f is constant. Proof. First by Proposition 6.1.9 (iii) there is an invariant dense Gδ set Y ⊆ X such that every orbit in Y is dense. Now Y is still a Polish G-space. Thus it suffices to find a comeager set C ⊆ Y on which f is constant. Let C ⊆ Y be comeager such that f C is continuous. By the continuity of the action the map x → g · x is a homeomorphism of X onto X for all g ∈ G. Thus we have that ∀g ∈ G ∀∗ x ∈ Y g · x ∈ C. Then by the Kuratowski–Ulam theorem, ∀∗ x ∈ Y ∀∗ g ∈ G g · x ∈ C. Therefore we may find and fix an x ∈ Y such that ∀∗ g ∈ G g · x ∈ C. We claim that [x]G ∩ C is dense. For this let y ∈ Y be arbitrary and U ⊆ Y be open with y ∈ U . Since [x]G is dense the set {g ∈ G : g · x ∈ U } is nonempty. But it is also open, so there is g ∈ G such that g · x ∈ U ∩ C. This shows that [x]G ∩ C ∩ U = ∅. Now f C takes the constant value f (x). To see this, let z ∈ C. By the density of [x]G ∩ C there is a sequence (xn )n∈ω in [x]G ∩ C such that xn → z as n → ∞. However, f is continuous on C, and therefore f (xn ) → f (z) as n → ∞. But f (xn ) = f (x) by the invariance assumption, so f (z) = f (x). In view of its proof the hypotheses of the proposition can be weakened to assume a Baire measurable G-invariant map f defined on a comeager set. Proposition 10.1.2 Let G be a Polish group, X a Polish G-space, C ⊆ X a comeager set, and X is generically f : C → 2ω a Baire measurable G-invariant map. Suppose EG ergodic. Then there is a comeager set C ⊆ X on which f is constant. Proof. As in the above proof there is an invariant comeager set C0 such that every orbit in C0 is dense. Now C ∩ C0 is still comeager, we may let C ⊆ C ∩ C0 be comeager such that f C is continuous. The same proof as above gives that f is constant on C . A number of things can be extracted from these propositions and their proofs. We start with some definitions. Definition 10.1.3 Let X, Y be sets and E, F equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. (1) A map f : X → Y is a homomorphism from E to F if for any x1 , x2 ∈ X, x1 Ex2 ⇒ f (x1 )F f (x2 ).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Turbulent Actions of Polish Groups
225
(2) If X is a Polish space, then a generic homomorphism from E to F is a map f from a comeager subset C0 of X to Y so that for some comeager set C1 ⊆ C0 f is a homomorphism from E C1 to F . Definition 10.1.4 Let X, Y be Polish spaces and E, F equivalence relations on X, Y , respectively. We say that E is generically F -ergodic if for every Baire measurable generic homomorphism f from E to F there is a comeager set C ⊆ X such that f (x1 )F f (x2 ) for any x1 , x2 ∈ C. With the new terminology Proposition 10.1.2 can be succinctly stated as Any generically ergodic orbit equivalence relation is generically id(2ω )-ergodic. It turns out that these notions are actually equivalent. Lemma 10.1.5 X is generically Let G be a Polish group and X a Polish G-space. Then EG ergodic iff it is generically id(2ω )-ergodic. X Proof. Suppose EG is generically id(2ω )-ergodic. Let {Un }n∈ω be a countable base for X consisting of nonempty open sets. Define f : X → 2ω by
f (x)(n) = 1 ⇐⇒ ∃g ∈ G g · x ∈ Un ⇐⇒ x ∈ [Un ]G . Since [Un ]G is open for each n ∈ ω, f is a Borel map. It is clear that f is X